[Federal Register Volume 65, Number 201 (Tuesday, October 17, 2000)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 61744-62273]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 00-19099]
[[Page 61743]]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Part II
Environmental Protection Agency
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
40 CFR Part 60, 61, and 63
Amendments for Testing and Monitoring Provisions; Final Rule
Federal Register / Vol. 65, No. 201 / Tuesday, October 17, 2000 /
Rules and Regulations
[[Page 61744]]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
40 CFR Parts 60, 61, and 63
[FRL-6523-6]
RIN 2060-AG21
Amendments for Testing and Monitoring Provisions
AGENCY: Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
ACTION: Final rule: amendments.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: In this rule, we, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
are making final minor amendments to our stationary source testing and
monitoring rules. These amendments include miscellaneous editorial
changes and technical corrections that are needed. We are also
promulgating Performance Specification 15, which contains the criteria
for certifying continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS) that use
fourier transform infrared spectroscopy (FTIR). In addition, we are
changing the outline of the test methods and CEMS performance
specifications already listed in Parts 60, 61, and 63 to fit a new
format recommended by the Environmental Monitoring Management Council
(EMMC). The editorial changes and technical corrections update the
rules and help maintain their original intent. Performance
Specification 15 will provide the needed acceptance criteria for FTIR
CEMS as they emerge as a new technology. We are reformatting the test
methods and performance specifications to make them more uniform in
content and interchangeable with other Agency methods. The amendments
apply to a large number of industries that are already subject to the
current provisions of Parts 60, 61, and 63. Therefore, we have not
listed specific affected industries or their Standard Industrial
Classification codes here.
DATES: Effective Date. This regulation is effective October 17, 2000.
The incorporation by reference of certain publications listed in the
rule is approved by the Director of the Federal Register as of October
17, 2000.
ADDRESSES: Docket. Docket No. A-97-12, contains information relevant to
this rule. You can read and copy it between 8 a.m. and 5:30 p.m.,
Monday through Friday, (except for Federal holidays), at our Air and
Radiation Docket and Information Center, U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, 401 M Street, SW., Washington, DC 20460; telephone (202) 260-
7548. Go to Room M-1500, Waterside Mall (ground floor). The docket
office may charge a reasonable fee for copying.
Summary of Comments and Responses Document. You may obtain the
Summary of Comments and Responses Document over the Internet at http://www.epa.gov/ttn/emc; choose the ``Methods'' menu, then choose the
``Summary of Comments and Responses'' hypertext under Category A.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Mr. Foston Curtis, Emission
Measurement Center (MD-19), Emissions, Monitoring, and Analysis
Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park,
North Carolina 27711; telephone (919) 541-1063; facsimile number (919)
541-1039; electronic mail address ``[email protected]''.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: Outline. The information presented in this
preamble is organized as follows:
I. Why were these amendments made?
II. What does the new EMMC Format for methods look like?
III. What were the significant public comments and what resulting
changes were made since proposal?
A. Updates to the ASTM Methods
B. Performance requirements for continuous instrumental methods
of Part 60--Methods 3A, 6C, 7E, 10, and 20
C. Method 18 (Part 60)
D. Method 25 (Part 60)
E. Performance Specification 15 (Part 60)
IV. What revisions were made that were not in the proposed rule?
V. What are the administrative requirements for this rule?
A. Docket
B. Office of Management and Budget Review
C. Regulatory Flexibility Act Compliance
D. Paperwork Reduction Act
E. Unfunded Mandates Reform Act
F. E.O. 13132--Federalism
G. E.O. 13084--Consultation and Coordination with Indian Tribal
Governments
H. Executive Order 13084--Protection of Children from
Environmental Health Risks and Safety Risks
I. Submission to Congress and the General Accounting Office
J. National Technology Transfer and Advancement Act
K. Plain Language in Government Writing
I. Why Were These Amendments Made?
We have compiled miscellaneous errors and editions that are needed
for the test methods, performance specifications, and associated
regulations in 40 CFR Parts 60, 61, and 63. The corrections and
revisions consist primarily of typographical errors, technical errors
in equations and diagrams, and narrative that is no longer applicable
or is obsolete. Some of the revisions were brought to our attention by
the public. The major changes to the rule proposed on August 27, 1997
that resulted from public comments are discussed in Section III. Please
note that, although numerous technical corrections were made to Parts
60, 61, and 63 rules, none affected a compliance standard or reporting
or recordkeeping requirement. Revisions were only made to sections that
pertain to source testing or monitoring of emissions and operations.
II. What Does the New EMMC Format for Methods Look Like?
The new EMMC format we have adopted for analytical methods was
developed by consensus and will help integrate make consistent the test
methods written by different EPA programs. The test methods and
performance specifications being restructured in the new format are
shown in Table 1.
Table 1.--Test Methods and Performance Specifications Restructured in
the EMMC Format
------------------------------------------------------------------------
40 CFR 60 App. A 40 CFR 60 App. B 40 CFR 61 40 CFR 63
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1, 1A PS-2 101, 101A 303, 303A
2, 2A, 2B, 2C, PS-3 102 304A, 304B
2D, 2E
3, 3A, 3B PS-4, PS-4A 103 305
4 PS-5 104 306, 306A, 306B
5, 5A, 5B, 5D, PS-6 105
5E, 5F, 5G, 5H
6, 6A, 6B, 6C ................. 106
7, 7A 7B, 7C, ................. 107, 107A
7D, 7E
8 ................. 108, 108A, 108B,
108C
10, 10A, 10B ................. 111
11
12
[[Page 61745]]
13A, 13B
14
15, 15A
16, 16A, 16B
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24, 24A
25, 25A, 25B,
25C, 25D, 25E
26, 26A
27
28, 28A
29
------------------------------------------------------------------------
The methods and specifications listed in Table 1 were restructured
in the format shown in Table 2. Only in a few instances were there
deviations from this recommended format.
Table 2.--EMMC Format
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Section No. Section heading
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.0.................................... Scope and Application.
2.0.................................... Summary of the Method.
3.0.................................... Definitions.
4.0.................................... Interferences.
5.0.................................... Safety.
6.0.................................... Equipment and Supplies.
7.0.................................... Reagents and Standards.
8.0.................................... Sample Collection,
Preservation, Storage and
Transport.
9.0.................................... Quality Control.
10.0................................... Calibration and
Standardization.
11.0................................... Analytical Procedure.
12.0................................... Calculations and Data Analysis.
13.0................................... Method Performance.
14.0................................... Pollution Prevention.
15.0................................... Waste Management.
16.0................................... References.
17.0................................... Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts,
and Validation Data.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
III. What Were the Significant Public Comments and What Resulting
Changes Were Made Since Proposal?
We asked that public comments on the August 27, 1997 proposal (62
FR 45369) be submitted by October 27, 1997. On November 18, 1997, we
reopened (62 FR 61483) the comment period to allow additional time for
review and comment. We received comments from facility owners and
operators, trade associations, State and Local air pollution control
agencies, environmental consultants, and private citizens. Their
comments were considered in developing this final action. A detailed
discussion of all comments are contained in the Summary of Comments and
Responses Document (see ADDRESSES section of this preamble). The major
public comments and the Agency's responses are summarized below.
A. Update to ASTM Methods
Several commenters supported our updating the references to ASTM
Standards to include the dates of the most recent versions. However,
some were concerned that updated standards not supplant the versions
previously allowed and those promulgated with the original regulation.
The ASTM recommended we follow the tradition of other governmental
agencies and list only the latest version of each standard. This would
present the latest, most improved standard. They felt that previously
approved versions would still be acceptable for future use, and this
could be noted in the preamble to the final rule.
On January 14, 1998, we published a supplementary Federal Register
notice to solicit public comments on this idea. We received three
comment letters. All commenters objected to the idea of listing only
the latest version of the ASTM standard. The commenters noted problems
that would be encountered with State Implementation Plans (SIP) wherein
only the specific ASTM standards listed in the subparts would be
allowed. They feared that listing only the latest version of the
standard would change the current allowance to use earlier versions.
This could potentially change the intent of the original emission
standard. Most commenters didn't think a preamble explanation was
sufficient assurance for continued allowance of earlier versions since
preambles are not published in the Code of Federal Regulations. There
were additional concerns for laboratories using currently acceptable
versions who would need to upgrade their practice to reflect the latest
version of a standard. The commenters were not amenable to only listing
the latest standard unless
[[Page 61746]]
language were added to the General Provisions of each part stating that
previously allowed versions of the standards were still allowed at the
discretion of the source. We feel the commenters have valid concerns
and have decided to continue the convention of listing all acceptable
versions of the ASTM standards including the new updates. The intent of
this action is to allow any of the yearly-designated versions of a
specific standard to be used in the applications where cited.
B. Performance Requirements for Continuous Instrumental Methods of Part
60--Methods 3A, 6C, 7E, 10, and 20
Several commenters thought the preamble language for this proposal
gave inadequate notice of the changes being made. Commenters stated
that, in the proposal, we did not provide an adequate basis and purpose
statement and misled the readers into thinking that the proposal
contained no substantive changes to these test methods. Based on the
number of substantive changes in this proposal, and in light of the
Section 307(d) requirements, the commenters felt that we must address
these issues in a new proposal before the revisions can go final with
the rest of the package. We agree with the commenters that the preamble
to the proposed rule may not have given adequate public notice for some
of the revisions. The revisions to the continuous instrumental methods
(Methods 3A, 6C, 7E, 10, and 20) may be considered substantive, but
were not enumerated in the preamble nor was a supporting rationale
given. Therefore, the revisions to Methods 3A, 6C, 7E, 10, and 20 will
be reproposed as a separate rule. The comments already received on the
proposal of these methods will be held for consideration with any
future comments that result from the reproposal.
C. Method 18 (Part 60, Appendix A)
One commenter thought Method 18 was difficult to follow. The
commenter suggested that, to simplify organization of the method, we
should divide the method into five categories. Each title would begin
with ``Measurement of Gaseous Organic Compounds by Gas Chromatography''
but have the following subtitles:
18A--Evacuated container sampling procedure.
18B--Bag sampling procedure.
18C--Direct interface procedure.
18D--Dilution interface procedure.
18E--Adsorption tube sampling procedure.
Another commenter suggested dividing the method into two different
methods, one for the direct extractive technique, and the other for
sample collection into bags, flasks, or adsorbents.
The method is currently divided according to the various sampling
procedures; for example, Section 8.2.2 is the Direct Interface Sampling
and Analysis Procedures, Section 8.2.3 is Dilution Interface Sampling
and Analysis Procedures, and so on. We do not believe that multiple
sampling procedures warrant dividing Method 18 into separate methods.
We feel a single method allowing different procedures offers the source
greater flexibility than citing specific procedures for particular
situations. One commenter noted that the proposed method requires
triplicate injections for analysis of the calibration standards used
for preparing the pre-test calibration curve, triplicate injections of
the test samples, and triplicate injections for construction of the
post-test calibration curve. The commenter questioned the additional
accuracy expected for the extra hours spent in sample analysis and
calibration while in the field conducting a source test compared to the
current method which requires two consecutive analyses for pre- and
post-test calibration and sample analyses meeting the same criteria for
acceptance. We are increasing the calibration requirement to triple
injections to tighten the method's quality assurance procedures.
Triplicate calibration injections is the normal procedure prevalent in
the analytical community, as well as in other Agency methodologies. It
is difficult to establish precision and accuracy with duplicate
injections. However, triplicate injections provide a reasonable measure
of analytical precision without being overly burdensome. We do not feel
the increase in time and costs associated with the third injection will
significantly affect a typical test, considering the added benefits to
data quality that are gained.
Several commenters asked us to revise and clarify various aspects
of Section 10. We have made these modifications to address their
concerns.
Regarding Section 13.1, one commenter noted that Method 18 is not a
method in the general sense, but is more of a guideline on how to
develop and document a test method. The commenter therefore felt that
any prospective method should be written up and submitted to us along
with the proper documentation that includes recovery study results. We
disagree with this commenter. Method 18, which has been cited and used
for many years, is a specific gas chromatography method with specific
sampling, analytical, and data quality requirements. The method was
written to accomodate many test sites having many possible target
compounds and gas matrices. The tester has been given numerous
sampling, separation, and analytical system options to make the method
adaptable to the needs of various compliance demonstrations.
Several commenters asked us to clarify the 5 to 10 percent relative
standard deviation (RSD) requirement for calibration standards in
Section 13.1.
We have added clarity to Section 13.1. The 5 to 10 percent RSD is
not a precision criterion for calibration standards but a typical
precision range for analyzing field samples. Five percent RSD is
required for triplicate injections of calibration standards.
D. Method 25 (Part 60, Appendix A)
One commenter noted that Method 25 has limitations due to
conditions that may exist in stack gas. If such conditions exist, the
commenter recommends interfacing a nonmethane analyzer directly to the
source or use Method 25A or 25B to measure the emissions. The commenter
recommended modifying Method 25 to allow instruments that are able to
determine the methane and nonmethane portions using components
different from those described by Method 25 when the analyzer is
directly interfaced to the source. The commenter feels that Method 25
would be more practical for determining methane/nonmethane emissions at
the field site if the method could be modified to allow these other
analyzers. The commenter feels that it will also be necessary that
fixed performance specifications be defined in the method, such as
those for Method 6C. We believe these comments address method changes
that are beyond those covered in the proposal and are, therefore,
beyond the scope of this action. The commenter is encouraged to pursue
these method changes through other appropriate channels such as
submitting a request to use them as an alternative method.
E. Performance Specification 15 (Part 60, Appendix B)
One commenter noted that the statement of applicability for the
demonstration is limited to the criteria we gave. The commenter stated
that, with performance based measurement systems, the focus is on data
quality objectives (DQO) where the performance specifications are
coupled with the DQO. We believe the purpose of reference methods and,
in this case
[[Page 61747]]
performance specifications, is to provide standard procedures for
sources to follow in order to provide quality emission data. However,
we do provide latitude to sources by publishing performance-based
methods and PS whenever possible. This performance specification is one
such procedure; as long as an FTIR sampling system meets the
requirements of the performance specifications, it can be used for any
regulated pollutant.
Based on public comments and upon further deliberation, we have
removed the system calibration requirement from Section 10.3 of PS-15.
Since both a system calibration and the calibration transfer standard
measurement basically test instrument function, having both of these
requirements in the performance specifications is redundant.
One commenter felt that the number of runs should be given as
``guidance'' rather than made a requirement. We set the requirement for
nine runs (when comparing the FTIR to a reference method) and 10 runs
(when comparing the FTIR to a reference monitor) because these are
standard prodedures for performance specifications. We note that this
performance specification also allows analyte spiking as an option;
therefore, a revision on this point is not necessary.
One commenter noted that Section 11.1.1.4.3 states ``if the RM is a
CEM, synchronize the sampling flow rates of the RM and the FTIR CEM.''
The commenter noted that instrumental analyzers are currently used for
reference methods. EPA Methods 6C, 7E, 3A, and 10 measure
SO2, NOX, O2, CO2, and CO
on a continuous basis for a short period of time and are referred to as
instrumental analyzers and not CEMs. The commenter felt the statement
should read ``if the reference method is an instrumental analyzer,
synchronize the sampling flow rates of the RM and the FTIR.'' We agree
with the commenter and have made the noted change.
IV. What Revisions Were Made That Were Not in the Proposed Rule?
A revision was made to Section 6.6 of Method 21 of Part 60 to
clarify the VOC monitoring instrument specifications. The requirement
for the instrument to be intrinsically safe for Classes 1 and 2,
Division 1 conditions has been amended to require them to be
intrinsically safe for Class 1 and/or Class 2, Division 1 conditions,
as appropriate. The performance test provisions of Sec. 60.754(d) for
determining control device efficiency when combusting landfill gas were
amended to allow the use of Method 25 as an alternative to Methods 18
and 25C. The tester has the option of using either Method 18, 25, or
25C in this case. These amendments were not published in the proposed
rule.
V. Administrative Requirements
A. Docket
Docket A-97-12 is an organized and complete file of all information
submitted to us or otherwise considered in the development of this
final rulemaking. The principal purposes of the docket are: (1) to
allow interested parties to identify and locate documents so that they
can effectively participate in the rulemaking process, and (2) to serve
as the record in case of judicial review (except for interagency review
materials) [Clean Air Act Section 307(d)(7)(A), 42 U.S.C.
7607(d)(7)(A)].
B. Office of Management and Budget Review
Under Executive Order 12866 (58 FR 51735 October 4, 1993), we must
determine whether the regulatory action is ``significant'' and
therefore subject to Office of Management and Budget (OMB) review and
the requirements of this Executive Order. The Order defines
``significant regulatory action'' as one that is likely to result in a
rule that may: (1) Have an annual effect on the economy of $100 million
or more or adversely affect in a material way the economy, a sector of
the economy, productivity, competition, jobs, the environment, public
health or safety, or State, Local, or Tribal governments or
communities; (2) Create a serious inconsistency or otherwise interfere
with an action taken or planned by another agency; (3) Materially alter
the budgetary impact of entitlements, grants, user fees, or loan
programs, or the rights and obligations of recipients thereof; or (4)
Raise novel legal or policy issues arising out of legal mandates, the
President's priorities, or the principles set forth in the Executive
Order.
We have determined that this rule is not a ``significant regulatory
action'' under the terms of Executive Order 12866 and is therefore not
subject to OMB review. We have determined that this regulation would
result in none of the economic effects set forth in Section 1 of the
Order because it does not impose emission measurement requirements
beyond those specified in the current regulations, nor does it change
any emission standard.
C. Regulatory Flexibility Act Compliance
We have determined that it is not necessary to prepare a regulatory
flexibility analysis in connection with this final rule. We have also
determined that this rule will not have a significant economic impact
on a substantial number of small businesses. This rulemaking does not
impose emission measurement requirements beyond those specified in the
current regulations, nor does it change any emission standard.
D. Paperwork Reduction Act
This rule does not impose or change any information collection
requirements. The Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980, 44 U.S.C. 3501, et
seq., is not required.
E. Unfunded Mandates Reform Act
Title II of the unfunded Mandates Reform Act of 1995 (UMRA), Pub.
L. 104-4, establishes requirements for Federal agencies to assess the
effects of their regulatory action on State, local, and tribal
governments and the private sector. Under section 202 of the UMRA, we
generally must prepare a written statement, including a cost-benefit
analysis, for proposed and final rules with ``Federal mandates'' that
may result in expenditures by State, local, and tribal governments, in
the aggregate, or by the private sector, of $100 million or more in any
one year. Before promulgating an EPA rule for which a written statement
is needed, Section 205 of the UMRA generally requires us to identify
and consider a reasonable number of regulatory alternatives and adopt
the least costly, most cost-effective or least burdensome alternative
that achieves the objectives of the rule. The provisions of Section 205
do not apply when they are inconsistent with applicable law. Moreover,
Section 205 allows EPA to adopt an alternative other than the least
costly, most cost-effective or least burdensome alternative if the
Administrator publishes with the final rule an explanation why that
alternative was not adopted. Before we establish any regulatory
requirement that may significantly or uniquely affect small
governments, including tribal governments, we must develop a small
government agency plan as required under Section 203 of the UMRA. The
plan must provide for notifying potentially affected small governments,
enabling officials of affected small governments to have meaningful and
timely input in the development of our regulatory proposals with
significant Federal intergovernmental mandates, and informing,
educating, and advising small governments on compliance with the
regulatory requirements.
Today's rule contains no Federal mandates (under the regulatory
[[Page 61748]]
provisions of Title II of the UMRA) for State, local, or tribal
governments or the private sector. We have determined that today's rule
does not include a Federal mandate because it imposes no enforceable
duty on any State, local, and tribal governments, or the private
sector. Today's rule simply makes corrections and minor revisions to
current testing requirements and promulgates a monitoring specification
that can be used to support future monitoring rules. For the same
reason we have also determined that this rule contains no regulatory
requirements that might significantly or uniquely affect small
governments.
F. Executive Order 13132 (Federalism)
Executive Order 13132, entitled ``Federalism'' (64 FR 43255, August
10, 1999), requires EPA to develop an accountable process to ensure
``meaningful and timely input by State and local officials in the
development of regulatory policies that have federalism implications.''
``Policies that have federalism implications'' is defined in the
Executive Order to include regulations that have ``substantial direct
effects on the States, on the relationship between the national
government and the States, or on the distribution of power and
responsibilities among the various levels of government.'' Under
Executive Order 13132, EPA may not issue a regulation that has
federalism implications, that imposes substantial direct compliance
costs, and that is not required by statute, unless the Federal
government provides the funds necessary to pay the direct compliance
costs incurred by State and local governments, or EPA consults with
State and local officials early in the process of developing the
proposed regulation. EPA also may not issue a regulation that has
federalism implications and that preempts State law unless the Agency
consults with State and local officials early in the process of
developing the proposed regulation.
If EPA complies by consulting, Executive Order 13132 requires EPA
to provide to the Office of Management and Budget (OMB), in a
separately identified section of the preamble to the rule, a federalism
summary impact statement (FSIS). The FSIS must include a description of
the extent of EPA's prior consultation with State and local officials,
a summary of the nature of their concerns and the agency's position
supporting the need to issue the regulation, and a statement of the
extent to which the concerns of State and local officials have been
met. Also, when EPA transmits a draft final rule with federalism
implications to OMB for review pursuant to Executive Order 12866, EPA
must include a certification from the agency's Federalism Official
stating that EPA has met the requirements of Executive Order 13132 in a
meaningful and timely manner.
This final rule will not have substantial direct effects on the
States, on the relationship between the national government and the
States, or on the distribution of power and responsibilities among the
various levels of government, as specified in Executive Order 13132.
This final rule simply makes corrections and minor revisions to current
testing requirements and promulgates a monitoring specification that
can be used to support future monitoring rules. Thus, the requirements
of section 6 of the Executive Order do not apply to this rule.
G. Executive Order 13084: Consultation and Coordination With Indian
Tribal Governments
Under Executive Order 13084, we may not issue a regulation that is
not required by statute, that significantly or uniquely affects the
communities of Indian tribal governments, and that imposes substantial
direct compliance costs on those communities, unless the Federal
government provides the funds necessary to pay the direct compliance
costs incurred by the tribal governments, or we consult with those
governments. If we comply by consulting, Executive Order 13094 requires
us to provide to the Office of Management and Budget, in a separately
identified section of the preamble to the rule, a description of the
extent of our prior consultation with representatives of affected
tribal governments, a summary of the nature of their concerns, and a
statement supporting the need to issue the regulation. In addition,
Executive Order 13084 requires us to develop an effective process
permitting elected and other representatives of Indian tribal
governments ``to provide meaningful and timely input in the development
of regulatory policies on matters that significantly or uniquely affect
their communities.'' Today's rule does not significantly or uniquely
affect the communities of Indian tribal governments. This rule only
amends regulatory requirements that are already in effect and adds no
additional requirements. Accordingly, the requirements of Section 3(b)
of Executive Order 13084 do not apply to this rule.
H. Executive Order 13045: Protection of Children From Environmental
Health Risks and Safety Risks
Executive Order 13045: ``Protection of Children from Environmental
Health Risks and Safety Risks'' (62 FR 19885, April 23, 1997) applies
to any rule that: (1) Is determined to be ``economically significant''
as defined under E.O. 12866, and (2) concerns an environmental health
or safety risk that we have reason to believe may have a
disproportionate effect on children. If the regulatory action meets
both criteria, we must evaluate the environmental health or safety
effects of the planned rule on children, and explain why the planned
regulation is preferable to other potentially effective and reasonably
feasible alternatives we considered.
We interpret E.O. 13045 as applying only to those regulatory
actions that are based on health or safety risks, such that the
analysis required under section 5-501 of the Order has the potential to
influence the regulation. This rule is not subject to E.O. 13045
because it does not establish an environmental standard intended to
mitigate health or safety risks.
I. Submission to Congress and the General Accounting Office
The Congressional Review Act, 5 U.S.C. 801, et seq., as added by
the Small Business Regulatory Enforcement Fairness Act of 1996,
generally provides that before a rule may take effect, the agency
promulgating the rule must submit a rule report, which includes a copy
of the rule, to each House of the Congress and to the Comptroller
General of the United States. We will submit a report containing this
rule and other required information to the U.S. Senate, the U.S. House
of Representatives, and the Comptroller General of the United States
before it is published in the Federal Register. This action is not a
``major rule'' as defined by 5 U.S.C. 804(2). This rule will be
effective October 17, 2000.
J. National Technology Transfer and Advancement Act
Section 12(d) of the National Technology Transfer and Advancement
Act of 1995 (NTTAA), P.L. 104-113 (15 U.S.C. 272), directs us to use
voluntary consensus standards (VCSs) in our regulatory activities
unless to do so would be inconsistent with applicable law or otherwise
impractical. Voluntary consensus standards are technical standards
(e.g., materials specifications, test methods, sampling procedures,
business practices, etc.) that are developed or adopted by VCS bodies.
[[Page 61749]]
The NTTAA requires us to provide Congress, through OMB, explanations
when we decide not to use available and applicable VCSs.
This rulemaking involves technical standards. Specifically, this
rule makes technical corrections to portions of the subparts in Parts
60, 61, and 63 pertaining to source testing or monitoring of emissions
and operations. The rule does not, however, change the nature of any of
the technical standards currently in use. Moreover, many of the
technical standards currently in use are VCSs developed by the American
Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). In fact, we have taken the
opportunity presented by this rulemaking to update the references to
the ASTM standards to include the dates of the most recent versions of
these standards (see Section III.A. of the preamble for a full
discussion). A complete list of the ASTM standards updated by this rule
can be found in Part 60.17. Thus, today's action is consistent with our
obligation to use VCSs in our regulatory activities whenever
practicable.
Finally, we are promulgating PS-15, which identifies certification
criteria for continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS) using
fourier transform infrared spectroscopy (FTIR). PS-15 is a performance
specification that is being issued as an example procedure for use by
industry and regulatory agencies as appropriate. While there are no
underlying national EPA standards that will require the use of this
procedure at this time, we conducted a search for VCS FTIR performance
specifications and found none. We plan to periodically conduct
rulemaking to make minor updates to test methods and performance
specifications. In these rulemakings, we will review updates to VCS
incorporated by reference and consider VCSs that may be used in lieu of
EPA reference methods. We plan to provide the opportunity for public
comment during these update rulemakings in part to allow VCS
organizations to suggest where VCSs may be available for our use.
K. Plain Language in Government Writing
This rule is not written in the plain language format. In most
cases, the rule corrects errors and makes updates to small portions of
existing regulations that are not in plain language. The new plain
language format was not used to keep the language of the amended
sections consistent with that of the unamended rules. Also, the test
methods were reformatted and proposed before the plain language
provisions were mandated. Due to their volume, the time and costs
associated with the magnitude of effort required to rewrite the final
methods in plain language is prohibitive. However, this preamble is
written in plain language, and we believe the amendments and
reformatted test methods have been written clearly.
List of Subjects
40 CFR Part 60
Environmental protection, Administrative practice and procedure,
Air pollution control, Continuous emission monitors, Incorporation by
reference.
40 CFR Part 61
Environmental protection, Air pollution control, Incorporation by
reference.
40 CFR Part 63
Environmental protection, Administrative practice and procedure,
Air pollution control, Hazardous substances, Intergovernmental
relations, Incorporation by reference, Reporting and recordkeeping
requirements.
Dated: January 10, 2000.
Carol M. Browner,
Administrator.
For the reasons stated in the preamble, The Environmental
Protection Agency amends title 40, chapter I of the Code of Federal
Regulations as follows:
PART 60--STANDARDS OF PERFORMANCE FOR NEW STATIONARY SOURCES
1. The authority citation for part 60 continues to read as follows:
Authority: 42 U.S.C. 7401, 7411, 7413, 7414, 7416, 7601, and
7602.
Sec. 60.11 [Amended]
2. Amend Sec. 60.11 by:
a. In paragraphs (b) and (e)(1), by revising the words ``Reference
Method 9'' to read ``Method 9'' wherever they occur;
b. In paragraph (e)(5), revise the words ``to determine opacity
compliance'' in the last sentence to read ``to determine compliance
with the opacity standard.''
Sec. 60.13 [Amended]
3. Amend Sec. 60.13 by:
a. Revising the last two sentences in paragraph (d)(1), revising
paragraph (g), and revising the first sentence in paragraph (j)(2).
b. Revising the words ``ng/J of pollutant'' to read ``ng of
pollutant per J of heat input'' in the sixth sentence of paragraph (h).
c. Revising the words ``with the effluent gases'' to read ``in the
effluent gases'' in paragraph (i)(1).
d. Revising the words ``effluent from two or more affected
facilities are released'' to read ``effluent from two or more affected
facilities is released'' in paragraph (i)(9).
e. Revising the words ``relative accuracy test'' to read ``relative
accuracy (RA) test'' in the paragraph (j) introductory text.
f. Revising the words ``relative accuracy'' to read ``RA'' in
paragraphs (j)(1) and (2).
g. Revising the section references ``section 7'' and ``section 10''
to read ``Section 8.4'' and ``Section 16.0,'' respectively, in
paragraphs (j)(1) and (2).
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.13 Monitoring requirements.
* * * * *
(d) * * *
(1) * * * For continuous monitoring systems measuring opacity of
emissions not using automatic zero adjustments, the optical surfaces
exposed to the effluent gases shall be cleaned prior to performing the
zero and span drift adjustments. For systems using automatic zero
adjustments, the optical surfaces shall be cleaned when the cumulative
automatic zero compensation exceeds 4 percent opacity.
* * * * *
(g)(1) When more than one continuous monitoring system is used to
measure the emissions from only one affected facility (e.g., multiple
breechings, multiple outlets), the owner or operator shall report the
results as required from each continuous monitoring system. When the
effluent from one affected facility is released to the atmosphere
through more than one point, the owner or operator shall install an
applicable continuous monitoring system on each separate effluent
unless installation of fewer systems is approved by the Administrator.
(2) When the effluents from two or more affected facilities subject
to the same opacity standard are combined before being released to the
atmosphere, the owner or operator may either install a continuous
opacity monitoring system at a location monitoring the combined
effluent or install an opacity combiner system comprised of opacity and
flow monitoring systems on each stream, and shall report as per
Sec. 60.7(c) on the combined effluent. When the affected facilities are
not subject to the same opacity standard, the owner or operator shall
report the results as per Sec. 60.7(c) on the combined effluent against
the most stringent opacity standard
[[Page 61750]]
applicable, except for documented periods of shutdown of the affected
facility, subject to the most stringent opacity standard. During such
times, the next most stringent opacity standard shall apply.
(3) When the effluents from two or more affected facilities subject
to the same emissions standard, other than opacity, are combined before
being released to the atmosphere, the owner or operator may install
applicable continuous emission monitoring systems on each effluent or
on the combined effluent. The owner or operator may report the results
as required for each affected facility or for the combined effluent.
When the affected facilities are not subject to the same emissions
standard, separate continuous emission monitoring systems shall be
installed on each effluent and the owner or operator shall report as
required for each affected facility.
* * * * *
(j) * * *
(2) The waiver of a CEMS RA test will be reviewed and may be
rescinded at such time, following successful completion of the
alternative RA procedure, that the CEMS data indicate that the source
emissions are approaching the level. * * *
* * * * *
Sec. 60.14 [Amended]
4. In Sec. 60.14, paragraph (b)(1) is amended by revising the words
``utilization of emission factors demonstrate'' to read ``utilization
of emission factors demonstrates.''
Sec. 60.17 [Amended]
5. Amend Sec. 60.17 by:
a. Revising paragraphs (a), (i), and (j).
b. In paragraph (b)(1), revise the words ``Secs. 60.204(d)(2),
60.214(d)(2), 60.224(d)(2), 60.234(d)(2)'' to read
``Secs. 60.204(b)(3), 60.214(b)(3), 60.224(b)(3), 60.234(b)(3).''
c. In paragraph (d), by revising the words ``IBR approved January
27, 1983 for Sec. 60.285(d)(4)'' to read ``IBR approved January 27,
1983 for Sec. 60.285(d)(3).''
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.17 Incorporation by reference.
* * * * *
(a) The following materials are available for purchase from at
least one of the following addresses: American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM), 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103; or
University Microfilms International, 300 North Zeeb Road, Ann Arbor, MI
48106.
(1) ASTM A99-76, 82 (Reapproved 1987), Standard Specification for
Ferromanganese, incorporation by reference (IBR) approved January 27,
1983 for Sec. 60.261.
(2) ASTM A100-69, 74, 93, Standard Specification for Ferrosilicon,
IBR approved January 27, 1983 for Sec. 60.261.
(3) ASTM A101-73, 93, Standard Specification for Ferrochromium, IBR
approved January 27, 1983 for Sec. 60.261.
(4) ASTM A482-76, 93, Standard Specification for
Ferrochromesilicon, IBR approved January 27, 1983 for Sec. 60.261.
(5) ASTM A483-64, 74 (Reapproved 1988), Standard Specification for
Silicomanganese, IBR approved January 27, 1983 for Sec. 60.261.
(6) ASTM A495-76, 94, Standard Specification for Calcium-Silicon
and Calcium Manganese-Silicon, IBR approved January 27, 1983 for
Sec. 60.261.
(7) ASTM D86-78, 82, 90, 93, 95, 96, Distillation of Petroleum
Products, IBR approved for Secs. 60.562-2(d), 60.593(d), and 60.633(h).
(8) ASTM D129-64, 78, 95, Standard Test Method for Sulfur in
Petroleum Products (General Bomb Method), IBR approved for Appendix A:
Method 19, Section 12.5.2.2.3; and Sec. 60.106(j)(2).
(9) ASTM D240-76, 92, Standard Test Method for Heat of Combustion
of Liquid Hydrocarbon Fuels by Bomb Calorimeter, IBR approved January
27, 1983 for Secs. 60.46(c), 60.296(b), and Appendix A: Method 19,
Section 12.5.2.2.3.
(10) ASTM D270-65, 75, Standard Method of Sampling Petroleum and
Petroleum Products, IBR approved January 27, 1983 for Appendix A:
Method 19, Section 12.5.2.2.1.
(11) ASTM D323-82, 94, Test Method for Vapor Pressure of Petroleum
Products (Reid Method), IBR approved April 8, 1987 for Secs. 60.111(l),
60.111a(g), 60.111b(g), and 60.116b(f)(2)(ii).
(12) ASTM D388-77, 90, 91, 95, 98, 98a, Standard Specification for
Classification of Coals by Rank, IBR approved for Secs. 60.41(f),
60.45(f)(4)(i), 60.45(f)(4)(ii), 60.45(f)(4)(vi), 60.41a, 60.41b, and
60.251(b) and (c).
(13) ASTM D396-78, 89, 90, 92, 95, 96, 97, 98, Standard
Specification for Fuel Oils, IBR approved for Secs. 60.41b, 60.41c,
60.111(b), and 60.111a(b).
(14) ASTM D975-78, 96, 98, 98a, Standard Specification for Diesel
Fuel Oils, IBR approved January 27, 1983 for Secs. 60.111(b) and
60.111a(b).
(15) ASTM D1072-80, 90 (Reapproved 1994), Standard Method for Total
Sulfur in Fuel Gases, IBR approved July 31, 1984 for Sec. 60.335(d).
(16) ASTM D1137-53, 75, Standard Method for Analysis of Natural
Gases and Related Types of Gaseous Mixtures by the Mass Spectrometer,
IBR approved January 27, 1983 for Sec. 60.45(f)(5)(i).
(17) ASTM D1193-77, 91, Standard Specification for Reagent Water,
IBR approved for Appendix A: Method 5, Section 7.1.3; Method 5E,
Section 7.2.1; Method 5F, Section 7.2.1; Method 6, Section 7.1.1;
Method 7, Section 7.1.1; Method 7C, Section 7.1.1; Method 7D, Section
7.1.1; Method 10A, Section 7.1.1; Method 11, Section 7.1.3; Method 12,
Section 7.1.3; Method 13A, Section 7.1.2; Method 26, Section 7.1.2;
Method 26A, Section 7.1.2; and Method 29, Section 7.2.2.
(18) ASTM D1266-87, 91, 98, Standard Test Method for Sulfur in
Petroleum Products (Lamp Method), IBR approved August 17, 1989 for
Sec. 60.106(j)(2).
(19) ASTM D1475-60, 80, 90, Standard Test Method for Density of
Paint, Varnish Lacquer, and Related Products, IBR approved January 27,
1983 for Sec. 60.435(d)(1), Appendix A: Method 24, Section 6.1; and
Method 24A, Sections 6.5 and 7.1.
(20) ASTM D1552-83, 95, Standard Test Method for Sulfur in
Petroleum Products (High Temperature Method), IBR approved for Appendix
A: Method 19, Section 12.5.2.2.3; and Sec. 60.106(j)(2).
(21) ASTM D1826-77, 94, Standard Test Method for Calorific Value of
Gases in Natural Gas Range by Continuous Recording Calorimeter, IBR
approved January 27, 1983 for Secs. 60.45(f)(5)(ii), 60.46(c)(2),
60.296(b)(3), and Appendix A: Method 19, Section 12.3.2.4.
(22) ASTM D1835-82, 86, 87, 91, 97, Standard Specification for
Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases, approved for Secs. 60.41b and 60.41c.
(23) ASTM D1945-64, 76, 91, 96, Standard Method for Analysis of
Natural Gas by Gas Chromatography, IBR approved January 27, 1983 for
Sec. 60.45(f)(5)(i).
(24) ASTM D1946-77, 90 (Reapproved 1994), Standard Method for
Analysis of Reformed Gas by Gas Chromatography, IBR approved for
Secs. 60.45(f)(5)(i), 60.18(f)(3), 60.614(e)(2)(ii), 60.614(e)(4),
60.664(e)(2)(ii), 60.664(e)(4), 60.564(f)(1), 60.704(d)(2)(ii), and
60.704(d)(4).
(25) ASTM D2013-72, 86, Standard Method of Preparing Coal Samples
for Analysis, IBR approved January 27, 1983, for Appendix A: Method 19,
Section 12.5.2.1.3.
(26) ASTM D2015-77 (Reapproved 1978), 96, Standard Test Method for
Gross Calorific Value of Solid Fuel by the Adiabatic Bomb Calorimeter,
IBR
[[Page 61751]]
approved January 27, 1983 for Sec. 60.45(f)(5)(ii), 60.46(c)(2), and
Appendix A: Method 19, Section 12.5.2.1.3.
(27) ASTM D2016-74, 83, Standard Test Methods for Moisture Content
of Wood, IBR approved for Appendix A: Method 28, Section 16.1.1.
(28) ASTM D2234-76, 96, 97a, 97b, 98, Standard Methods for
Collection of a Gross Sample of Coal, IBR approved January 27, 1983 for
Appendix A: Method 19, Section 12.5.2.1.1.
(29) ASTM D2369-81, 87, 90, 92, 93, 95, Standard Test Method for
Volatile Content of Coatings, IBR approved January 27, 1983 for
Appendix A: Method 24, Section 6.2.
(30) ASTM D2382-76, 88, Heat of Combustion of Hydrocarbon Fuels by
Bomb Calorimeter (High-Precision Method), IBR approved for
Secs. 60.18(f)(3), 60.485(g)(6), 60.614(e)(4), 60.664(e)(4),
60.564(f)(3), and 60.704(d)(4).
(31) ASTM D2504-67, 77, 88 (Reapproved 1993), Noncondensable Gases
in C3 and Lighter Hydrocarbon Products by Gas
Chromatography, IBR approved for Sec. 60.485(g)(5).
(32) ASTM D2584-68 (Reapproved 1985), 94, Standard Test Method for
Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins, IBR approved February 25,
1985 for Sec. 60.685(c)(3)(i).
(33) ASTM D2622-87, 94, 98, Standard Test Method for Sulfur in
Petroleum Products by X-Ray Spectrometry, IBR approved August 17, 1989
for Sec. 60.106(j)(2).
(34) ASTM D2879-83, 96, 97, Test Method for Vapor Pressure-
Temperature Relationship and Initial Decomposition Temperature of
Liquids by Isoteniscope, IBR approved April 8, 1987 for
Secs. 60.485(e)(1), 60.111b(f)(3), 60.116b(e)(3)(ii), and
60.116b(f)(2)(i).
(35) ASTM D2880-78, 96, Standard Specification for Gas Turbine Fuel
Oils, IBR approved January 27, 1983 for Secs. 60.111(b), 60.111a(b),
and 60.335(d).
(36) ASTM D2908-74, 91, Standard Practice for Measuring Volatile
Organic Matter in Water by Aqueous-Injection Gas Chromatography, IBR
approved for Sec. 60.564(j).
(37) ASTM D2986-71, 78, 95a, Standard Method for Evaluation of Air,
Assay Media by the Monodisperse DOP (Dioctyl Phthalate) Smoke Test, IBR
approved January 27, 1983 for Appendix A: Method 5, Section 7.1.1;
Method 12, Section 7.1.1; and Method 13A, Section 7.1.1.2.
(38) ASTM D3031-81, Standard Test Method for Total Sulfur in
Natural Gas by Hydrogenation, IBR approved July 31, 1984 for
Sec. 60.335(d).
(39) ASTM D3173-73, 87, Standard Test Method for Moisture in the
Analysis Sample of Coal and Coke, IBR approved January 27, 1983 for
Appendix A: Method 19, Section 12.5.2.1.3.
(40) ASTM D3176-74, 89, Standard Method for Ultimate Analysis of
Coal and Coke, IBR approved January 27, 1983 for Sec. 60.45(f)(5)(i)
and Appendix A: Method 19, Section 12.3.2.3.
(41) ASTM D3177-75, 89, Standard Test Method for Total Sulfur in
the Analysis Sample of Coal and Coke, IBR approved January 27, 1983 for
Appendix A: Method 19, Section 12.5.2.1.3.
(42) ASTM D3178-73 (Reapproved 1979), 89, Standard Test Methods for
Carbon and Hydrogen in the Analysis Sample of Coal and Coke, IBR
approved January 27, 1983 for Sec. 60.45(f)(5)(i).
(43) ASTM D3246-81, 92, 96, Standard Method for Sulfur in Petroleum
Gas by Oxidative Microcoulometry, IBR approved July 31, 1984 for
Sec. 60.335(d).
(44) ASTM D3270-73T, 80, 91, 95, Standard Test Methods for Analysis
for Fluoride Content of the Atmosphere and Plant Tissues (Semiautomated
Method), IBR approved for Appendix A: Method 13A, Section 16.1.
(45) ASTM D3286-85, 96, Standard Test Method for Gross Calorific
Value of Coal and Coke by the Isoperibol Bomb Calorimeter, IBR approved
for Appendix A: Method 19, Section 12.5.2.1.3.
(46) ASTM D3370-76, 95a, Standard Practices for Sampling Water, IBR
approved for Sec. 60.564(j).
(47) ASTM D3792-79, 91, Standard Method for Water Content of Water-
Reducible Paints by Direct Injection into a Gas Chromatograph, IBR
approved January 27, 1983 for Appendix A: Method 24, Section 6.3.
(48) ASTM D4017-81, 90, 96a, Standard Test Method for Water in
Paints and Paint Materials by the Karl Fischer Titration Method, IBR
approved January 27, 1983 for Appendix A: Method 24, Section 6.4.
(49) ASTM D4057-81, 95, Standard Practice for Manual Sampling of
Petroleum and Petroleum Products, IBR approved for Appendix A: Method
19, Section 12.5.2.2.3.
(50) ASTM D4084-82, 94, Standard Method for Analysis of Hydrogen
Sulfide in Gaseous Fuels (Lead Acetate Reaction Rate Method), IBR
approved July 31, 1984 for Sec. 60.335(d).
(51) ASTM D4177-95, Standard Practice for Automatic Sampling of
Petroleum and Petroleum Products, IBR approved for Appendix A: Method
19, 12.5.2.2.1.
(52) ASTM D4239-85, 94, 97, Standard Test Methods for Sulfur in the
Analysis Sample of Coal and Coke Using High Temperature Tube Furnace
Combustion Methods, IBR approved for Appendix A: Method 19, Section
12.5.2.1.3.
(53) ASTM D4442-84, 92, Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture
Content Measurement in Wood and Wood-base Materials, IBR approved for
Appendix A: Method 28, Section 16.1.1.
(54) ASTM D4444-92, Standard Test Methods for Use and Calibration
of Hand-Held Moisture Meters, IBR approved for Appendix A: Method 28,
Section 16.1.1.
(55) ASTM D4457-85 (Reapproved 1991), Test Method for Determination
of Dichloromethane and 1, 1, 1-Trichloroethane in Paints and Coatings
by Direct Injection into a Gas Chromatograph, IBR approved for Appendix
A: Method 24, Section 6.5.
(56) ASTM D4809-95, Standard Test Method for Heat of Combustion of
Liquid Hydrocarbon Fuels by Bomb Calorimeter (Precision Method), IBR
approved for Secs. 60.18(f)(3), 60.485(g)(6), 60.564(f)(3),
60.614(d)(4), 60.664(e)(4), and 60.704(d)(4).
(57) ASTM D5403-93, Standard Test Methods for Volatile Content of
Radiation Curable Materials. IBR approved September 11, 1995 for
Appendix A: Method 24, Section 6.6.
(58) ASTM D5865-98, Standard Test Method for Gross Calorific Value
of Coal and Coke. IBR approved for Sec. 60.45(f)(5)(ii), 60.46(c)(2),
and Appendix A: Method 19, Section 12.5.2.1.3.
(59) ASTM E168-67, 77, 92, General Techniques of Infrared
Quantitative Analysis, IBR approved for Secs. 60.593(b)(2) and
60.632(f).
(60) ASTM E169-63, 77, 93, General Techniques of Ultraviolet
Quantitative Analysis, IBR approved for Secs. 60.593(b)(2) and
60.632(f).
(61) ASTM E260-73, 91, 96, General Gas Chromatography Procedures,
IBR approved for Secs. 60.593(b)(2) and 60.632(f).
* * * * *
(i) Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical
Methods,'' EPA Publication SW-846 Third Edition (November 1986), as
amended by Updates I (July 1992), II (September 1994), IIA (August,
1993), IIB (January 1995), and III (December 1996). This document may
be obtained from the U.S. EPA, Office of Solid Waste and Emergency
Response, Waste Characterization Branch, Washington, DC 20460, and is
incorporated by reference for Appendix A to Part 60,
[[Page 61752]]
Method 29, Sections 7.5.34; 9.2.1; 9.2.3; 10.2; 10.3; 11.1.1; 11.1.3;
13.2.1; 13.2.2; 13.3.1; and Table 29-3.
(j) ``Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and
Wastewater,'' 16th edition, 1985. Method 303F: ``Determination of
Mercury by the Cold Vapor Technique.'' This document may be obtained
from the American Public Health Association, 1015 18th Street, NW.,
Washington, DC 20036, and is incorporated by reference for Appendix A
to Part 60, Method 29, Sections 9.2.3; 10.3; and 11.1.3.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.18 [Amended]
6. Amend Sec. 60.18 as follows:
a. In paragraph (f)(1), the first sentence is amended by revising
``Reference Method 22'' to read ``Method 22 of Appendix A to this
part.''
b. In paragraph (f)(3), the definition of ``Ci'' is
amended by revising ``ASTM D1946-77'' to read ``ASTM D1946-77 or 90
(Reapproved 1994).''
c. In paragraph (f)(3), the definition of ``Hi'' is
amended by revising ``ASTM D2382-76'' to read ``ASTM D2382-76 or 88 or
D4809-95.''
Sec. 60.41 [Amended]
7. In Sec. 60.41, paragraph (f) is amended by revising the words
``the American Society and Testing and Materials, Designation D388-77''
to read ``ASTM D388-77, 90, 91, 95, or 98a.''
Sec. 60.42 [Amended]
8. In Sec. 60.42, paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2), are amended by
removing the symbol ``%'' wherever it appears, and adding ``percent''
in its place.
Sec. 60.45 [Amended]
9. Amend Sec. 60.45 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(2) by removing the words ``under paragraph (d)
of this section.''
b. In paragraphs (f)(4)(i), (f)(4)(ii), and (f)(4)(vi) by revising
the words ``ASTM D388-77'' to read ``ASTM D388-77, 90, 91, 95, or
98a.''
c. In paragraph (f)(5)(i) by revising the words ``ASTM method
D1137-53, (75), D1945-64(76), or D1946-77'' to read ``ASTM D1137-53 or
75, D1945-64, 76, 91, or 96 or D1946-77 or 90 (Reapproved 1994).''
d. In paragraph (f)(5)(i) by revising the words ``ASTM method
D3178-74 or D3176'' to read ``ASTM D3178-73 (Reapproved 1979), 89, or
D3176-74 or 89.''
e. In paragraph (f)(5)(ii) by revising the words ``ASTM D1826-77''
to read ``ASTM D1826-77 or 94.''
f. In paragraph (f)(5)(ii) by revising the words ``ASTM D2015-77''
to read ``ASTM D2015-77 (Reapproved 1978), 96, or D5865-98.''
Sec. 60.46 [Amended]
10. Amend Sec. 60.46 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(2)(i), the second sentence is amended by
revising the words ``in the sampling train may be set to provide a gas
temperature no greater than'' to read ``in the sampling train shall be
set to provide an average gas temperature of.''
b. In paragraph (b)(2)(ii), the third sentence is amended by
revising the words ``the arithmetic mean of all the individual
O2 sample concentrations at each traverse point'' to read
``the arithmetic mean of the sample O2 concentrations at all
traverse points.''
c. Paragraph (c)(2) is amended by revising the words ``D2015-77''
to read ``D2015-77 (Reapproved 1978), 96, or D5865-98''.
d. Paragraph (c)(2) is further amended by revising the words
``D240-76'' to read ``D240-76 or 92.''
e. In paragraph (c)(2) is further amended by revising the words
``D1826-77'' to read ``D1826-77 or 94.''
Sec. 60.41a [Amended]
11. Amend Sec. 60.41a as follows:
a. In the definitions for ``subbituminous coal'' and ``lignite,''
by revising ``D388-77'' to read ``D388-77, 90, 91, 95, or 98a.''
b. In paragraph (a)(2) of the definition of ``potential combustion
concentration'' by revising ``75 ng/J'' to read ``73 ng/J.''
Sec. 60.43a [Amended]
12. In Sec. 60.43a, paragraph (d)(2), revising the words ``resource
recovery facility'' to read ``resource recovery unit.''
Sec. 60.47a [Amended]
13. Amend Sec. 60.47a as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(3) by removing the words ``(appendix A).''
b. In the first sentence of paragraph (g) by revising the words
``lbs/million Btu'' to read ``lb/million Btu.''
c. In the second sentence of paragraph (h)(3) by revising the words
``309 minutes in each hour'' to read ``30 minutes in each hour.''
d. In paragraph (i)(1) by revising the words ``6, 7, and 3B, as
applicable, shall be used to determine O2, SO2,
and NOX concentrations'' to read ``3B, 6, and 7 shall be
used to determine O2, SO2, and NOX
concentrations, respectively.''
Sec. 60.48a [Amended]
14. Amend Sec. 60.48a as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(2)(ii), in the fourth sentence by revising the
words ``the arithmetic mean of all the individual O2
concentrations at each traverse point.'' to read ``the arithmetic mean
of the sample O2 concentrations at all traverse points.''
b. In paragraph (c)(3), in the first sentence by adding a closing
parenthesis after the abbreviation ``(%Rg'' so that it now
reads ``(%Rg)''.
c. In paragraph (f), in the first and second sentences by removing
the words ``(appendix A).''
Sec. 60.40b [Amended]
15. Sec. 60.40b is amended by adding paragraph (j) as follows:
Sec. 60.40b Applicability and delegation of authority.
* * * * *
(j) Any affected facility meeting the applicability requirements
under paragraph (a) of this section and commencing construction,
modification, or reconstruction after June 19, 1986 is not subject to
Subpart D (Standards of Performance for Fossil-Fuel-Fired Steam
Generators, Sec. 60.40).
* * * * *
Sec. 60.41b [Amended]
16. Amend Sec. 60.41b as follows:
a. In the definition for ``coal'' by revising ``ASTM D388-77'' to
read ``ASTM D388-77, 90, 91, 95, or 98a.''
b. In the definition for ``distillate oil'' by revising ``ASTM
D396-78'' to read ``ASTM D396-78, 89, 90, 92, 96, or 98.''
c. In the definition for ``lignite'' by revising ``ASTM D388-77''
to read ``ASTM D388-77, 90, 91, 95, or 98a.''
d. In the definition for ``natural gas'' by revising ``ASTM D1835-
82'' to read ``ASTM D1835-82, 86, 87, 91, or 97.''
Sec. 60.42b [Amended]
17. In Sec. 60.42b, paragraph (d), the second sentence is amended
by revising the words ``facilities under this paragraph'' to read
``facilities under paragraphs (d)(1), (2), or (3).''
Sec. 60.43b [Amended]
18. In Sec. 60.43b, paragraph (a)(1) is amended by revising the
words ``22 ng/J (0.05 lb/million Btu)'' to read ``22 ng/J (0.051 lb/
million Btu).''
Sec. 60.46b [Amended]
19. Amend Sec. 60.46b as follows:
a. In paragraph (d)(4) by revising the words ``160 deg.C (320
deg.F)'' to read ``16014 deg.C (32025
deg.F).''
b. In paragraph (d)(6)(iii) by removing the words ``(appendix A).''
Sec. 60.41c [Amended]
20. Amend Sec. 60.41c as follows:
a. In the definition for ``natural gas'' by revising ``D1835-86''
to read ``D1835-86, 87, 91, or 97.''
[[Page 61753]]
b. In the definitions for ``distillate oil'' and ``residual oil''
by revising ``D396-78'' to read ``D396-78, 89, 90, 92, 96, or 98.''
Sec. 60.42c [Amended]
21. Amend Sec. 60.42c as follows:
a. In paragraph (a), in the first sentence by revising the words
``the owner the operator'' to read ``the owner or operator.''
b. In paragraph (c), in the second sentence by revising the words
``facilities under this paragraph'' to read ``facilities under
paragraphs (c)(1), (2), (3), or (4).''
Sec. 60.43c [Amended]
22. In Sec. 60.43c, paragraph (a)(1) is amended by revising the
words ``22 ng/J (0.05 lb/million Btu)'' to read ``22 ng/J (0.051 lb/
million Btu).''
Sec. 60.44c [Amended]
23. In Sec. 60.44c, paragraph (i), the third sentence is amended by
revising the words ``24-hour averaged'' to read ``24-hour average.''
Sec. 60.45c [Amended]
24. Amend Sec. 60.45c as follows:
a. Redesignate paragraphs (a)(5) through (a)(7) as paragraphs
(a)(6) through (a)(8), respectively.
b. Revise paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(4) and add paragraph
(a)(5).
The redesignation, revisions and addition read as follows:
Sec. 60.45c Compliance and performance test methods and procedures for
particulate matter.
(a) * * *
(1) Method 1 shall be used to select the sampling site and the
number of traverse sampling points.
(2) Method 3 shall be used for gas analysis when applying Method 5,
Method 5B, or Method 17.
(3) Method 5, Method 5B, or Method 17 shall be used to measure the
concentration of PM as follows:
(i) Method 5 may be used only at affected facilities without wet
scrubber systems.
(ii) Method 17 may be used at affected facilities with or without
wet scrubber systems provided the stack gas temperature does not exceed
a temperature of 160 deg.C (320 deg.F). The procedures of Sections
8.1 and 11.1 of Method 5B may be used in Method 17 only if Method 17 is
used in conjunction with a wet scrubber system. Method 17 shall not be
used in conjunction with a wet scrubber system if the effluent is
saturated or laden with water droplets.
(iii) Method 5B may be used in conjunction with a wet scrubber
system.
(4) The sampling time for each run shall be at least 120 minutes
and the minimum sampling volume shall be 1.7 dry standard cubic meters
(dscm) [60 dry standard cubic feet (dscf)] except that smaller sampling
times or volumes may be approved by the Administrator when necessitated
by process variables or other factors.
(5) For Method 5 or Method 5B, the temperature of the sample gas in
the probe and filter holder shall be monitored and maintained at
16014 deg.C (32025 deg.F).
* * * * *
Sec. 60.46c [Amended]
25. In Sec. 60.46c, paragraphs (b) and (d) are amended by revising
the abbreviation ``CEM'' to read ``CEMS'' wherever it appears.
Sec. 60.47c [Amended]
26. In Sec. 60.47c, paragraphs (a) and (b) are amended by revising
the abbreviation ``CEMS'' to read ``COMS'' wherever it appears.
Sec. 60.48c [Amended]
27. In Sec. 60.48c, paragraph (b) is amended by replacing the
abbreviation ``CEMS'' with the words ``CEMS and/or COMS.''
Sec. 60.52 [Amended]
28. In Sec. 60.52, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words
``the performance test required to be conducted by Sec. 60.8 is
completed'' to read ``the initial performance test is completed or
required to be completed under Sec. 60.8 of this part, whichever date
comes first.''
Sec. 60.54 [Amended]
29. Amend Sec. 60.54 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words ``The emission rate
(c12)'' to read ``The concentration (c12).''
b. In paragraph (b)(3)(i), in the third sentence by revising the
words ``the arithmetic mean of all the individual CO2 sample
concentrations at each traverse point'' to read ``the arithmetic mean
of the sample CO2 concentrations at all traverse points.''
Sec. 60.51a [Amended]
30. Section 60.51a is amended by adding a new difinition in
alphabetical order to read as follows:
Sec. 60.51a Definitions.
* * * * *
Continuous monitoring system means the total equipment used to
sample and condition (if applicable), to analyze, and to provide a
permanent record of emissions or process parameters.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.58a [Amended]
31. Amend Sec. 60.58a as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(3), in the first sentence by revising the words
``particulate matter emission standard'' to read ``particulate matter
emission limit.''
b. In paragraph (b)(3), in the third sentence by revising the words
``a gas temperature no greater than'' to read ``a gas temperature of.''
c. In paragraph (b)(8) by revising the words ``operate a CEMS for
measuring opacity'' to read ``operate a continuous opacity monitoring
system (COMS).''
d. In paragraph (e)(10) by revising the word ``Section'' to read
``section.''
e. In paragraph (e)(14) by revising the words ``outlet to'' to read
``outlet of.''
f. In paragraph (f)(2) by revising the words ``Method 26'' to read
``Method 26 or 26A.''
Sec. 60.58b [Amended]
32-36. Amend Sec. 60.58b as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words ``(or carbon
dioxide)'' to read ``(or 20 percent carbon dioxide)'' each place it
appears.
b. In paragraph (f)(1), in the second sentence by removing the
words ``for Method 26.''
c. In paragraph (f)(2) by removing the words ``Method 26.''
Sec. 60.56c [Amended]
37. Amend Sec. 60.56c as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(4), in the first and second sentences by
revising the words ``Method 3 or 3A'' to read ``Method 3, 3A, or 3B.''
b. In paragraph (b)(10), in the first sentence by revising the
words ``Method 26'' to read ``Method 26 or 26A.''
Sec. 60.64 [Amended]
38. Amend Sec. 60.64(b)(1) as follows:
a. In the definition of the term ``cs'', ``(g/dscf)'' is
revised to read ``(gr/dscf).''
b. In the definition of the term ``K'', ``(453.6 g/lb)'' is revised
to read ``(7000 gr/lb).''
Sec. 60.84 [Amended]
39. Amend Sec. 60.84 as follows:
a. In paragraph (d), in the third sentence by revising the words
``monitoring of'' to read ``monitoring systems for measuring.''
b. In paragraph (d), in the fourth sentence by revising the words
``this SO2'' to read ``the SO2.''
Sec. 60.102 [Amended]
40. In Sec. 60.102, paragraph (a)(1) is amended by revising the
words ``1.0 kg/
[[Page 61754]]
1000 kg (1.0 lb/1000 lb)'' to read ``1.0 kg/Mg (2.0 lb/ton).
Sec. 60.104 [Amended]
41. In Sec. 60.104, paragraph (b)(2) is amended by revising the
words ``9.8 kg/1,000 kg'' to read ``9.8 kg/Mg (20 lb/ton).''
Sec. 60.105 [Amended]
42. Amend Sec. 60.105 by:
a. In paragraphs (a)(3)(iii) and (a)(5)(ii), the words ``Methods 6
and 3'' in the second sentence are revised to read ``Methods 6 or 6C
and 3 or 3A.''
b. In paragraph (a)(4)(iii), the words ``Method 11 shall be used
for conducting the relative accuracy evaluations'' are revised to read
``Method 11, 15, 15A, or 16 shall be used for conducting the relative
accuracy evaluations.''
c. In paragraphs (a)(3)(i), (a)(5)(i), (a)(6)(i), and (a)(7)(i),
``10'' is revised to read ``25.''
d. In paragraph (a)(6)(ii), the first sentence and paragraphs
(a)(8), (a)(9), and (a)(12) are revised.
e. In paragraph (a)(10), the abbreviation ``vppm'' is revised to
read ``ppmv''.
f. In paragraph (c), ``(thousands of kilograms per hour)'' is
revised to read ``(Mg (tons) per hour).''
g. In paragraph (d), the words ``(liters/hr or kg/hr)'' are
removed.
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.105 Monitoring of emissions and operations.
(a) * * *
(6) * * *
(ii) The performance evaluations for this reduced sulfur (and
O2) monitor under Sec. 60.13(c) shall use Performance
Specification 5 of Appendix B of this Part (and Performance
Specification 3 of Appendix B of this Part for the O2
analyzer). * * *
* * * * *
(8) An instrument for continuously monitoring and recording
concentrations of SO2 in the gases at both the inlet and
outlet of the SO2 control device from any fluid catalytic
cracking unit catalyst regenerator for which the owner or operator
seeks to comply with Sec. 60.104 (b)(1).
(i) The span value of the inlet monitor shall be set 125 percent of
the maximum estimated hourly potential SO2 emission
concentration entering the control device, and the span value of the
outlet monitor shall be set at 50 percent of the maximum estimated
hourly potential sulfur dioxide emission concentration entering the
control device.
(ii) The performance evaluations for these SO2 monitors
under Sec. 60.13(c) shall use Performance Specification 2. Methods 6 or
6C and 3 or 3A shall be used for conducting the relative accuracy
evaluations.
(9) An instrument for continuously monitoring and recording
concentrations of SO2 in the gases discharged into the
atmosphere from any fluid catalytic cracking unit catalyst regenerator
for which the owner or operator seeks to comply specifically with the
50 ppmv emission limit under Sec. 60.104 (b)(1).
(i) The span value of the monitor shall be set at 50 percent of the
maximum hourly potential SO2 emission concentration of the
control device.
(ii) The performance evaluations for this SO2 monitor
under Sec. 60.13 (c) shall use Performance Specification 2. Methods 6
or 6C and 3 or 3A shall be used for conducting the relative accuracy
evaluations.
* * * * *
(12) The owner or operator shall use the following procedures to
evaluate the continuous monitoring systems under paragraphs (a)(8),
(a)(9), and (a)(10) of this section.
(i) Method 3 or 3A and Method 6 or 6C for the relative accuracy
evaluations under the Sec. 60.13(e) performance evaluation.
(ii) Appendix F, Procedure 1, including quarterly accuracy
determinations and daily calibration drift tests.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.106 [Amended]
43. Amend Sec. 60.106 by:
a. In paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(3), (c)(1), (i)(9) by revising the
equations and definitions.
b. In paragraph (b)(3)(ii) by revising the words ``Method 3'' to
read ``Method 3B.''
c. Revising paragraph (e).
d. Revising paragraph (f)(1).
e. In paragraph (f)(3) by revising the words ``Method 3'' to read
``Method 3 or 3A'' and by revising ``(h)(3)'' to read ``(h)(6).''
d. In paragraph (g), in the first sentence by revising the words
``the applicable test methods and procedures specified in this
section'' to read ``Method 6 or 6C and Method 3 or 3A.''
e. In paragraphs (h)(1), (h)(3), and (h)(4) by revising the
abbreviation ``vppm'' to read ``ppmv'' wherever it occurs.
f. In paragraph (i)(2)(i) by revising the words ``for the
concentration of sulfur oxides calculated as sulfur dioxide and
moisture content'' to read ``for moisture content and for the
concentration of sulfur oxides calculated as sulfur dioxide.''
g. Revising paragraph (i)(9) following the introductory text and
paragraph (i)(10).
h. In paragraph (i)(11) by revising the words ``per 1,000 kg of
coke burn-off'' to read ``per Mg (ton) of coke burn-off.''
i. In paragraph (j)(2) by revising the words ``ASTM D129-64
(Reapproved 1978)'' to read ``ASTM D129-64, 78, or 95.''
j. In paragraph (j)(2) by revising the words ``ASTM D1552-83'' to
read ``ASTM D1552-83 or 95.''
k. In paragraph (j)(2) by revising the words ``ASTM D2622-87'' to
read ``ASTM D2622-87, 94, or 98.''
l. In paragraph (j)(2) by revising the words ``ASTM D1266-87'' to
read ``ASTM D1266-87, 91, or 98.''
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.106 Test methods and procedures.
* * * * *
(b) * * *
(1) * * *
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.000
Where:
E = Emission rate of PM, kg/Mg (lb/ton) of coke burn-off.
cs = Concentration of PM, g/dscm (gr/dscf).
Qsd = Volumetric flow rate of effluent gas, dscm/hr (dscf/
hr).
Rc = Coke burn-off rate, Mg/hr (ton/hr) coke.
K=Conversion factor, 1,000 g/kg (7,000 gr/lb).
* * * * *
(3) * * *
Rc=K1Qr(%CO2+%CO)-
(K2Qa-K3Qr)((%CO/
2)+(%CO2+%O2))
Where:
Rc = Coke burn-off rate, Mg/hr (ton/hr).
Qr = Volumetric flow rate of exhaust gas from catalyst
regenerator before entering the emission control system, dscm/min
(dscf/min).
[[Page 61755]]
Qa = Volumetric flow rate of air to FCCU regenerator, as
determined from the fluid catalytic cracking unit control room
instrumentation, dscm/min (dscf/min).
%CO2 = Carbon dioxide concentration, percent by volume (dry
basis).
%CO = Carbon monoxide concentration, percent by volume (dry basis).
%O2 = Oxygen concentration, percent by volume (dry basis).
K1 = Material balance and conversion factor, 2.982 x
10-4 (Mg-min)/(hr-dscm-%) [9.31 x 10-6 (ton-
min)/(hr-dscf-%)].
K2 = Material balance and conversion factor, 2.088 x
10-3 (Mg-min)/(hr-dscm-%) [6.52 x 10-5 (ton-
min)/(hr-dscf-%)].
K3 = Material balance and conversion factor, 9.94 x
10-5 (Mg-min)/(hr-dscm-%) [3.1 x 10-6 (ton-
min)/(hr-dscf-%)].
* * * * *
(c) * * *
(1) * * *
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.002
Where:
Es = Emission rate of PM allowed, kg/Mg (lb/ton) of coke
burn-off in catalyst regenerator.
F=Emission standard, 1.0 kg/Mg (2.0 lb/ton) of coke burn-off in
catalyst regenerator.
A = Allowable incremental rate of PM emissions, 7.5 x 10-4
kg/million J (0.10 lb/million Btu).
H = Heat input rate from solid or liquid fossil fuel, million J/hr
(million Btu/hr).
Rc = Coke burn-off rate, Mg coke/hr (ton coke/hr).
* * * * *
(e)(1) The owner or operator shall determine compliance with the
H2S standard in Sec. 60.104(a)(1) as follows: Method 11, 15,
15A, or 16 shall be used to determine the H2S concentration.
The gases entering the sampling train should be at about atmospheric
pressure. If the pressure in the refinery fuel gas lines is relatively
high, a flow control valve may be used to reduce the pressure. If the
line pressure is high enough to operate the sampling train without a
vacuum pump, the pump may be eliminated from the sampling train. The
sample shall be drawn from a point near the centroid of the fuel gas
line.
(i) For Method 11, the sampling time and sample volume shall be at
least 10 minutes and 0.010 dscm (0.35 dscf). Two samples of equal
sampling times shall be taken at about 1-hour intervals. The arithmetic
average of these two samples shall constitute a run. For most fuel
gases, sampling times exceeding 20 minutes may result in depletion of
the collection solution, although fuel gases containing low
concentrations of H2S may necessitate sampling for longer
periods of time.
(ii) For Method 15 or 16, at least three injects over a 1-hour
period shall constitute a run.
(iii) For Method 15A, a 1-hour sample shall constitute a run.
(2) Where emissions are monitored by Sec. 60.105(a)(3), compliance
with Sec. 60.105(a)(1) shall be determined using Method 6 or 6C and
Method 3 or 3A. A 1-hour sample shall constitute a run. Method 6
samples shall be taken at a rate of approximately 2 liters/min. The ppm
correction factor (Method 6) and the sampling location in paragraph
(f)(1) of this section apply. Method 4 shall be used to determine the
moisture content of the gases. The sampling point for Method 4 shall be
adjacent to the sampling point for Method 6 or 6C.
(f) * * *
(1) Method 6 shall be used to determine the SO2
concentration. The concentration in mg/dscm obtained by Method 6 or 6C
is multiplied by 0.3754 to obtain the concentration in ppm. The
sampling point in the duct shall be the centroid of the cross section
if the cross-sectional area is less than 5.00 m2 (53.8
ft2) or at a point no closer to the walls than 1.00 m (39.4
in.) if the cross-sectional area is 5.00 m2 or more and the
centroid is more than 1 m from the wall. The sampling time and sample
volume shall be at least 10 minutes and 0.010 dscm (0.35 dscf) for each
sample. Eight samples of equal sampling times shall be taken at about
30-minute intervals. The arithmetic average of these eight samples
shall constitute a run. For Method 6C, a run shall consist of the
arithmetic average of four 1-hour samples. Method 4 shall be used to
determine the moisture content of the gases. The sampling point for
Method 4 shall be adjacent to the sampling point for Method 6 or 6C.
The sampling time for each sample shall be equal to the time it takes
for two Method 6 samples. The moisture content from this sample shall
be used to correct the corresponding Method 6 samples for moisture. For
documenting the oxidation efficiency of the control device for reduced
sulfur compounds, Method 15 shall be used following the procedures of
paragraph (f)(2) of this section.
* * * * *
(i) * * *
(9) * * *
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.003
Where:
ESOx = sulfur oxides emission rate calculated as sulfur
dioxide, kg/hr (lb/hr)
CSOx = sulfur oxides emission concentration calculated as
sulfur dioxide, g/dscm (gr/dscf)
Qsd = dry volumetric stack gas flow rate corrected to
standard conditions, dscm/hr (dscf/hr)
K=1,000 g/kg (7,000 gr/lb)
(10) Sulfur oxides emissions calculated as sulfur dioxide shall be
determined for each test run by the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.004
Where:
RSOx = Sulfur oxides emissions calculated as kg sulfur
dioxide per Mg (lb/ton) coke burn-off.
ESOx = Sulfur oxides emission rate calculated as sulfur
dioxide, kg/hr (lb/hr).
Rc = Coke burn-off rate, Mg/hr (ton/hr).
* * * * *
Sec. 60.107 [Amended]
44. Section 60.107 is amended by revising paragraphs (c)(5) and
(c)(6) as follows:
Sec. 60.107 Reporting and recordkeeping requirements.
* * * * *
(c) * * *
(5) If subject to Sec. 60.104(b)(2), for each day in which a Method
8 sample result required by Sec. 60.106(i) was not obtained, the date
for which and brief explanation as to why a Method 8 sample result was
not obtained, for approval by the Administrator.
(6) If subject to Sec. 60.104(b)(3), for each 8-hour period in
which a feed sulfur measurement required by Sec. 60.106(j) was not
obtained, the date for which and brief explanation as to why a feed
sulfur measurement was not obtained, for approval by the Administrator.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.111 [Amended]
45. Section 60.111 is amended as follows:
a. In paragraph (b) by revising ``ASTM D396-78'' to read ``ASTM
D396-78, 89, 90, 92, 96, or 98.''
b. In paragraph (b) by revising ``ASTM D2880-78'' to read ``ASTM
D2880-78 or 96.''
c. In paragraph (b) by revising ``ASTM D975-78'' to read ``ASTM
D975-78, 96, or 98a.''
d. In paragraph (l) by revising ``ASTM D323-82'' to read ``ASTM
D323-82 or 94.''
[[Page 61756]]
Sec. 60.111a [Amended]
46. Section 60.111a is amended as follows:
a. In paragraph (b) by revising ``ASTM D396-78'' to read ``D396-78,
89, 90, 92, 96, or 98.''
b. In paragraph (b) by revising ``ASTM D2880-78'' to read ``ASTM
D2880-78 or 96''; and by revising ``ASTM D975-78'' to read ``ASTM D975-
78, 96, or 98a.''
c. In paragraph (g) by revising ``ASTM D323-82'' to read ``ASTM
D323-82 or 94.''
Sec. 60.111b [Amended]
47. Section 60.111b is amended as follows:
a. In paragraph (f)(3) by revising ``ASTM Method D2879-83'' to read
``ASTM D2879-83, 96, or 97.''
b. In paragraph (g) by revising ``ASTM D323-82'' to read ``ASTM
D323-82 or 94.''
Sec. 60.116b [Amended]
48. Section 60.116b is amended as follows:
a. In paragraph (e)(3)(ii) by revising ``ASTM Method D2879-83'' to
read ``ASTM D2879-83, 96, or 97.''
b. In paragraph (f)(2)(i) by revising ``ASTM Method D2879-83'' to
read ``ASTM D2879-83, 96, or 97.''
c. In paragraph (f)(2)(ii) by revising ``ASTM Method D323-82'' to
read ``ASTM D323-82 or 94.''
Sec. 60.121 [Amended]
49. In Sec. 60.121, paragraph (d) is added as follows:
Sec. 60.121 Definitions.
* * * * *
(d) Blast furnace means any furnace used to recover metal from
slag.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.133 [Amended]
50. In Sec. 60.133, paragraph (b)(1), the first sentence is amended
by revising the words ``pouring of the heat'' to read ``pouring of part
of the production cycle.''
Sec. 60.144 [Amended]
51. In Sec. 60.144, paragraph (c) is revised to read as follows:
Sec. 60.144 Test methods and procedures.
* * * * *
(c) The owner or operator shall use the monitoring devices of
Sec. 60.143(b)(1) and (2) for the duration of the particulate matter
runs. The arithmetic average of all measurements taken during these
runs shall be used to determine compliance with Sec. 60.143(c).
* * * * *
Sec. 60.143a [Amended]
52. Amend Sec. 60.143a, paragraph (c) as follows:
a. The words ``All monitoring devices'' in the first sentence are
revised to read ``All monitoring devices required by paragraph (a) of
this section.''
b. The words ``EPA Reference Method 2'' in the first sentence are
revised to read ``Method 2 of Appendix A of this part.''
c. The words ``EPA Reference Method 2'' in the second sentence are
revised to read ``Method 2.''
Sec. 60.144a [Amended]
53. In Sec. 60.144a, paragraph (d) is amended by revising it to
read as follows:
Sec. 60.144a Test methods and procedures.
* * * * *
(d) To comply with Sec. 60.143a(d) or (e), the owner or operator
shall use the monitoring device of Sec. 60.143a(a) to determine the
exhaust ventilation rates or levels during the particulate matter runs.
Each owner or operator shall then use these rates or levels to
determine the 3-hour averages required by Sec. 60.143a(d) and (e).
* * * * *
Sec. 60.145a [Amended]
54. In Sec. 60.145a, paragraph (f), in the first sentence by
revising the words ``Reference Method 5'' to read ``Method 5.''
Sec. 60.153 [Amended]
55. Amend Sec. 60.153 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(3) by revising the word ``thermocouple'' or
``thermocouples'' to read ``temperature measuring device'' or
``temperature measuring devices'' wherever it occurs.
b. In paragraph (b)(5), in the second sentence by revising the
words ``with the method specified under Sec. 60.154(c)(2)'' to read
``with the method specified under Sec. 60.154(b)(5).''
Sec. 60.154 [Amended]
56. In Sec. 60.154, paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(3) are revised, and
in paragraph (b)(4), the equations and definitions are revised as
follows:
Sec. 60.154 Test methods and procedures.
* * * * *
(b) * * *
(1) The emission rate (E) of particulate matter for each run shall
be computed using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.005
Where:
E = Emission rate of particulate matter, g/kg (lb/ton) of dry sludge
input.
cs = Concentration of particulate matter, g/dscm (gr/dscf).
Qsd = Volumetric flow rate of effluent gas, dscm/hr (dscf/
hr).
S = Charging rate of dry sludge during the run, kg/hr (ton/hr).
K = Conversion factor, 1.0 g/g (7,000 gr/lb).
* * * * *
(3) The dry sludge charging rate (S) for each run shall be computed
using either of the following equations:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.006
Where:
S = Charging rate of dry sludge, kg/hr (ton/hr).
Sm = Total mass of sludge charge, kg (ton).
Rdm = Average mass of dry sludge per unit mass of sludge
charged, kg/kg (ton/ton).
= Duration of run, hr.
Sv = Total volume of sludge charged, m3 (gal).
Rdv = Average mass of dry sludge per unit volume of sludge
charged, kg/m3 (lb/gal).
Kv = Conversion factor, 1 g/g (2,000 lb/ton).
(4) * * *
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.007
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.008
Where:
Sm = Total mass of sludge charged to the incinerator during
the test run.
Sv = Total volume of sludge charged to the incinerator
during the test run.
Qmi = Average mass flow rate calculated by averaging the
flow rates at the beginning and end of each interval ``i,'' kg/hr (ton/
hr).
Qvi = Average volume flow rate calculated by averaging the
flow rates at the beginning and end of each interval ``i,''
m3/hr (gal/hr).
i = Duration of interval ``i,'' hr.
* * * * *
57. Paragraph (b)(5)(iii) is amended by revising the words ``mg/
liter (lb/ft3) or mg/mg (lb/lb)'' to read ``kg/m3
(lb/gal) or kg/kg (ton/ton).''
Sec. 60.165 [Amended]
58. In Sec. 60.165, paragraph (d)(2) is amended by revising the
words
[[Page 61757]]
``installed under Sec. 60.163'' to read ``installed under paragraph (b)
of this section.''
Sec. 60.192 [Amended]
59. In Sec. 60.192, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words
``according to Sec. 60.8 above'' to read ``according to Sec. 60.195.''
Sec. 60.195 [Amended]
60. Amend Sec. 60.195 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words ``(mg/dscf)'' in the
definition of the term ``cs'' to read ``(gr/dscf)''; and
revising the words ``(453,600 mg/lb)'' in the definition of the term
``K'' to read ``(7,000 gr/lb).''
b. In paragraph (b)(2) by revising the words ``(mg/dscf)'' in the
definition of the symbol ``cs'' to read ``(gr/dscf)''; and
revising the words ``(453,600 mg/lb)'' in the definition of the symbol
``K'' to read ``(7,000 gr/lb).''
Sec. 60.201 [Amended]
61. In Sec. 60.201 by revising paragraph (c) to read as follows:
Sec. 60.201 Definitions.
* * * * *
(c) Equivalent P2O5 feed means the quantity
of phosphorus, expressed as phosphorus pentoxide, fed to the process.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.202 [Amended]
62. In Sec. 60.202, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words
``metric ton'' to read ``Mg.''
Sec. 60.203 [Amended]
63. In Sec. 60.203, paragraph (b) is amended by revising the words
``metric ton'' to read ``Mg.''
Sec. 60.204 [Amended]
64. Amend Sec. 60.204 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words ``metric ton'' in the
definition of the term ``E'' to read ``Mg''; revising the words ``(mg/
dscf)'' in the definition of the term ``csi'' to read ``(gr/
dscf)''; revising the words ``metric ton'' in the definition of the
term ``P'' to read ``Mg''; and revising the words ``(453,600 mg/lb)''
in the definition of the term ``K'' to read ``(7,000 gr/lb).''
b. In paragraph (b)(3) by revising the words ``metric ton'' in the
definition of the term ``Mp'' to read ``Mg.''
Sec. 60.211 [Amended]
65. In Sec. 60.211 by revising paragraph (c) to read as follows:
Sec. 60.211 Definitions.
* * * * *
(c) Equivalent P2O5 feed means the quantity
of phosphorus, expressed as phosphorus pentoxide, fed to the process.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.212 [Amended]
66. In Sec. 60.212, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words
``metric ton'' to read ``megagram (Mg).''
Sec. 60.213 [Amended]
67. In Sec. 60.213, paragraph (b) is amended by revising the words
``metric ton'' to read ``Mg.''
Sec. 60.214 [Amended]
68. Amend Sec. 60.214 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words ``metric ton'' in the
definition of the term ``E'' to read ``Mg''; revising the words ``(mg/
dscf)'' in the definition of the term ``csi'' to read ``(gr/
dscf)''; revising the words ``metric ton'' in the definition of the
term ``P'' to read ``Mg''; and revising the words ``(453,600 mg/lb)''
in the definition of the term ``K'' to read ``(7,000 gr/lb).''
b. In paragraph (b)(3) by revising the words ``metric ton'' in the
definition of the term ``Mp'' to read ``Mg.''
Sec. 60.222 [Amended]
69. In Sec. 60.222, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words
``metric ton'' to read ``megagram (Mg).''
Sec. 60.223 [Amended]
70. Amend Sec. 60.223 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b) by revising the words ``metric ton'' to read
``Mg.''
b. In paragraph (c), in the first sentence by revising the word
``part'' to read ``subpart.''
Sec. 60.224 [Amended]
71. Amend Sec. 60.224 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words ``metric ton'' in the
definition of the term ``E'' to read ``Mg''; revising the words ``(mg/
dscf)'' in the definition of the term ``csi'' to read ``(gr/
dscf)''; revising the words ``metric ton'' in the definition of the
term ``P'' to read ``Mg''; and revising the words ``(453,600 mg/lb)''
in the definition of the term ``K'' to read ``(7,000 gr/lb).''
b. In paragraph (b)(3) by revising the words ``metric ton'' in the
definition of the term ``Mp'' to read ``Mg.''
Sec. 60.232 [Amended]
72. Sec. 60.232 is amended by removing the paragraph designation
and by revising the words ``metric ton'' to read ``megagram (Mg).''
Sec. 60.233 [Amended]
73. Sec. 60.233 is amended by removing the paragraph designation
and by revising the words ``metric ton'' to read ``Mg.''
Sec. 60.234 [Amended]
74. Amend Sec. 60.234 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words ``metric ton'' in the
definition of the term ``E'' to read ``Mg''; revising the words ``(mg/
dscf)'' in the definition of the term ``csi'' to read ``(gr/
dscf)''; revising the words ``metric ton'' in the definition of the
term ``P'' to read ``Mg''; and revising the words ``(453,600 mg/lb)''
in the definition of the term ``K'' to read ``(7,000 gr/lb).''
b. In paragraph (b)(3) by revising the words ``metric ton'' in the
definition of the term ``Mp'' to read ``Mg.''
Sec. 60.241 [Amended]
75. In Sec. 60.241, paragraph (c) is amended by italicizing the
word ``stored.''
Sec. 60.242 [Amended]
76-77. In Sec. 60.242, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the
words ``metric ton'' to read ``megagram (Mg).''
Sec. 60.244 [Amended]
78. Amend Sec. 60.244 as follows:
a. In paragraph (c)(1) by revising the words ``metric ton'' in the
definition of the term ``E'' to read ``Mg''; revising the words ``(mg/
dscf)'' in the definition of the term ``csi'' to read ``(gr/
dscf)''; revising the words ``metric ton'' the words ``(453,600 mg/
lb)'' in the definition of the term ``K'' to read ``(7,000 gr/lb).''
b. In paragraph (b)(3) by revising the words ``metric ton'' in the
definition of the term ``Mp''to read ``Mg.''
Sec. 60.250 [Amended]
79. In Sec. 60.250, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words
``200 tons'' to read ``181 Mg (200 tons).''
Sec. 60.251 [Amended]
80. In Sec. 60.251, paragraphs (b) and (c) are amended by revising
``D388-77'' to read ``D388-77, 90, 91, 95, or 98a.''
Sec. 60.252 [Amended]
81. In Sec. 60.252, paragraph (b)(1) is amended by revising the
words ``0.040 g/dscm (0.018 gr/dscf)'' to read ``0.040 g/dscm (0.017
gr/dscf).''
Sec. 60.253 [Amended]
82. Amend Sec. 60.253 as follows:
a. In paragraph (a)(1), the second sentence is amended by revising
the words ``3 deg. Fahrenheit'' to read ``1.7
deg.C (3 deg.F).''
[[Page 61758]]
b. In paragraph (a)(2)(i), the second sentence is amended by
revising the word ``gage'' to read ``gauge.''
Sec. 60.261 [Amended]
83. Amend Sec. 60.261 as follows:
a. Paragraph (n) is amended by revising ``ASTM Designation A99-76''
to read ``ASTM Designation A99-76 or 82 (Reapproved 1987).''
b. Paragraphs (s) and (w) are amended by revising ``ASTM
Designation A100-69 (Reapproved 1974)'' to read ``ASTM Designation
A100-69, 74, or 93.''
c. Paragraph (q) is amended by revising ``ASTM Designation A101-
73'' to read ``ASTM Designation A101-73 or 93.''
d. Paragraph (t) is amended by revising ``ASTM Designation A482-
76'' to read ``ASTM Designation A482-76 or 93.''
e. Paragraph (o) is amended by revising ``ASTM Designation A483-64
(Reapproved 1974)'' to read ``ASTM Designation A483-64 or 74
(Reapproved 1988).''
f. Paragraph (v) is amended by revising ``ASTM Designation A495-
76'' to read ``ASTM Designation A495-76 or 94.''
Sec. 60.266 [Amended]
84. Amend Sec. 60.266 as follows:
a. Paragraph (c)(1) is amended by revising the words ``emissions is
quantified'' in the definition of the term ``n'' to read ``emissions
are quantified''; revising the words ``(g/dscf)'' in the definition of
the term ``csi'' to read ``(gr/dscf)''; and revising the
words ``(453.6 g/lb)'' in the definition of the term ``K'' to read
``(7000 gr/lb).''
b. Paragraph (c)(2)(ii) is amended by revising the words ``5.70
dscm (200 dscf)'' to read ``5.66 dscm (200 dscf).''
Sec. 60.274 [Amended]
85. Amend Sec. 60.274 as follows:
a-b. Paragraph (a)(4) is amended by revising the words ``under
paragraph (e) of this section'' to read ``under paragraph (f) of this
section.''
c. In Sec. 60.274, paragraph (i), the first sentence is amended by
revising the words ``required by Sec. 60.275(c)'' to read ``required by
Sec. 60.276(c).''
d. In Sec. 60.274, by revising paragraph (i)(4) to read as follows:
Sec. 60.274 Monitoring of operations.
* * * * *
(i) * * *
(4) Continuous opacity monitor or Method 9 data.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.275 [Amended]
86. Amend Sec. 60.275 as follows:
a. Paragraph (e)(2) is amended by revising the words ``more then
one control'' to read ``more than one control.''
b. Paragraph (e)(4) is amended by revising the words ``the test
runs shall be conducted concurrently'' to read ``the Method 9 test runs
shall be conducted concurrently with the particulate matter test
runs.''
c. In paragraph (i), the fifth sentence is amended by revising the
words ``In the case, Reference Method 9'' to read ``In this case,
Method 9.''
Sec. 60.276 [Amended]
87. Amend Sec. 60.276 by:
a. Paragraphs (a) and (c)(6)(iv) are revised.
b. In paragraph (b), the second sentence is amended by revising the
words ``postmarked 30 days prior'' to read ``postmarked at least 30
days prior.''
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.276 Recordkeeping and reporing requirements.
(a) Operation at a furnace static pressure that exceeds the value
established under Sec. 60.274(g) and either operation of control system
fan motor amperes at values exceeding 15 percent of the
value established under Sec. 60.274(c) or operation at flow rates lower
than those established under Sec. 60.274(c) may be considered by the
Administrator to be unacceptable operation and maintenance of the
affected facility. Operation at such values shall be reported to the
Administrator semiannually.
* * * * *
(c) * * *
(6) * * *
(iv) Continuous opacity monitor or Method 9 data.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.274a [Amended]
88. Amend Sec. 60.274a by:
a. In paragraph (c), the first sentence is revised, and paragraph
(h)(4) is revised.
b. Paragraph (f) is amended by adding the following sentence after
the first sentence: ``The pressure shall be recorded as 15-minute
integrated averages.''
c. In paragraph (h), the first sentence is amended by revising the
words ``required by Sec. 60.275a(d)'' to read ``required by
Sec. 60.276a(f).''
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.274a Monitoring of operations.
* * * * *
(c) When the owner or operator of an EAF is required to demonstrate
compliance with the standards under Sec. 60.272a(a)(3), and at any
other time that the Administrator may require (under section 114 of the
Act, as amended), either the control system fan motor amperes and all
damper positions or the volumetric flow rate through each separately
ducted hood shall be determined during all periods in which a hood is
operated for the purpose of capturing emissions from the affected
facility subject to paragraph (b)(1) or (b)(2) of this section. * * *
* * * * *
(h) * * *
(4) Continuous opacity monitor or Method 9 data.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.275a [Amended]
89. In Sec. 60.275a, paragraph (e)(4) is amended by revising the
words ``the test runs shall be conducted concurrently'' to read ``the
Method 9 test runs shall be conducted concurrently with the particulate
matter test runs.''
Sec. 60.276a [Amended]
90. Amend Sec. 60.276a as follows:
a. In paragraph (e), the second sentence is amended by revising the
words ``postmarked 30 days prior'' to read ``postmarked at least 30
days prior.''
b. Paragraph (f)(6)(iv) is amended by revising as follows:
Sec. 60.276a Recordkeeping and reporting requirements.
* * * * *
(f) * * *
(iv) Continuous opacity monitor or Method 9 data.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.281 [Amended]
91. Amend Sec. 60.281 as follows:
a. In paragraph (c) by revising the words ``Reference Method 16''
to read ``Method 16.''
b. In paragraph (d) by revising the words ``below tank(s)'' to read
``blow tank(s).''
c. In paragraph (e) by revising the words ``digestion system'' to
read ``digester system.''
Sec. 60.282 [Amended]
92. In Sec. 60.282, paragraph (a)(3)(i) is amended by revising the
words ``0.15 g/dscm (0.067 gr/dscf)'' to read ``0.15 g/dscm (0.066 gr/
dscf).''
Sec. 60.283 [Amended]
93. Amend Sec. 60.283 as follows:
a. In paragraph (a)(1)(iii) by revising the words ``1200 deg.F.''
to read ``650 deg.C (1200 deg.F).''
[[Page 61759]]
b. In paragraph (a)(1)(v), in the second sentence by revising the
words ``5 ppm by volume on a dry basis, corrected to the actual oxygen
content of the untreated gas stream'' to read ``5 ppm by volume on a
dry basis, uncorrected for oxygen content.''
c. In paragraph (a)(1)(vi) by revising the words ``0.005 g/kg ADP''
to read ``0.005 g/kg air dried pulp (ADP).''
Sec. 60.284 [Amended]
94. Amend Sec. 60.284 by:
a. In paragraph (a)(2)(ii) by revising the words ``20 percent'' to
read ``25 percent''
b. Revising paragraph (c) introductory text.
c. In paragraph (c)(3) by revising the words ``Correct all 12-hour
average TRS concentrations to 10 volume percent oxygen, except that all
12-hour average TRS concentration from a recovery furnace shall be
corrected to 8 volume percent using the following equation:'' to read
``Using the following equation, correct all 12-hour average TRS
concentrations to 10 volume percent oxygen, except that all 12-hour
average TRS concentrations from a recovery furnace shall be corrected
to 8 volume percent oxygen instead of 10 percent, and all 12-hour
average TRS concentrations from a facility to which the provisions of
Sec. 60.283(a)(1)(v) apply shall not be corrected for oxygen content:''
d. Paragraph (d)(3)(ii) is amended by revising the words
``1200 deg.F'' to read ``650 deg.C (1200 deg.F).''
e. Adding paragraph (f).
The revisions and addition read as follows:
Sec. 60.284 Monitoring of emissions and operations.
* * * * *
(c) Any owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart
shall, except where the provisions of Sec. 60.283(a)(1)(iii) or (iv)
apply, perform the following:
* * * * *
(f) The procedures under Sec. 60.13 shall be followed for
installation, evaluation, and operation of the continuous monitoring
systems required under this section.
(1) All continuous monitoring systems shall be operated in
accordance with the applicable procedures under Performance
Specifications 1, 3, and 5 of appendix B to this part.
(2) Quarterly accuracy determinations and daily calibration drift
tests shall be performed in accordance with Procedure 1 of appendix F
to this part.
Sec. 60.285 [Amended]
95. Amend Sec. 60.285 as follows:
a. In paragraph (c)(1) by revising the definition of the term
``cs'' to read ``cs = Concentration of
particulate matter, g/dscm (lb/dscf).''
b. In paragraph (d)(3) by revising the equation used to calculate
``GLS'' as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.009
c. In paragraph (e)(1) by revising the definition of ``F'' to read
``F = conversion factor, 0.001417 g H2S/m3-ppm
(8.846 x 10-8 lb H2S/ft3-ppm).''
d. In paragraph (f)(1) by revising the words ``205 deg.C (400
deg.F)'' to read ``204 deg.C (400 deg.F).''
e. Revising paragraph (f)(2).
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.285 Test methods and procedures.
* * * * *
(f) * * *
(2) In place of Method 16, Method 16A or 16B may be used.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.290 [Amended]
96. In Sec. 60.290, paragraph (c) is amended by revising the words
``4,550 kilograms'' to read ``4.55 Mg (5 tons).''
Sec. 60.291 [Amended]
97. Amend Sec. 60.291 as follows:
a. The second sentence of the definition of the term ``Glass
melting furnace'' is amended by revising the word ``appendaees'' to
read ``appendages.''
b. The definition of the term ``lead recipe'' is amended by
revising the chemical formula ``Na2M'' to read
``Na2O.''
c. The second sentence of the definition of the term ``rebricking''
is amended by revising the word ``replacment'' to read ``replacement.''
Sec. 60.292 [Amended]
98. In Sec. 60.292, paragraph (a)(2), the definition of the term
STD is amended by revising the words ``g of particulate/kg'' to read
``g of particulate/kg (lb of particulate/ton).''
Sec. 60.293 [Amended]
99. Amend Sec. 60.293 as follows:
a. In paragraph (d)(1) by revising the words ``specified in
paragraph (b)(1) of this section'' to read ``specified in paragraph (b)
of this section.''
b. Paragraph (e) is redesignated as paragraph (f).
c. Paragraph (d)(3) introductory text is redesignated as paragraph
(e); paragraphs (d)(3)(i), (ii), and (iii) are redesignated as
paragraphs (e)(1), (2), and (3).
d. Newly designated paragraph (f) is amended by revising the words
``12014 deg.C'' to read ``12014 deg.C
(24825 deg.F).
Sec. 60.296 [Amended]
100. Amend Sec. 60.296 as follows:
In paragraph (b)(3) by revising the words ``American Society of
Testing and Materials (ASTM) Method D240-76'' to read ``ASTM Method
D240-76 or 92'' and by revising ``D1826-77'' to read ``D1826-77 or
94.''
Sec. 60.301 [Amended]
101. In Sec. 60.301, the first paragraph is amended by revising the
words ``the act'' to read ``the Act.''
Sec. 60.313 [Amended]
102. Amend Sec. 60.313 as follows:
a. Paragraph (c)(1) is amended by revising the words ``Reference
Method 24'' to read ``Method 24'' wherever they occur.
b. In paragraph (c)(1)(i)(B), the third sentence is amended by
revising the words ``other transfer efficiencies other than'' to read
``transfer efficiencies other than.''
c. Paragraph (c)(2)(i) is amended by revising the words ``in
(c)(2)(i)(A), (B), and (C)'' to read ``in paragraphs (c)(2)(i)(A), (B),
and (C)'' wherever they occur.
Sec. 60.315 [Amended]
103. In Sec. 60.315, paragraph (a)(2) is amended by revising the
words ``Reference Method 24'' to read ``Method 24.''
Sec. 60.330 [Amended]
104. In Sec. 60.330, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words
``10.7 gigajoules'' to read ``10.7 gigajoules (10 million Btu).''
Sec. 60.331 [Amended]
105. In Sec. 60.331, paragraph (s) is removed.
Sec. 60.332 [Amended]
106. In Sec. 60.332, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words
``the date of the performance test'' to read ``the date on which the
performance test.''
Sec. 60.334 [Amended]
107. In Sec. 60.334, paragraph (c)(3), the first sentence is
amended by revising the words ``provided in Sec. 60.332(g)'' to read
``provided in Sec. 60.332(f).''
Sec. 60.335 [Amended]
108. Amend Sec. 60.335 by:
[[Page 61760]]
a. Paragraph (c)(1) is amended by revising the words:
``NOX = emission rate of NOX at 15 percent
O2 and ISO standard ambient conditions, volume percent.
NOX = observed NOX concentration, ppm by
volume.''
``NOX = emission rate of NOX at 15 percent O2 and
ISO standard ambient conditions, ppm by volume.
NOX = observed NOX concentration, ppm by volume
at 15 percent O2.''
b. Paragraph (d) is revised.
c. In paragraph (f)(1), the first sentence is amended by revising
the words ``in paragraph (b)(1) of this section'' to read ``in
paragraph (c)(1) of this section.''
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.335 Test methods and procedures.
* * * * *
(d) The owner or operator shall determine compliance with the
sulfur content standard in Sec. 60.333(b) as follows: ASTM D 2880-71,
78, or 96 shall be used to determine the sulfur content of liquid fuels
and ASTM D 1072-80 or 90 (Reapproved 1994), D 3031-81, D 4084-82 or 94,
or D 3246-81, 92, or 96 shall be used for the sulfur content of gaseous
fuels (incorporated by reference-see Sec. 60.17). The applicable ranges
of some ASTM methods mentioned above are not adequate to measure the
levels of sulfur in some fuel gases. Dilution of samples before
analysis (with verification of the dilution ratio) may be used, subject
to the approval of the Administrator.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.343 [Amended]
109. In Sec. 60.343, paragraph (e), the first sentence is amended
by revising the words ``in which the scrubber pressure drop is greater
than 30 percent below the rate established during the performance
test'' to read ``in which the scrubber pressure drop or scrubbing
liquid supply pressure is greater than 30 percent below that
established during the performance test.''
Sec. 60.344 [Amended]
110. Amend Sec. 60.344 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(1), the definition of the term
``cs'' is amended by revising the words ``(g/dscf)'' to read
``(gr/dscf).''
b. In paragraph (b)(1), the definition of the term ``K'' is amended
by revising the words ``(453.6 g/lb)'' to read ``(7000 gr/lb).''
c. In paragraph (b)(2), the first sentence is amended by revising
the words ``Method 5D shall be used as positive-pressure fabric
filters'' to read ``Method 5D shall be used at positive-pressure fabric
filters.''
Sec. 60.372 [Amended]
111. Amend Sec. 60.372 as follows;
a. In paragraph (a)(1) by revising the words ``0.40 milligram of
lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.000176 gr/dscf)'' to
read ``0.40 milligram of lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust
(0.000175 gr/dscf).''
b. In paragraph (a)(2) by revising the words ``1.00 milligram of
lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.00044 gr/dscf)'' to
read ``1.00 milligram of lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust
(0.000437 gr/dscf).''
c. In paragraph (a)(3) by revising the words ``1.00 milligram of
lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.00044 gr/dscf)'' to
read ``1.00 milligram of lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust
(0.000437 gr/dscf).''
d. In paragraph (a)(5) by revising the words ``4.50 milligrams of
lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.00198 gr/dscf)'' to
read ``4.50 milligrams of lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust
(0.00197 gr/dscf).''
e. In paragraph (a)(6) by revising the words ``1.00 milligram per
dry standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.00044 gr/dscf)'' to read ``1.00
milligram of lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.000437 gr/
dscf).''
Sec. 60.374 [Amended]
112. Amend Sec. 60.374 as follows:
a. In paragraph (c)(1), in the definition of the term
``cPbi'' by revising the words ``mg/dscm'' to read ``mg/dscm
(gr/dscf).''
b. In paragraph (c)(1), in the definition of the term ``K'' by
revising the words ``453,600 mg/lb'' to read ``7000 gr/lb).''
Sec. 60.381 [Amended]
113. In Sec. 60.381, in the definition of the term ``storage bin''
by revising the words ``or metallic minerals'' to read ``of metallic
minerals.''
Sec. 60.382 [Amended]
114. In Sec. 60.382, paragraph (a)(1) is amended by revising the
words ``0.05 grams per dry standard cubic meter'' to read ``0.05 grams
per dry standard cubic meter (0.02 g/dscm).''
Sec. 60.385 [Amended]
115. In Sec. 60.385, paragraph (c) is amended by revising the words
``scrubber pressure loss (or gain) and liquid flow rate'' to read
``scrubber pressure loss (or gain) or liquid flow rate''.
Sec. 60.386 [Amended]
116. In Sec. 60.386, paragraph (c) is amended by revising the words
``Sec. 60.3284(a) and (b)'' to read ``Sec. 60.384(a) and (b).''
Sec. 60.391 [Amended]
117. Amend Sec. 60.391 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b), the definition of ``E'' is amended by revising
the words ``destruction efficiency'' to read ``destruction or removal
efficiency.''
b. In paragraph (b), the eleventh definition is amended by revising
the words
``Lcill = Volume of each coating (i) consumed by
each application method (l), as received liters)''
to read
``Lcil = Volume of each coating (i) consumed by each
application method (l), as received (liters).''
Sec. 60.393 [Amended]
118. Amend Sec. 60.393 as follows:
a. In paragraph (c)(1)(i) by revising the words ``Reference Method
24'' to read ``Method 24'' wherever they occur.
b. Paragraph (c)(2)(ii)(A) is amended by revising the term to read
as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.010
to read as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.011
Sec. 60.395 [Amended]
119. In Sec. 60.395, paragraph (d) is amended by revising the words
``Reference Method 25'' to read ``Method 25.''
Sec. 60.396 [Amended]
120. In Sec. 60.396, paragraphs (a)(1), (a)(2), (b), and (c) are
amended by revising the words ``Reference Method'' to read ``Method.''
Sec. 60.401 [Amended]
121. In Sec. 60.401, paragraph (b) is amended by revising the words
``unit including, moisture'' to read ``unit, including moisture.''
Sec. 60.402 [Amended]
122. In Sec. 60.402, paragraph (a)(2)(i) is amended by revising the
word ``Contains'' to read ``Contain.''
Sec. 60.424 [Amended]
123. Amend Sec. 60.424 to read as follows:
a. In the first paragraph (b)(3), in the first sentence by revising
the words
[[Page 61761]]
``scales or computed from material balance shall'' to read ``scales, or
the result of computations using a material balance, shall.''
b. The second paragraph (b)(3) is redesignated as (b)(4).
Sec. 60.431 [Amended]
124. In Sec. 60.431, paragraph (b), the definition of the term
``Ldi'' is amended by adding the words ``the subject
facility (or facilities)'' to the end of the definition.
Sec. 60.433 [Amended]
125. Amend Sec. 60.433 as follows:
a. In paragraph (a)(5), the first sentence is amended by revising
the words ``material or on at least'' to read ``material on at least.''
b. Paragraph (a)(5)(ii) is amended by revising the punctuation at
the end of the paragraph. The words ``according to Sec. 60.435.'' are
revised to read ``according to Sec. 60.435;''
c. Paragraphs(b)(1), (b)(2), (b)(3), (b)(5), (c)(2)(ii), and
(c)(2)(iii) are amended by adding an ``='' between the ``i'' and the
``1'' under the summation sign.
d. Paragraph (c)(2)(v) is amended by replacing the ``e'' subscript
with ``a'' wherever it occurs.
e. Paragraph (e)(5)(ii) is amended by replacing the ``a'' subscript
with ``e'' wherever it occurs.
Sec. 60.435 [Amended]
126. Amend Sec. 60.435 as follows:
a. Paragraphs (a)(1), (a)(2), and (b) are amended by revising the
words ``Reference Method'' to read ``Method'' wherever they occur.
b. Paragraph (d)(1) is amended by revising the words ``ASTM D1475-
60 (Reapproved 1980)'' to read ``ASTM D1475-60, 80, or 90.''
Sec. 60.440 [Amended]
127. In Sec. 60.440, paragraph (b) is amended by revising the words
``45 Mg'' to read ``45 Mg (50 tons)'' wherever they occur.
Sec. 60.441 [Amended]
128. In Sec. 60.441, paragraphs (a) and (b) are amended by revising
the words ``Reference Method'' to read ``Method'' wherever they occur.
Sec. 60.443 [Amended]
129. Amend Sec. 60.443 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b) by revising the words ``Rq less'' to
read ``Rq is less.''
b. In paragraph (d) by revising the words ``in paragraph (b)(1) of
this section'' to read ``in paragraph (b) of this section.''
c. In paragraph (e), in the third sentence by revising the words
``38 deg.C (50 deg.F)'' to read ``28 deg.C (50 deg.F).''
d. In paragraph (i) by revising the word ``devices'' to read
``device(s).''
Sec. 60.446 [Amended]
130. In Sec. 60.446, paragraphs (a) and (b) are amended by revising
the words ``Reference Method'' to read ``Method'' wherever they occur.
Sec. 60.453 [Amended]
131. Amend Sec. 60.453 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b) by revising the words ``performance text'' to
read ``performance test.''
b. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words ``Reference Method''
to read ``Method'' wherever they occur.
c. In paragraph (b)(1)(i)(B) by revising the word ``coatings'' to
read ``coating.''
d. In paragraph (b)(1)(i)(C) by revising equation (3).
e. In paragraphs (b)(2)(i)(A) and (b)(2)(i)(B) by revising
Equations (6) and (7).
f. In paragraph (b)(2)(i)(B) by removing Equation (7) and its
nomenclature, adding them to the end of paragraph (b)(2)(i)(A), and
redesignating the equation as Equation (6).
g. In paragraph (b)(3)(i) by revising the word ``assumed'' to read
``consumed.''
The revisions reads as follows:
Sec. 60.453 Test methods and procedures.
* * * * *
(b) * * *
(1) * * *
(i) * * *
(C) * * *
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.012
* * * * *
(2) * * *
(i) * * *
(A) * * *
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.013
* * * * *
(B) * * *
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.014
* * * * *
Sec. 60.454 [Amended]
132. In Sec. 60.454, paragraph (a)(2) is amended by revising the
words ``of the greater of 0.75 percent of the temperature being
measured expressed in degrees Celsius or 2.5 deg.C'' to
read ``of 0.75 percent of the temperature being measured, expressed in
degrees Celsius, or 2.5 deg.C, whichever is greater.''
Sec. 60.455 [Amended]
133. Amend Sec. 60.455 as follows:
a. Paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(2) are amended by revising the words
``28 deg.C'' to read ``28 deg.C'' (50 deg.F)'' wherever they occur.
b. In paragraph (d), the first sentence is amended by revising the
word ``opreator'' to read ``operator.''
Sec. 60.456 [Amended]
134. Amend Sec. 60.456 as follows:
a. In paragraph (a)(1), the second sentence is amended by revising
the words ``Reference Method 24'' to read ``Method 24.''
b. In paragraph (a)(1), the third sentence is amended by revising
the words ``subsection 4.4 of Method 24'' to read ``Section 12.6 of
Method 24.''
c. Paragraph (a)(4) is amended by revising the word ``volocity'' to
read ``velocity.''
d. Paragraph (c) is amended by revising the words ``0.003 dscm'' to
read ``0.003 dscm (0.1 dscf).''
Sec. 60.463 [Amended]
135. Amend Sec. 60.463 as follows:
a. Paragraph (c)(1) is amended by revising the words ``Reference
Method 24'' to read ``Method 24'' wherever they occur.
b. Paragraph (c)(3)(iii) is amended by revising the word
``computation'' to read ``computations.''
c. Paragraph (c)(4)(ii) is amended by revising the defined term
``m'' to read ``n.''
Sec. 60.464 [Amended]
136. In Sec. 60.464, paragraph (c), the second sentence is amended
by revising the words ``which is greater'' to read ``whichever is
greater.''
Sec. 60.465 [Amended]
137. Amend Sec. 60.465 as follows:
a. In paragraph (c), the first sentence is amended by revising the
reference ``Sec. 69.462'' to read ``Sec. 60.462.''
b. In paragraph (d), the first sentence is amended by revising the
reference ``Sec. 69.464'' to read ``Sec. 60.464.''
Sec. 60.466 [Amended]
138. Amend Sec. 60.466 as follows:
a. Paragraphs (a)(1) and (a)(2) are amended by revising the words
[[Page 61762]]
``Reference Method'' to read ``Method'' wherever they occur.
b. In paragraph (a)(1), the first sentence is amended by revising
the words ``coating for determining the VOC content'' to read
``coating, shall be used for determining the VOC content.''
c. In paragraph (a)(1), the third sentence is amended by revising
the words ``section 4.4'' to read ``Section 12.6.''
d. Paragraph (c) is amended by revising the words ``0.003 dry
standard cubic meter (DSCM)'' to read ``0.003 dscm (0.11 dscf).''
Sec. 60.471 [Amended]
139. In Sec. 60.471, the definition of the term ``Catalyst'' is
amended by revising the words ``means means'' to read ``means.''
Sec. 60.472 [Amended]
140. Amend Sec. 60.472 as follows:
a. Paragraph (a)(1)(i) is amended by revising the words ``0.04
kilograms of particulate per megagram'' to read ``0.04 kg/Mg (0.08 lb/
ton).''
b. Paragraph (a)(1)(ii) is amended by revising the words ``0.04
kilograms per megagram'' to read ``0.04 kg/Mg (0.08 lb/ton).''
c. Paragraph (b)(1) is amended by revising the words ``0.67
kilograms of particulate per megagram'' to read ``0.67 kg/Mg (1.3 lb/
ton).''
d. Paragraph (b)(2) is amended by revising the words ``0.71
kilograms of particulate per megagram'' to read ``0.71 kg/Mg (1.4 lb/
ton).''
e. Paragraph (b)(3) is amended by revising the words ``0.60
kilograms of particulate per megagram'' to read ``0.60 kg/Mg (1.2 lb/
ton).''
f. Paragraph (b)(4) is amended by revising the words ``0.64
kilograms of particulate per megagram'' to read ``0.64 kg/Mg (1.3 lb/
ton).''
g. Paragraph (b)(5) is amended by revising the words ``procedures
in Sec. 60.474(k)'' to read ``procedures in Sec. 60.474(g).''
Sec. 60.473 [Amended]
141. Amend Sec. 60.473 as follows:
a. In paragraph (a), the second sentence is amended by revising the
words ``15 deg.C'' to read ``15 deg.C
(25 deg.F).''
b. In paragraph (b), the second sentence is amended by revising the
words ``10 deg.C'' to read ``10 deg.C
(18 deg.F).''
c. In paragraph (c), the first sentence is amended by revising the
words ``(a) and (b)'' to read ``(a) or (b)''
Sec. 60.474 [Amended]
142. Amend Sec. 60.474 as follows:
a. In paragraph (c)(1), the definition of the term ``E'' is amended
by revising the words ``kg/Mg'' to read ``kg/Mg (lb/ton).''
b. In paragraph (c)(1), the definition of the term
``cs'' is amended by revising the words ``(g/dscf)'' to read
``(gr/dscf).''
c. In paragraph (c)(1), the definition of the term ``K'' is amended
by revising the words ``907.2/(g-Mg)/(kg-ton)'' to read ``7000 gr/
lb).''
d. In paragraph (c)(4), the definition of the term ``d'' is amended
by revising the words ``llb/ft\3\'' to read ``lb/ft\3\.''
e. Paragraphs (c)(4)(ii) and (f) are revised.
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.474 Test methods and procedures.
* * * * *
(c) * * *
(4) * * *
(ii) The density (d) of the asphalt shall be computed using the
following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.015
Where:
d = Density of the asphalt, kg/m\3\ (lb/ft\3\)
K1 = 1056.1 kg/m\3\ (metric units)
= 64.70 lb/ft\3\ (English Units)
K2 = 0.6176 kg/(m\3\ deg.C) (metric units)
= 0.0694 lb/(ft\3\ deg.F) (English Units)
Ti = temperature at the start of the blow, deg.C ( deg.F)
* * * * *
(f) If at a later date the owner or operator believes that the
emission limits in Sec. 60.472(a) and (b) are being met even though one
of the conditions listed in this paragraph exist, he may submit a
written request to the Administrator to repeat the performance test and
procedure outlined in paragraph (c) of this section.
(1) The temperature measured in accordance with Sec. 60.473(a) is
exceeding that measured during the performance test.
(2) The temperature measured in accordance with Sec. 60.473(b) is
lower than that measured during the performance test.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.480 [Amended]
143. In Sec. 60.480(d)(2), line 3, revise the words ``1,000 Mg/yr''
to read ``1,000 Mg/yr (1,102 ton/yr)''
Sec. 60.481 [Amended]
144. Amend Sec. 60.481 as follows:
a. Paragraph (a)(1) under the definition of ``Capital expenditure''
is amended by revising the words ``repair allowance, B, as reflected''
to ``repair allowance, B, divided by 100 as reflected''
b. The definition for ``In vacuum service'' is amended by revising
the words ``5 kilopascals (kPa)'' to ``5 kilopascals (kPa)(0.7 psia).''
c. The definition of the term ``Repaired'' is amended by revising
the words ``instrument reading or 10,000 ppm or greater'' to read
``instrument reading of 10,000 ppm or greater.''
Sec. 60.482-2 [Amended]
145. Amend Sec. 60.482-2 as follows:
a. Paragraph (e) is amended by revising the words ``(a), (c), and
(d) if the pump'' to read ``(a), (c), and (d) of this section if the
pump.''
b. Paragraph (e)(3) is amended by revising the words ``paragraph
(e)(2)'' to read ``paragraph (e)(2) of this section.''
c. Paragraph (f) is amended by revising the words ``exempt from the
paragraphs (a) through (e)'' to read ``exempt from paragraphs (a)
through (e) of this section.''
Sec. 60.482-3 [Amended]
146. In Sec. 60.482-3, paragraph (i)(2) is amended by revising the
words ``paragraph (i)(1)'' to read ``paragraph (i)(1) of this
section.''
Sec. 60.482-4 [Amended]
147. In Sec. 60.482-4, paragraph (c) is amended by revising the
words ``paragraphs (a) and (b)'' to read ``paragraphs (a) and (b) of
this section.''
Sec. 60.482-5 [Amended]
148. In Sec. 60.482-5, paragraph (c) is amended by revising the
words ``paragraphs (a) and (b).'' to read ``paragraphs (a) and (b) of
this section.''
Sec. 60.482-7 [Amended]
149. In Sec. 60.482-7, paragraph (f)(3) is amended by revising the
words ``paragraph (f)(2)'' to read ``paragraph (f)(2) of this
section.''
Sec. 60.482-10 [Amended]
150. In Sec. 60.482-10, paragraph (c) is amended by revising the
words ``temperature of 816 deg.C'' to read ``temperature of 816 deg.C
(1500 deg.F).''
Sec. 60.483-1 [Amended]
151. In Sec. 60.483-1, paragraph (b)(1) is amended by revising the
words ``specified in Sec. 60.487(b)'' to read ``specified in
Sec. 60.487(d).''
Sec. 60.483-2 [Amended]
152. In Sec. 60.483-2, paragraph (a)(2) is amended by revising the
words ``specified in Sec. 60.487(b)'' to read ``specified in
Sec. 60.487(d).''
Sec. 60.484 [Amended]
153. In Sec. 60.484, paragraph (f)(2) is amended by revising the
words ``paragraphs (b), (c), (d), and (e)'' to read
[[Page 61763]]
``paragraphs (b), (c), (d), and (e) of this section.''
Sec. 60.485 [Amended]
154. Amend Sec. 60.485 as follows:
a. In paragraph (c)(2), in the third sentence by revising the word
``indicates'' is revised to read ``indicated.''
b. In paragraph (d), in the first sentence by revising the words
``in VOC series'' to read ``in VOC service.''
c. In paragraph (d)(1) by revising the words ``ASTM E-260, E-168,
E-169'' to read ``ASTM E260-73, 91, or 96, E168-67, 77, or 92, E169-63,
77, or 93.''
d. In paragraphs (e)(1) and (e)(2) by revising the words ``0.3 kPa
at 20 deg.C'' to read ``0.3 kPa at 20 deg.C (1.2 in. H2O at
68 deg.F)'' wherever they occur.
e. In paragraph (e)(1) by revising ``ASTM D-2879'' to read ``ASTM
D2879-83, 96, or 97.''
f. In paragraph (f) by revising the words ``paragraphs (d), (e),
and (g)'' to read ``paragraphs (d), (e), and (g) of this section.''
g. Paragraphs (g)(3) and (g)(4) are revised.
h. In paragraph (g)(5) by revising ``ASTM D 2504-67'' to read
``ASTM D2504-67, 77, or 88 (Reapproved 1993).''
i. In paragraph (g)(6) by revising ``ASTM D 2382-76'' to read
``ASTM D2382-76 or 88 or D4809-95.''
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.485 Test methods and procedures.
* * * * *
(g) * * *
(3) The maximum permitted velocity for air assisted flares shall be
computed using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.016
Where:
Vmax = Maximum permitted velocity, m/sec (ft/sec)
HT = Net heating value of the gas being combusted, MJ/scm
(Btu/scf).
K1 = 8.706 m/sec (metric units)
= 28.56 ft/sec (English units)
K2 = 0.7084 m\4\/(MJ-sec) (metric units)
= 0.087 ft\4\/(Btu-sec) (English units)
(4) The net heating value (HT) of the gas being combusted in a
flare shall be computed using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.017
Where:
K = Conversion constant, 1.740 x 10\7\ (g-mole)(MJ)/ (ppm-scm-kcal)
(metric units)
= 4.674 x 10\8\ [(g-mole)(Btu)/(ppm-scf-kcal)] (English units)
Ci = Concentration of sample component ``i,'' ppm
Hi = net heat of combustion of sample component ``i'' at 25
deg.C and 760 mm Hg (77 deg.F and 14.7 psi), kcal/g-mole
* * * * *
Sec. 60.486 [Amended]
155. In Sec. 60.486, paragraph (c)(8) is amended by revising the
word ``shutdown'' to read ``shutdowns.''
Sec. 60.487 [Amended]
156. In Sec. 60.487, paragraph (d) is amended by revising the words
``An owner or operator electing to comply with the provisions of
Secs. 60.483-1 and 60.483-2'' to read ``An owner or operator electing
to comply with the provisions of Secs. 60.483-1 or 60.483-2.''
Sec. 60.489 [Amended]
157. Amend the table in Sec. 60.489 as follows:
a. Revise the chemical name ``Chlorbenzoyl chloride'' to read
``Chlorobenzoyl chloride;''
b. Revise the chemical name ``Chloronapthalene'' to read
``Chloronaphthalene;''
c. Revise the CAS No. for diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate
to read 124-17-4;
d. Revise the chemical name ``Ethylne carbonate'' to read
``Ethylene carbonate;''
e. Revise the chemical name ``Ethylene glycol monoethy ether'' to
read ``Ethylene glycol monoethyl ether;''
f. Revise the chemical name ``Propional dehyde'' to read
``Propionaldehyde;'' and
g. Revise the chemical name ``Tetrahydronapthalene'' to read
``Tetrahydronaphthalene.''
Sec. 60.491 [Amended]
158. In Sec. 60.491, paragraphs (a)(6) and (b) are amended by
revising the word ``litre'' or ``litres'' to read ``liter'' or
``liters'' wherever it occurs.
Sec. 60.493 [Amended]
159. Amend Sec. 60.493 as follows:
a. Paragraph (b)(1) is amended by revising the words ``Reference
Method'' to read ``Method'' wherever they occur.
b. Paragraph (b)(1)(i)(C) is amended by revising the words
``volume-weighed average'' to read ``volume-weighted average.''
c. In paragraph (b)(1)(i)(C), equation 3 is revised.
d. Paragraph (b)(1)(iii) is amended by revising the words
``weighted average of mass of VOC'' to read ``weighted average mass of
VOC.''
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.493 Performance test and compliance provisions.
* * * * *
(b) * * *
(1) * * *
(i) * * *
(C) * * *
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.018
* * * * *
Sec. 60.494 [Amended]
160. In Sec. 60.494, paragraph (b), the second sentence is amended
by revising the words ``accuracy the greater of 0.75
percent of the temperature being measured expressed in degrees Celsius
or 2.5 deg.C to read ``accuracy of 0.75 percent of the
temperature being measured, expressed in degrees Celsius, or
2.5 deg.C, whichever is greater.''
Sec. 60.495 [Amended]
161. In Sec. 60.495, paragraph (a)(1) is amended by revising the
words ``from data determined using Reference Method 24 or supplies'' to
read ``from data determined using Method 24 or supplied.''
Sec. 60.496 [Amended]
162. Revise Sec. 60.496 as follows:
a. Paragraph (a)(1) is revised.
b. In paragraphs (a)(2), (b), and (c) by revising the words
``Reference Method'' to read ``Method'' wherever they occur.
c. In paragraph (a)(2) by revising the words ``30 days in advance''
to read ``at least 30 days in advance.''
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.496 Test methods and procedures.
(a) * * *
(1) Method 24, an equivalent or alternative method approved by the
Administrator, or manufacturers' formulation data from which the VOC
content of the coatings used for each affected facility can be
calculated. In the event of a dispute, Method 24 data shall govern.
When VOC content of water-borne coatings, determined from data
generated by Method 24, is used to determine compliance of affected
facilities, the results of the Method 24 analysis shall be adjusted as
described in Section 12.6 of Method 24.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.501 [Amended]
163. In Sec. 60.501, the definition of ``Vapor-tight gasoline tank
truck'' is amended by revising the words ``Reference Method'' to read
``Method.''
Sec. 60.531 [Amended]
164. Amend Sec. 60.531 as follows:
[[Page 61764]]
a. Under the definition of ``Coal-only heater'', the alphabetical
designations of paragraphs (a) through (e) are removed and numerical
designations (1) through (5) are added.
b. Under the definition of ``Cookstove'', the alphabetical
designations of paragraphs (a) through (g) are removed and numerical
designations (1) through (7) are added.
c. Under the definition of ``Wood heater'', paragraph (2) is
amended by revising the words ``20 cubic feet'' to read ``0.57 cubic
meters (20 cubic feet).''
d. Under the definition of ``Wood heater'', paragraph (3) is
amended by revising the words ``5 kg/hr'' to read ``5 kg/hr (11 lb/
hr).''
e. Under the definition of ``Wood heater'', paragraph (4) is
amended by revising the words ``800 kg'' to read ``800 kg (1,760 lb).''
Sec. 60.532 [Amended]
165. Amend Sec. 60.532 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words ``4.1 g/hr'' to read
``4.1 g/hr (0.009 lb/hr).''
b. Paragraphs (b)(1)(i), (b)(1)(ii), and (b)(2) are revised.
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.532 Standards for particulate matter.
* * * * *
(b) * * *
(1) * * *
(i) At burn rates less than or equal to 2.82 kg/hr (6.2 lb/hr),
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.019
Where:
BR = Burn rate in kg/hr (lb/hr)
K1 = 3.55 g/kg (0.00355 lb/lb)
K2 = 4.98 g/hr (0.0.011 lb/hr)
(ii) At burn rates greater than 2.82 kg/hr (6.2 lb/hr), C = 15 g/hr
(0.033 lb/hr).
(2) An affected facility not equipped with a catalytic combustor
shall not discharge into the atmosphere any gases which contain
particulate matter in excess of a weighted average of 7.5 g/hr (0.017
lb/hr). Particulate emissions shall not exceed 15 g/hr (0.033 lb/hr)
during any test run at a burn rate less than or equal to 1.5 kg/hr (3.3
lb/hr) that is required to be used in the weighted average and
particulate emissions shall not exceed 18 g/hr (0.040 lb/hr) during any
test run at a burn rate greater than 1.5 kg/hr (3.3 lb/hr) that is
required to be used in the weighted average.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.533 [Amended]
166. Amend Sec. 60.533 as follows:
a. In paragraph (k)(1), the third sentence is amended by revising
the words ``The grant of such a waiver'' to read ``The granting of such
a waiver.''
b. Paragraph (k)(2) is amended by revising the words ``
\1/4\ inch'' to read `` 0.64 cm ( \1/4\
inch).''
c. In paragraph (o)(4), the first sentence is amended by revising
the word ``indicate'' to read ``indicates.''
d. In paragraph (o)(4), the first sentence is amended by revising
the words ``comply with applicable emission limit'' to read ``comply
with the applicable emission limit.''
e. In paragraph (p)(4)(ii)(A), the second sentence is amended by
revising the words `` 1 gram per hour'' to read
`` 1 gram per hour ( 0.0022 lb per hour).''
Sec. 60.535 [Amended]
167. In Sec. 60.535, paragraph (b)(9) is amended by revising the
words ``a reporting and recordkeeping requirements'' to read
``reporting and recordkeeping requirements.''
Sec. 60.536 [Amended]
168. Amend Sec. 60.536 as follows:
a. Paragraph (a)(3)(ii) and the equation in (i)(4)(ii) are revised.
b. Paragraph (j)(2)(v) is amended by revising the words ``five
inches by seven inches'' to read ``12.7 centimeters by 17.8 centimeters
(5 inches by 7 inches).''
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.536 Permanent label, temporary label, and owner's manual.
(a) * * *
(3) * * *
(ii) Be at least 8.9 cm long and 5.1 cm wide (3\1/2\ inches long
and 2 inches wide).
* * * * *
(i) * * *
(4) * * *
(ii) * * *
HOE = Hv x (Estimated overall efficiency/100)
x BR
Where:
HOE = Estimated heat output in Btu/hr
Hv = Heating value of fuel, 19,140 Btu/kg (8,700 Btu/lb)
BR = Burn rate of dry test fuel per hour, kg (lb)
* * * * *
Sec. 60.541 [Amended]
169. Amend Sec. 60.541 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b), the definitions of the terms ``Dc''
and ``Dr'' are amended by revising the words ``(grams per
liter)'' to read ``(grams per liter (lb per gallon)).''
b. In paragraph (b), the definitions of the terms ``G'' and ``N''
are amended by revising the words ``(grams per tire)'' to read ``(grams
(lb) per tire).''
c. In paragraph (b), the definitions of the terms ``Gb''
and ``Nb'' are amended by revising the words ``(grams per
bead)'' to read ``(grams (lb) per bead).''
d. In paragraph (b), the definitions of the terms ``Lc''
and ``Lr'' are amended by revising the word ``(liters)'' to
read ``(liters (gallons)).''
e. In paragraph (b), the definitions of the terms ``M'',
``Mo'', and ``Mr'' are amended by revising the
word ``(grams)'' to read ``(grams (lb)).''
f. In paragraph (b), the definitions of the terms
``Qa'', ``Qb'', and ``Qf'' are amended
by revising the words ``(dry standard cubic meters per hour)'' to read
``(dry standard cubic meters (dry standard cubic feet) per hour).''
Sec. 60.542 [Amended]
170. Amend Sec. 60.542 as follows:
a. Paragraphs (a)(1)(ii)(A) through (E), (a)(2)(ii)(A) through (E),
(a)(6)(ii)(A) through (E), (a)(8)(ii)(A) through (E), and (a)(9)(ii)(A)
through (E) are revised.
b. In paragraph (a)(3) by revising the words ``no more than 10
grams of VOC per tire (g/tire)'' to read ``no more than 10 grams (0.022
lb) of VOC per tire.''
c. In paragraph (a)(4) by revising the words ``no more than 5 grams
of VOC per bead (g/bead)'' to read ``no more than 5 grams (0.011 lb) of
VOC per bead.''
d. In paragraph (a)(5)(i) by revising the words ``1.2 grams of VOC
per tire'' to read ``1.2 grams (0.0026 lb) of VOC per tire.''
e. In paragraph (a)(5)(ii) by revising the words ``9.3 grams of VOC
per tire'' to read ``9.3 grams (0.021 lb) of VOC per tire.''
f. In paragraph (a)(7)(i) by revising the words ``1.2 grams of VOC
per tire'' to read ``1.2 grams (0.0026 lb) of VOC per tire.''
g. In paragraph (a)(7)(ii) by revising the words ``9.3 grams of VOC
per tire'' to read ``9.3 grams (0.021 lb) of VOC per tire.''
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.542 Standards for volatile organic compounds.
(a) * * *
(1) * * *
(ii) * * *
(A) 3,870 kg (8,531 lb) of VOC per 28 days,
(B) 4,010 kg (8,846 lb) of VOC per 29 days,
(C) 4,150 kg (9,149 lb) of VOC per 30 days,
(D) 4,280 kg (9,436 lb) of VOC per 31 days, or
(E) 4,840 kg (10,670 lb) of VOC per 35 days.
* * * * *
(2) * * *
[[Page 61765]]
(ii) * * *
(A) 3,220 kg (7,099 lb) of VOC per 28 days,
(B) 3,340 kg (7,363 lb) of VOC per 29 days,
(C) 3,450 kg (7,606 lb) of VOC per 30 days,
(D) 3,570 kg (7,870 lb) of VOC per 31 days, or
(E) 4,030 kg (8,885 lb) of VOC per 35 days.
* * * * *
(6) * * *
(ii) * * *
(A) 3,220 kg (7,099 lb) of VOC per 28 days,
(B) 3,340 kg (7,363 lb) of VOC per 29 days,
(C) 3,450 kg (7,606 lb) of VOC per 30 days,
(D) 3,570 kg (7,870 lb) of VOC per 31 days, or
(E) 4,030 kg (8,885 lb) of VOC per 35 days.
* * * * *
(8) * * *
(ii) * * *
(A) 1,570 kg (3,461 lb) of VOC per 28 days,
(B) 1,630 kg (3,593 lb) of VOC per 29 days,
(C) 1,690 kg (3,726 lb) of VOC per 30 days,
(D) 1,740 kg (3,836 lb) of VOC per 31 days, or
(E) 1,970 kg (4,343 lb) of VOC per 35 days.
* * * * *
(9) * * *
(ii) * * *
(A) 1,310 kg (2,888 lb) of VOC per 28 days,
(B) 1,360 kg (2,998 lb) of VOC per 29 days,
(C) 1,400 kg (3,086 lb) of VOC per 30 days,
(D) 1,450 kg (3,197 lb) of VOC per 31 days, or
(E) 1,640 kg (3,616 lb) of VOC per 35 days.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.542a [Amended]
171. In Sec. 60.542a, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the
words ``25 grams'' to read ``25 grams (0.055 lb)'' wherever they occur.
Sec. 60.543 [Amended]
172. Amend Sec. 60.543 as follows:
a. In paragraph (c), the first sentence is amended by deleting the
abbreviation ``(kg/mo).''
b. Paragraph (d) is amended by revising the words ``the g/tire
limit'' to read ``the VOC emission per tire limit.''
c. Paragraph (e) is amended by revising the words ``g/bead limit''
to read ``VOC emission per bead limit.''
d. Paragraph (f) is amended by revising the words ``operation that
use'' to read ``operation that uses.''
e. Paragraphs (f)(2)(iv)(G) and (f)(2)(iv)(H) are amended by
revising the definitions of the terms ``W'', ``V'', ``Qi'',
and ``Mi'' following the equations as follows:
W = Molecular weight of the single VOC, mg/mg-mole (lb/lb-mole).
V = The volume occupied by one mole of ideal gas at standard conditions
[20 deg.C, 760 mm Hg] on a wet basis, 2.405 x 10-5
m3/mg-mole (385.3 ft3/lb-mole).
Qi = Volumetric flow in the capture system during run i, on
a wet basis, adjusted to standard conditions, m3
(ft3) (see Sec. 60.547(a)(5)).
Mi = Mass of the single VOC used during run i, mg (lb).
f. Paragraphs (g) and (i) are amended by revising the words
``operation that use'' to read ``operation that uses'' wherever they
occur.
g. Paragraphs (j)(4) and (j)(5)(ii) are amended by revising the
words ``100 feet per minute'' to read ``30.5 meters (100 feet) per
minute'' wherever they occur.
h. Paragraphs (n) and (n)(5) are amended by revising the words ``25
g/tire limit'' to read ``VOC emission per tire limit'' wherever they
occur.
Sec. 60.544 [Amended]
173. In Sec. 60.544, paragraph (a)(2) is amended by revising the
word ``temperatrue'' to read ``temperature.''
Sec. 60.545 [Amended]
174. Amend Sec. 60.545 as follows:
a. Paragraph (b) is amended by revising the words ``28 deg.C'' to
read ``28 deg.C (50 deg.F).''
b. Paragraph (d) is amended by revising the words ``specified kg/mo
uncontrolled VOC use'' to read ``specified VOC monthly usage.''
c. Paragraph (f) is amended by revising the citation
``Sec. 60.543(B)(4)'' to read ``Sec. 60.543(b)(4).''
Sec. 60.546 [Amended]
175. Amend Sec. 60.546 as follows:
a. Paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words ``green tires
spraying operation where organic solvent-based spray are used'' to read
``green tire spraying operation where organic solvent-based sprays are
used.''
b. Paragraph (c)(1) is amended by revising the words ``kg/mo
uncontrolled VOC use'' to read ``VOC monthly usage.''
c. Paragraph (c)(1) is amended by revising the words ``the number
days'' to read ``the number of days.''
d. Paragraphs (c)(2), (c)(3), and (c)(5) are amended by revising
the words ``g/tire or g/bead limit'' to read ``VOC emission limit per
tire or per bead'' wherever they occur.
e. In paragraph (d), the second sentence is amended by revising the
words ``(kg/hr)'' to read ``(kg/hr or lb/hr).''
f. Paragraph (f)(1) is amended by revising the words ``g/tire or g/
bead limit'' to read ``VOC emission limit per tire or per bead.''
g. Paragraph (f)(2) is amended by revising the words ``kg/mo VOC
use'' to read ``monthly VOC usage.''
h. In paragraph (j), the second sentence is amended by revising the
words ``shall be reported within 30 days'' to read ``shall be reported
within 30 days of the change.''
Sec. 60.547 [Amended]
176. Amend Sec. 60.547 as follows:
a. Paragraphs (a)(2) and (a)(5) are amended by revising the words
``notify the Administrator 30 days in advance'' to read ``notify the
Administrator at least 30 days in advance'' wherever they occur.
b. Paragraphs (a)(2) and (a)(5) are amended by revising the words
``1 meter'' to read ``1.0 meter (3.3 feet)'' wherever they occur.
c. Paragraphs (a)(2) and (a)(5)(i) are amended by revising the
words ``0.003 dry standard cubic meter'' to read ``0.003 dry standard
cubic meter (dscm) (0.11 dry standard cubic feet (dscf))'' wherever
they occur.
Sec. 60.560 [Amended]
177. Amend Sec. 60.560 as follows:
a. Paragraph (a)(4)(i) is amended by revising the words ``1,000 Mg/
yr'' to read ``1,000 Mg/yr (1,102 ton/yr).''
b. In paragraph (b), Table 1 is revised to read as follows:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Emissions
Polymer Production process(es) Process section ---------------------------------
Continuous Intermittent
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Polypropylene................ Liquid Phase............ Raw Materials X ...............
Preparation.
Polymerization X ...............
Reaction.
[[Page 61766]]
Material Recovery.... X X
Product Finishing.... X ...............
Product Storage...... ............... ...............
Polypropylene................ Gas Phase............... Raw Materials ............... ...............
Preparation.
Polymerization ............... X
Reaction.
Material Recovery.... X ...............
Product Finishing.... ............... ...............
Product Storage...... ............... ...............
Low Density Polyethylene..... High Pressure........... Raw Materials ............... X
Preparation.
Polymerization ............... X
Reaction.
Material Recovery.... ............... X
Product Finishing.... ............... X
Product Storage...... ............... X
Low Density Polyethylene..... Low Pressure............ Raw Materials X X
Preparation.
High Density Polyethylene.... Gas Phase............... Polymerization ............... X
Reaction.
Material Recovery.... ............... ...............
Product Finishing.... X ...............
Product Storage...... ............... ...............
High Density Polyethylene.... Liquid Phase Slurry..... Raw Materials ............... X
Preparation.
Polymerization ............... ...............
Reaction.
Material Recovery.... X ...............
Product Finishing.... X ...............
Product Storage...... ............... ...............
High Density Polyethylene.... Liquid Phase Solution... Raw Materials X X
Preparation.
Polymerization ............... X
Reaction.
Material Recovery.... X X
Product Finishing.... ............... ...............
Product Storage...... ............... ...............
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
c. In paragraph (d), Table 2 is revised.
d. Paragraph (g) is amended by revising the words ``1.6 Mg/yr'' to
read ``1.6 Mg/yr (1.76 ton/yr)'' wherever they occur.
The revision reads as follows:
Sec. 60.560 Applicability and designation of affected facilities.
* * * * * * *
(d) * * *
Table 2.--Maximum Uncontrolled Threshold Emission Rates a
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Uncontrolled
emission rate, kg
Production process Process section TOC/Mg product
(See associated
footnote)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Polypropylene, liquid phase Raw Materials 0.15 b
process. Preparation.
Polymerization 0.14 b, 0.24 c
Reaction.
Material Recovery.... 0.19 b
Product Finishing.... 1.57 b
Polypropylene, gas phase Polymerization 0.12 c
process. Reaction.
Material Recovery.... 0.02 b
Low Density Polyethylene, low Raw Materials 0.41 d
pressure process. Preparation.
Polymerization (e)
Reaction.
Material Recovery.... (e)
Product Finishing.... (e)
Product Storage...... (e)
Low Density Polythylene, low Raw Materials 0.05 f
pressure process. Preparation.
Polymerization 0.03 g
Reaction.
Product Finishing.... 0.01 b
High Density Polyethylene, Raw Materials 0.25 c
liquid phase slurry process. Preparation.
Material Recovery.... 0.11 b
Product Finishing.... 0.41 b
High Density Polyethylene, Raw Materials 0.24 f
liquid phase solution process. Preparation.
Polymerization 0.16 c
Reaction.
Material Recovery.... 1.68 f
High Density Polyethylene, gas Raw Materials 0.05 f
phase process. Preparation.
Polymerization 0.03 g
Reaction.
[[Page 61767]]
Product Finishing.... 0.01 b
Polystyrene, continuous Material Recovery.... 0.05 b, h
process.
Poly(ethylene terephalate), Material Recovery.... 0.12 b h
dimethyl terephthalate
process.
Polymerization 1.80 h i j,
Reaction.
Poly(ethlyene terephthalate), Raw Materials (l)
terephthalic acid process. Preparation.
Polymerization 1.80 h j m
Reaction.
3.92 h k m
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a ``Uncontrolled emission rate'' refers to the emission rate of a vent
stream that vents directly to the atmosphere and to the emission rate
of a vent stream to the atmosphere that would occur in the absence of
any add-on control devices but after any material recovery devices
that constitute part of the normal material recovery operations in a
process line where potential emissions are recovered for recycle or
resale.
b Emission rate applies to continuous emissions only.
c Emission rate applies to intermittent emissions only.
d Total emission rate for non-emergency intermittent emissions from raw
materials preparation, polymerization reaction, material recovery,
product finishing, and product storage process sections.
e See footnote d.
f Emission rate applies to both continuous and intermittent emissions.
g Emission rate applies to non-emergency intermittent emissions only.
h Applies to modified or reconstructed affected facilities only.
i Includes emissions from the cooling water tower.
j Applies to a process line producing low viscosity poly(ethylene
terephthlalate).
k Applies to a process line producing high viscosity poly(ethylene
terephathalate).
l See footnote m.
m Applies to the sum of emissions to the atmosphere from the
polymerization reaction section (including emissions from the cooling
tower) and the raw materials preparation section (i.e., the
esterifiers).
* * * * *
Sec. 60.561 [Amended]
178. Amend Sec. 60.561 as follows:
a. The definition of ``End finisher'' is amended as revising the
words ``2 torr'' in the first sentence to read ``2 mm Hg (1 in.
H2O)''; and by revising the words ``between 5 and 10 torr''
in the second sentence to read ``between 5 and 10 mm Hg (3 and 5 in.
H2O).''
b. The definition of ``High density polyethylene (HDPE)'' is
amended by revising the words ``0.940 g/cm\3\'' to read ``0.940 gm/
cm\3\3 (58.7 lb/ft\3\).''
c. The definition of ``High pressure process'' is amended by
revising the words ``15,000 psig'' to read ``15,000 psig (103,000 kPa
gauge).''
d. The definition of ``Low density polyethylene (LDPE)'' is amended
by revising the words ``0.940 g/cm\3\'' to read ``0.940 g/cm\3\ (58.7
lb/ft\3\).''
e. The definition of ``Low pressure process'' is amended by
revising the words ``300 psig'' to read ``300 psig (2,070 kPa gauge).''
Sec. 60.562-1 [Amended]
179. Amend Sec. 60.562-1 as follows:
a. In paragraph (a)(1)(iii), the second sentence is amended by
revising the words ``18.2 Mg/yr'' to read ``18.2 Mg/yr (20.1 ton/yr).''
b. Paragraph (b)(1)(i) is amended by revising the words ``0.0036 kg
TOC/Mg'' to read ``0.0036 kg TOC/Mg (0.0072 lb TOC/ton).''
c. Paragraph (c)(1)(i)(A) is amended by revising the words ``0.018
kg TOC/Mg'' to read ``0.018 kg TOC/Mg (0.036 lb TOC/ton).''
d. Paragraph (c)(1)(ii)(A) is amended by revising the words ``0.02
kg TOC/Mg'' to read ``0.02 kg TOC/Mg (0.04 lb TOC/ton).''
e. Paragraph (c)(1)(ii)(C) is amended by inserting a comma after
the word ``weight''.
f. Paragraph (c)(2)(i) is amended by revising the words ``0.04 kg
TOC/Mg'' to read ``0.04 kg TOC/Mg (0.08 lb TOC/ton).''
g. Paragraph (c)(2)(ii)(A) is amended by revising the words ``0.02
kg TOC/Mg'' to read ``0.02 kg TOC/Mg (0.04 lb TOC/ton).''
h. Paragraph (c)(2)(ii)(C) is amended by inserting a comma after
the word ``weight''.
Sec. 60.562-2 [Amended]
180. In Sec. 60.562-2, paragraph (d) is amended by revising the
words ``150 deg.C as determined by ASTM Method D86-78'' to read ``150
deg.C (302 deg.F) as determined by ASTM Method D86-78, 82, 90, 95, or
96.''
Sec. 60.564 [Amended]
181. Amend Sec. 60.564 as follows:
a. In paragraph (c)(1), the definitions of the terms
``Einlet'' and ``Eoutlet'' are amended by
revising the words ``kg TOC/hr'' to read ``kg TOC/hr (lb TOC/hr)''
wherever they occur.
b. In Paragraphs (d)(1), (f) introductory text, and (j)(1)(iv), the
equations and definitions are revised; and paragraphs (g)(2) and (g)(3)
are revised.
c. Paragraph (f)(1) is amended by revising ``ASTM D1946-77'' to
read ``ASTM D1946-77 or 90 (Reapproved 1994).''
d. Paragraph (f)(3) is amended by revising ``ASTM D2382-76'' to
read ``ASTM D2382-76 or 88 or D4809-95.''
e. In paragraph (h) designate the second paragraph as (h)(1),
redesignate existing paragraphs (h)(1) and (h)(2) as paragraphs (h)(2)
and (h)(3) and revise the equations and definitions in newly
redesignated paragraph (h)(1).
f. Paragraph (h)(3) is amended by revising the words ``The rate of
polymer produced, Pp (kg/hr), shall be determined by
dividing the weight of polymer pulled in kilograms (kg) from the
process line during the performance test by the number of hours (hr)
taken to perform the performance test. The polymer pulled, in
kilograms, shall'' to read ``The rate of polymer production,
Pp, shall be determined by dividing the weight of polymer
pulled (in kg (lb)) from the process line during the performance test
by the number of hours taken to perform the performance test. The
weight of polymer pulled shall.''
g. Paragraph (j)(1) introductory text is amended by revising ``ASTM
D2908-74'' to read ``ASTM D2908-74 or 91.''
[[Page 61768]]
h. Paragraph (j)(1)(i) is amended by revising ``ASTM D3370-76'' to
read ``ASTM D3370-76 or 96a.''
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.564 Test methods and procedures.
* * * * *
(d) * * *
(1)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.020
Where:
Eunc = uncontrolled annual emissions, Mg/yr (ton/yr)
Cj = concentration of sample component j of the gas stream,
dry basis, ppmv
Mj = molecular weight of sample component j of the gas
stream, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole)
Q = flow rate of the gas stream, dscm/hr (dscf/hr)
K2 = 4.157 x 10-11 [(Mg)(g-mole)]/
[(g)(ppm)(dscm)] (metric units)
= 1.298 x 10-12 [(ton)(lb-mole)]/[(lb)(ppm)(dscf)]
(English units)
8,600 = operating hours per year
* * * * *
(f) * * *
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.021
Where:
HT = Vent stream net heating value, MJ/scm (Btu/scf), where
the net enthalpy per mole of offgas is based on combustion at 25 deg.C
and 760 mm Hg (68 deg.F and 30 in. Hg), but the standard temperature
for determining the volume corresponding to one mole is 20 deg.C (68
deg.F).
K3 = 1.74 x 10-7 (1/ppm)(g-mole/scm)(MJ/kcal)
(metric units), where standard temperature for (g-mole/scm) is
20 deg.C.
= 4.67 x 10-6 (1/ppm)(lb-mole/scf)(Btu/kcal) (English
units) where standard temperature for (lb/mole/scf) is 68 deg.F.
Cj = Concentration on a wet basis of compound j in ppm.
Hj = Net heat of combustion of compound j, kcal/(g-mole)
(kcal/(lb-mole)), based on combustion at 25 deg.C and 760 mm Hg (77
deg.F and 30 in. Hg).
* * * * *
(g) * * *
(2) If applicable, the maximum permitted velocity (Vmax)
for steam-assisted and nonassisted flares shall be computed using the
following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.022
Where:
Vmax = Maximum permitted velocity, m/sec (ft/sec)
K4 = 28.8 (metric units), 1212 (English units)
K5 = 31.7 (metric units), 850.8 (English units)
HT = The net heating value as determined in paragraph (f) of
this section, MJ/scm (Btu/scf).
(3) The maximum permitted velocity, Vmax, for air-
assisted flares shall be determined by the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.023
Where:
Vmax = Maximum permitted velocity, m/sec (ft/sec).
K6 = 8.706 m/sec (metric units)
= 28.56 ft/sec (English units)
K7 = 0.7084 [(m/sec)/MJ/scm)] (metric units)
= 0.00245 [(ft/sec)/Btu/scf)] (English units)
HT = The net heating value as determined in paragraph (f) of
this section, MJ/scm (Btu/scf).
* * * * *
(h) * * *
(i) * * *
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.024
Where:
ERTOC = Emission rate of total organic compounds (minus
methane and ethane), kg TOC/Mg (lb TOC/ton) product
ETOC = Emission rate of total organic compounds (minus
methane and ethane) in the sample, kg/hr (lb/hr)
Pp = The rate of polymer production, kg/hr (lb/hr)
K5 = 1,000 kg/Mg (metric units)
= 2,000 lb/ton (English units)
* * * * *
(j) * * *
(1) * * *
(iv) * * *
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.025
Where:
Xi = daily ethylene glycol concentration for each day used
to calculate the 14-day rolling average used in test results to justify
implementing the reduced testing program.
n = number of ethylene glycol concentrations.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.565 [Amended]
182. Amend Sec. 60.565 as follows:
a. In paragraph (a)(1)(ii), the first sentence is amended by
revising the words ``kilograms TOC (minus methane and ethane) per
megagram of product'' to read ``kg TOC (minus methane and ethane) per
Mg (lb TOC/ton) of product.''
b. In paragraph (a)(2)(ii) by revising the word ``boiler'' to read
``boilers.''
c. In paragraph (f)(1)(i) by removing the words ``are exceeded.''
Sec. 60.581 [Amended]
183. Amend Sec. 60.581 as follows:
a. In paragraph (a), the definition of the term ``ink solids'' is
amended by revising the words ``Reference Method'' to read ``Method.''
b. In paragraph (b), the definitions of the terms
``Woi'', ``Wsi'', and ``Woj'' are
amended by revising the words ``Reference Method'' to read ``Method''
wherever they occur.
Sec. 60.583 [Amended]
184. Amend Sec. 60.583 as follows:
a. In paragraph (a) introductory text by revising the words
``Reference Methods'' to read ``Methods.''
b. In paragraphs (a)(1), (b)(4), (b)(5), (c)(2), (c)(3), and (c)(4)
by revising the words ``Reference Method'' to read ``Method'' wherever
they occur.
Sec. 60.584 [Amended]
185. Amend Sec. 60.584 as follows:
a. In paragraphs (b)(1) and (c)(1) by revising the words ``of
0.75 percent of the temperature being measured or
2.5 deg. C'' to read ``of 0.75 percent of the
temperature being measured, expressed in degrees Celsius, or
2.5 deg. C.''
b. In paragraph (b)(2) by revising the words ``more than 28 deg.
C'' to read ``more than 28 deg. C (50 deg. F).''
Sec. 60.593 [Amended]
186. Amend Sec. 60.593 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(2) by revising ``ASTM E-260, E-168, or E-169''
to read ``ASTM E260-73, 91, or 96, E168-67, 77, or 92, or E169-63, 77,
or 93.''
b. In paragraph (d) by revising ``ASTM Method D86'' to read ``ASTM
Method D86-78, 82, 90, 95, or 96.''
Sec. 60.600 [Amended]
187. In Sec. 60.600, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words
``500 megagrams'' to read ``500 Mg (551 ton).''
Sec. 60.602 [Amended]
188. Amend Sec. 60.602 as follows:
a. By removing the paragraph designation ``(a)''.
b. In the first sentence, by revising the words ``10 kilograms (kg)
VOC per megagram (Mg)'' to read ``10 kg/Mg (20 lb/ton).''
[[Page 61769]]
c. In the second sentence, by revising the words ``10 kg VOC per
Mg'' to read ``10 kg/Mg (20 lb/ton).''
d. In the third sentence by revising the words ``17 kg VOC per Mg''
to read ``17 kg/Mg (34 lb/ton).''
Sec. 60.603 [Amended]
189. Amend Sec. 60.603 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b) introductory text, the first sentence is
amended by revising the words ``VOC emissions per Mg solvent feed'' to
read ``VOC emissions per unit mass solvent feed.''
b. In paragraph (b)(2) by revising the second equation and by
revising the definitions following the equations.
c. Paragraph (b)(2)(i) is redesignated as paragraph (b)(3), and
newly redesignated paragraph (b)(3) is amended by revising the words
``13 kg per Mg solvent feed'' to read ``13 kg/Mg (26 lb/ton) solvent
feed.''
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.603 Performance test and compliance provisions.
* * * * *
(b) * * *
(2) * * *
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.026
E = VOC Emissions, in kg/Mg (lb/ton) solvent;
SV = Measured or calculated volume of solvent feed, in
liters (gallons);
SW = Weight of solvent feed, in Mg (ton);
MV = Measured volume of makeup solvent, in liters (gallons);
MW = Weight of makeup, in kg (lb);
N = Allowance for nongaseous losses, 13 kg/Mg (26 lb/ton) solvent feed;
SP = Fraction of measured volume that is actual solvent
(excludes water);
D = Density of the solvent, in kg/liter (lb/gallon);
K = Conversion factor, 1,000 kg/Mg (2,000 lb/ton);
I = Allowance for solvent inventory variation or changes in the amount
of solvent contained in the affected facility, in kg/Mg (lb/ton)
solvent feed (may be positive or negative);
IS = Amount of solvent contained in the affected facility at
the beginning of the test period, as determined by the owner or
operator, in kg (lb);
IE = Amount of solvent contained in the affected facility at
the close of the test period, as determined by the owner or operator,
in kg (lb).
* * * * *
Sec. 60.604 [Amended]
190. In Sec. 60.604, paragraph (b) is amended by revising the words
``500 megagrams'' to read ``500 Mg (551 ton)'' wherever they occur.
Sec. 60.613 [Amended]
191. Amend Sec. 60.613 as follows:
a. In paragraph (c) introductory text by revising the words ``in
the following equipment'' to read ``the following equipment.''
b. Paragraphs (d) and (e) are redesignated as (e) and (f).
c. Paragraph (c)(3) is redesignated as paragraph (d).
Sec. 60.614 [Amended]
192. Amend Sec. 60.614 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(4)(ii), the definitions of the terms
``Ei'' and ``Eo'' are amended by revising the
term ``kg TOC/hr'' to read ``kg/hr (lb/hr).''
b. In paragraph (b)(4)(iii), the definition of the terms
``Qi, Qo'' is amended by revising the units
``dscf/hr'' to read ``dscf/min.''
c. In paragraph (b)(4)(iii), the definition of the term
``K2'' is revised.
d. Paragraphs (b)(5), (c), (d), (e), and (f) are redesignated as
paragraphs (c), (d), (e), (f), and (g), respectively.
e. In newly redesignated paragraph (e)(1)(i), the second sentence
is amended by revising ``Sec. 60.614(d)(2) and (3)'' to read
``Sec. 60.614(e)(2) and (3)'' and by revising the section reference
``(d)(1)(ii)'' to read ``(e)(1)(ii).''
f. In newly redesignated paragraph (e)(1)(i), the last sentence is
amended by revising the words ``4 inches'' to read ``10 centimeters (4
inches).''
g. In newly redesignated paragraph (e)(1)(ii)(C), the second
sentence is amended by revising ``Sec. 60.614(d)(4) and (5)'' to read
``Sec. 60.614(e)(4) and (5).''
h. Newly redesignated paragraph (e)(2)(ii) is amended by revising
``ASTM D1946-77'' to read ``D1946-77, or 90 (Reapproved 1994).''
i. In newly redesignated paragraphs (e)(4) and (e)(5), the
definitions of the equation terms are revised.
j. Newly redesignated paragraphs (f)(1)(i), including Table 1, and
(f)(1)(ii) are revised.
k. In newly redesignated paragraph (f)(2) the definitions of the
equation terms and Table 2 are revised.
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.614 Test methods and procedures.
* * * * *
(b) * * *
(4) * * *
(iii) * * *
K2 = 2.494 x 10-6 (1/ppm)(g-mole/scm)(kg/
g)(min/hr) (metric units), where standard temperature for (g-mole/scm)
is 20 deg.C.
= 1.557 x 10-7 (1/ppm)(lb-mole/scf)(min/hr) (English
units), where standard temperature for (lb-mole/scf) is 68 deg.F.
* * * * *
(e) * * *
(4) * * *
HT = Net heating value of the sample, MJ/scm (Btu/scf),
where the net enthalpy per mole of vent stream is based on combustion
at 25 deg.C and 760 mm Hg (77 deg.F and 30 in. Hg), but the standard
temperature for determining the volume corresponding to one mole is
20 deg.C (68 deg.F).
K1 = 1.74 x 10-7 (1/ppm)(g-mole/scm)(MJ/kcal)
(metric units), where standard temperature for (g-mole/scm) is
20 deg.C.
= 1.03 x 10-11 (1/ppm)(lb-mole/scf)(Btu/kcal) (English
units) where standard temperature for (lb/mole/scf) is 68 deg.F.
Cj = Concentration on a wet basis of compound j in ppm, as
measured for organics by Method 18 and measured for hydrogen and carbon
monoxide by ASTM D1946-77, 90, or 94 (incorporation by reference as
specified in Sec. 60.17 of this part) as indicated in
Sec. 60.614(e)(2).
Hj = Net heat of combustion of compound j, kcal/(g-mole)
[kcal/(lb-mole)], based on combustion at 25 deg.C and 760 mm Hg (77
deg.F and 30 in. Hg).
(5) * * *
ETOC = Measured emission rate of TOC, kg/hr (lb/hr).
K2 = 2.494 x 10-6 (1/ppm)(g-mole/scm)(kg/
g)(min/hr) (metric units), where standard temperature for (g-mole/scm)
is 20 deg.C.
= 1.557 x 10-7 (1/ppm)(lb-mole/scf)(min/hr) (English
units), where standard temperature for (lb-mole/scf) is 68 deg.F.
Cj = Concentration on a wet basis of compound j in ppm, as
measured by Method 18 as indicated in Sec. 60.614(e)(2).
Mj = Molecular weight of sample j, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
Qs = Vent stream flow rate, scm/hr (scf/hr), at a
temperature of 20 deg.C (68 deg.F).
* * * * *
(f) * * *
(1) * * *
(i) Where for a vent stream flow rate that is greater than or equal
to 14.2 scm/min (501 scf/min) at a standard temperature of 20 deg.C
(68 deg.F):
TRE = TRE index value.
Qs = Vent stream flow rate, scm/min (scf/min), at a
temperature of 20 deg.C (68 deg.F).
HT = Vent stream net heating value, MJ/scm (Btu/scf), where
the net enthalpy per mole of vent stream is
[[Page 61770]]
based on combustion at 25 deg.C and 760 mm Hg (68 deg.F and 30 in. Hg),
but the standard temperature for determining the volume corresponding
to one mole is 20 deg.C (68 deg.F) as in the definition of
Qs.
Ys = Qs for all vent stream categories listed in
Table 1 except for Category E vent streams where Ys =
QsHT/3.6.
ETOC = Hourly emissions of TOC, kg/hr (lb/hr). a, b, c,
d, e, and f are coefficients.
The set of coefficients which apply to a vent stream shall be
obtained from Table 1.
BILLING CODE 6560-50-P
[[Page 61771]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.027
[[Page 61772]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.028
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.029
BILLING CODE 6560-50-C
[[Page 61773]]
(ii) Where for a vent stream flow rate that is less than 14.2 scm/
min (501 scf/min) at a standard temperature of 20 deg.C (68 deg.F):
TRE = TRE index value.
Qs = 14.2 scm/min (501 scf/min).
HT = (FLOW)(HVAL)/Qs.
Where the following inputs are used:
FLOW = Vent stream flow rate, scm/min (scf/min), at a temperature of 20
deg.C (68 deg.F).
HVAL = Vent stream net heating value, MJ/scm (Btu/scf), where the net
enthalpy per mole of vent stream is based on combustion at 25 deg.C
and 760 mm Hg (68 deg.F and 30 in. Hg), but the standard temperature
for determining the volume corresponding to one mole is 20 deg.C (68
deg.F) as in the definition of Qs.
Ys = Qs for all vent stream categories listed in
Table 1 except for Category E vent streams where Ys =
QsHT/3.6.
ETOC = Hourly emissions of TOC, kg/hr (lb/hr).
a, b, c, d, e, and f are coefficients.
The set of coefficients that apply to a vent stream can be obtained
from Table 1.
(2) * * *
TRE = TRE index value.
ETOC = Hourly emissions of TOC, kg/hr (lb/hr).
Qs = Vent stream flow rate, scm/min (scf/min), at a standard
temperature of 20 deg.C (68 deg.F).
HT = Vent stream net heating value, MJ/scm (Btu/scf), where
the net enthalpy per mole of vent stream is based on combustion at 25
deg.C and 760 mm Hg (68 deg.F and 30 in. Hg), but the standard
temperature for determining the volume corresponding to one mole is 20
deg.C (68 deg.F) as in the definition of Qs.
a, b, c, d, and e are coefficients.
* * * * *
Table 2.--Air Oxidation Processes NSPS TRE Coefficients for Vent Streams Controlled by a Flare
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a b c d e
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HT 11.2 MJ/scm.......................... 2.25 0.288 -0.193 (-0.0051 2.08
(HT 301 Btu/scf)........................ (0.140) (0.0367) (-0.000448) (-0.0051) (4.59)
HT 11.2 MJ/scm............... 0.309 0.0619 -0.0043 -0.0034 2.08
HT 301 Btu/scf).............. (0.0193) (0.00788) (-0.000010) (-0.0034) (4.59)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* * * * *
Sec. 60.615 [Amended]
193. Amend Sec. 60.615 as follows:
a. In paragraph (e), the first sentence is amended by revising the
words ``44 MW'' to read ``44 MW (150 million Btu/hour).''
b. In paragraph (g), the first sentence is amended by revising
``Sec. 60.613(c)'' to read ``Sec. 60.613(e).''
Sec. 60.620 [Amended]
194. In Sec. 60.620, paragraph (b), the second sentence is amended
by revising the words ``4,700 gallons'' to read ``17,791 liters (4,700
gallons).''
Sec. 60.624 [Amended]
195. In Sec. 60.624, the third sentence is amended by revising the
words ``is from the outlet'' to read ``is the outlet.''
Sec. 60.632 [Amended]
196. Amend Sec. 60.632 as follows:
a. In paragraph (f), the second sentence is amended by revising the
words ``percent VOC content'' to read ``VOC content.''
b. Paragraph (f) is amended by revising ``ASTM Methods E169, E168,
or E260'' to read ``ASTM E169-63, 77, or 93, E168-67, 77, or 92, or
E260-73, 91, or 96.''
Sec. 60.633 [Amended]
197. Amend Sec. 60.633 as follows:
a. Paragraph (b)(4)(i) is amended by revising ``Sec. 60.482-
(b)(1)'' to read ``Sec. 60.482-4(b)(1).''
b. Paragraph (d) is amended by revising the words ``283,000
standard cubic meters per day (scmd) (10 million standard cubic feet
per day (scfd))'' to read ``283,200 standard cubic meters per day (10
million standard cubic feet per day).''
c. Paragraphs (h)(1) and (2) are amended by revising the words ``at
150 deg.C'' to read ``at 150 deg.C (302 deg.F).''
d. Paragraphs (h)(1) and (2) are amended by revising the words
``ASTM Method D86'' to read ``ASTM Method D86-78, 82, 90, 95, or 96.''
Sec. 60.641 [Amended]
198. Amend Sec. 60.641 as follows:
a. The definition for ``Total SO2'' is amended by
revising the words ``(ppmv or kg/DSCM)'' to read ``(ppmv or kg/dscm
(lb/dscf)).''
b. The definitions for ``E'', ``S'', and ``X'' are amended to read
as follows:
Sec. 60.641 Definitions.
* * * * *
E = The sulfur emission rate expressed as elemental sulfur, kilograms
per hour (kg/hr) [pounds per hour (lb/hr)], rounded to one decimal
place.
* * * * *
S = The sulfur production rate, kilograms per hour (kg/hr) [pounds per
hour (lb/hr)], rounded to one decimal place.
X = The sulfur feed rate from the sweetening unit (i.e., the
H2S in the acid gas), expressed as sulfur, Mg/D(LT/D),
rounded to one decimal place.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.644 [Amended]
199. Amend Sec. 60.644 as follows:
a. Paragraphs (b)(1), (c)(3), and (c)(4)(iii) are revised.
b. In paragraph (b)(2), the first sentence is amended by revising
the words ``dscf/day'' to read ``dscm/day (dscf/day).''
c. In paragraph (c)(2), the second sentence is amended by revising
the words ``kg/hr'' to read ``kg/hr (lb/hr).''
d. In the paragraph (c)(4) introductory text, the first sentence is
revised.
e. Paragraph (c)(4)(i) is amended by deleting the words ``in mg/
dscm'' in the third sentence and by revising the last sentence.
f. In paragraph (c)(4)(ii), the last sentence is revised.
g. In paragraph (c)(4)(iv), the fifth sentence is amended by
revising the words ``(0.35 dscf)'' to read ``(3.5 dscf).''
h. Paragraph (d) is amended by revising the words ``(b) of (c)'' to
read ``(b) or (c).''
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.644 Test methods and procedures.
* * * * *
(b) * * *
(1) The average sulfur feed rate (X) shall be computed as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.030
Where:
X = average sulfur feed rate, Mg/D (LT/D).
Qa = average volumetric flow rate of acid gas from
sweetening unit, dscm/day (dscf/day).
Y = average H2S concentration in acid gas feed from
sweetening unit, percent by volume, expressed as a decimal.
[[Page 61774]]
K = (32 kg S/kg-mole)/((24.04 dscm/kg-mole)(1000 kg S/ Mg)) = 1.331 x
10-3 Mg/dscm, for metric units
= (32 lb S/lb-mole)/((385.36 dscf/lb-mole)(2240 lb S/long ton))
= 3.707 x 10-5 long ton/dscf, for English units.
* * * * *
(c) * * *
(3) The emission rate of sulfur shall be computed for each run as
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.031
Where:
E = emission rate of sulfur per run, kg/hr.
Ce = concentration of sulfur equivalent (SO2 +
reduced sulfur), g/dscm (lb/dscf).
Qsd = volumetric flow rate of effluent gas, dscm/hr (dscf/
hr).
K1 = conversion factor, 1000 g/kg (7000 gr/lb).
(4) The concentration of sulfur equivalent (Ce) shall be
the sum of the SO2 and reduced sulfur concentrations, after
being converted to sulfur equivalents. * * *
(i) * * * The concentration shall be multiplied by 0.5 x
10-\3\ to convert the results to sulfur equivalent.
(ii) * * * The concentration in ppm reduced sulfur as sulfur shall
be multiplied by 1.333 x 10-3 to convert the results to
sulfur equivalent.
(iii) Method 16A or 15 shall be used to determine the reduced
sulfur concentration from oxidation-type devices or where the oxygen
content of the effluent gas is greater than 1.0 percent by volume.
Eight samples of 20 minutes each shall be taken at 30-minute intervals.
The arithmetic average shall be the concentration for the run. The
concentration in ppm reduced sulfur as sulfur shall be multiplied by
1.333 x 10-3 to convert the results to sulfur equivalent.
* * * * *
Sec. 60.646 [Amended]
200. Amend Sec. 60.646 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(1), the second sentence is amended by revising
the words ``(kg/hr)'' to read ``(kg/hr (lb/hr)).''
b. In paragraph (c), the second sentence is amended by revising the
words ``(kg/hr)'' to read ``(kg/hr (lb/hr)).''
c. In paragraph (e), the first sentence is amended by revising the
words ``150 LT/D'' to read ``152 Mg/D (150 LT/D).''
d. In paragraph (e), the equation and definitions are amended by
revising as follows:
Sec. 60.646 Monitoring of emissions and operations.
* * * * *
(e) * * *
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.032
Where:
R = The sulfur dioxide removal efficiency achieved during the 24-hour
period, percent.
K2 = Conversion factor, 0.02400 Mg/D per kg/hr (0.01071 LT/D
per lb/hr).
S = The sulfur production rate during the 24-hour period, kg/hr (lb/
hr).
X = The sulfur feed rate in the acid gas, Mg/D (LT/D).
* * * * *
Sec. 60.663 [Amended]
201. Amend Sec. 60.663 as follows:
a. In paragraph (c) introductory text by revising the words ``in
the following equipment'' to read ``the following equipment.''
b. Paragraphs (d) and (e) are redesignated as (e) and (f) and
paragraph (c)(3) is redesignated as paragraph (d).
c. In newly redesignated paragraph (f) by revising the words
``carbon absorber'' to read ``carbon adsorber.''
Sec. 60.664 [Amended]
202. Amend Sec. 60.664 as follows:
a. In paragraph (b)(4)(ii), the definitions of the terms
``Ei'' and ``Eo'' are amended by revising the
term ``kg TOC/hr'' to read ``kg/hr (lb/hr).''
b. In paragraph (b)(4)(iii), the definitions of the terms
``Qi'' and ``Qo'' are amended by revising the
units ``dscf/hr'' to read ``dscf/min.''
c. In paragraph (b)(4)(iii), the definition of the term
``K2'' is revised.
d. Paragraphs (b)(5), (c), (d), (e), (f), and (g) are redesignated
as paragraphs (c), (d), (e), (f), (g), and (h), respectively.
e. In newly redesignated paragraph (e)(1)(i), the second sentence
is amended by revising ``Sec. 60.664(d)(2) and (3)'' to read
``Sec. 60.664(e)(2) and (3).''
f. In newly redesignated paragraph (e)(1)(i), the second sentence
is amended by revising ``(d)(1)(ii)'' to read ``(e)(1)(ii).''
g. In newly redesignated paragraph (e)(1)(i), the third sentence is
amended by revising the words ``4 inches'' to read ``10 centimeters (4
inches).''
h. In newly redesignated paragraph (e)(1)(ii)(C), the second
sentence is amended by revising ``Sec. 60.664(d)(4) and (5)'' to read
``Sec. 60.664(e)(4) and (5).''
i. Newly redesignated paragraph (e)(2)(ii) is amended by revising
``ASTM D1946-77'' to read ``ASTM D1946-77 or 90 (Reapproved 1994).''
j. In newly redesignated paragraphs (e)(4), (e)(5) and (f)(2), the
equation definitions are revised; and newly redesignated paragraphs
(f)(1)(i), (f)(1)(ii) including Table 1, and Table 2 of (f)(2)are
revised.
k. The last sentence in the newly redesignated paragraph (e)(4) is
amended by revising ``ASTM D2382-76'' to read ``ASTM D2382-76 or 88 or
D4809-95.''
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.664 Test methods and procedures.
* * * * *
(b) * * *
(4) * * *
(iii) * * *
K2 = 2.494 x 10-6 (1/ppm)(g-mole/scm) (kg/g)
(min/hr) (metric units), where standard temperature for (g-mole/scm) is
20 deg.C.
= 1.557 x 10-7 (1/ppm) (lb-mole/scf) (min/hr) (English
units), where standard temperature for (lb-mole/scf) is 68 deg.F.
* * * * *
(e) * * *
(4) * * *
HT = Net heating value of the sample, MJ/scm (Btu/scf),
where the net enthalpy per mole of vent stream is based on combustion
at 25 deg.C and 760 mm Hg (77 deg.F and 30 in. Hg), but the standard
temperature for determining the volume corresponding to one mole is 20
deg.C (68 deg.F).
K1 = 1.74 x 10-7 (1/ppm) (g-mole/scm) (MJ/kcal)
(metric units), where standard temperature for (g-mole/scm) is 20
deg.C.
= 1.03 x 10-11 (1/ppm) (lb-mole/scf) (Btu/kcal)
(English units) where standard temperature for (lb/mole/scf) is 68
deg.F.
Cj = Concentration on a wet basis of compound j in ppm, as
measured for organics by Method 18 and measured for hydrogen and carbon
monoxide by ASTM D1946-77 or 90 (Reapproved 1994) (incorporation by
reference as specified in Sec. 60.17 of this part) as indicated in
Sec. 60.664(e)(2).
Hj = Net heat of combustion of compound j, kcal/(g-mole)
[kcal/(lb-mole)], based on combustion at 25 deg.C and 760 mm Hg (77
deg.F and 30 in. Hg).
* * * * *
(5) * * *
ETOC = Measured emission rate of TOC, kg/hr (lb/hr).
K2 = 2.494 x 10-6 (1/ppm) (g-mole/scm) (kg/g)
(min/hr) (metric units), where standard temperature for (g-mole/scm) is
20 deg.C.
= 1.557 x 10-7 (1/ppm) (lb-mole/scf) (min/hr) (English
units), where
[[Page 61775]]
standard temperature for (lb-mole/scf) is 68 deg.F.
Cj = Concentration on a wet basis of compound j in ppm, as
measured by Method 18 as indicated in Sec. 60.664(e)(2).
Mj = Molecular weight of sample j, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
Qs = Vent stream flow rate, scm/min (scf/min), at a
temperature of 20 deg.C (68 deg.F).
* * * * *
(f) * * *
(1) * * *
(i) Where for a vent stream flow rate that is greater than or equal
to 14.2 scm/min (501 scf/min) at a standard temperature of 20 deg.C
(68 deg.F):
TRE = TRE index value.
Qs = Vent stream flow rate, scm/min (scf/min), at a
temperature of 20 deg.C (68 deg.F).
HT = Vent stream net heating value, MJ/scm (Btu/scf), where
the net enthalpy per mole of vent stream is based on combustion at 25
deg.C and 760 mm Hg (68 deg.F and 30 in. Hg), but the standard
temperature for determining the volume corresponding to one mole is 20
deg.C (68 deg.F) as in the definition of Qs.
Ys = Qs for all vent stream categories listed in
Table 1 except for Category E vent streams where Ys =
QsHT/3.6.
ETOC = Hourly emissions of TOC, kg/hr (lb/hr).
a, b, c, d, e, and f are coefficients.
The set of coefficients that apply to a vent stream can be obtained
from Table 1.
BILLING CODE 6560-50-P
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.033
[[Page 61776]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.034
[[Page 61777]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.035
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.036
BILLING CODE 6560-50-C
(ii) Where for a vent stream flow rate that is less than 14.2 scm/
min (501 scf/min) at a standard temperature of 20 deg.C (68 deg.F):
TRE = TRE index value.
Qs = 14.2 scm/min (501 scf/min).
HT = (FLOW) (HVAL)/Qs.
Where the following inputs are used:
FLOW = Vent stream flow rate, scm/min (scf/min), at a temperature of 20
deg.C (68 deg.F).
HVAL = Vent stream net heating value, MJ/scm (Btu/scf), where the net
enthalpy per mole of vent stream is based on combustion at 25 deg.C
and 760 mm Hg (68 deg.F and 30 in. Hg), but the standard temperature
for determining the volume corresponding to one mole is 20 deg.C (68
deg.F) as in the definition of Qs.
Ys = Qs for all vent stream categories listed in
Table 1 except for Category E vent streams where Ys =
QsHT/3.6.
ETOC = Hourly emissions of TOC, kg/hr (lb/hr).
a, b, c, d, e, and f are coefficients
[[Page 61778]]
The set of coefficients that apply to a vent stream can be obtained
from Table 1.
(2) * * *
TRE = TRE index value.
ETOC = Hourly emissions of TOC, kg/hr (lb/hr).
Qs = Vent stream flow rate, scm/min (scf/min), at a standard
temperature of 20 deg.C (68 deg.F).
HT = Vent stream net heating value, MJ/scm (Btu/scf), where
the net enthalpy per mole of vent stream is based on combustion at 25
deg.C and 760 mm Hg (68 deg.F and 30 in. Hg), but the standard
temperature for determining the volume corresponding to one mole is 20
deg.C (68 deg.F) as in the definition of Qs.
a, b, c, d, and e are coefficients.
* * * * *
Table 2.--Distillation NSPS TRE Coefficients for Vent Streams Controlled By a Flare
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a b c d e
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HT 11.2 MJ/scm................. 2.25 0.288 -0.193 -0.0051 2.08
(HT 301 Btu/scf)............... (0.140) (0.0367) (-0.000448) (-0.0051) (4.59)
HT 11.2 MJ/scm...... 0.309 0.0619 -0.0043 -0.0034 2.08
(HT 301 Btu/scf).... (0.0193) (0.00788) (-0.0000010) (-0.0034) (4.59)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* * * * *
Sec. 60.665 [Amended]
203. Amend Sec. 60.665 as follows:
a. Paragraph (b)(4)(i) is amended by revising the word
``adsorbing'' to read ``absorbing.''
b. In paragraph (e), the first sentence is amended by revising the
words ``44 MW'' to read ``44 MW (150 million Btu/hour).''
c. In paragraph (g), the first sentence is amended by revising the
section reference ``Sec. 60.663(d)'' to read ``Sec. 60.663(e).''
d. Paragraph (i) is amended by revising the words ``0.008
m3/min'' to read ``0.008 scm/min (0.3 scf/min).''
e. In paragraph (l)(6), the fourth sentence is amended by revising
the words ``vent stream flow rate, heating value, ETOC'' to
read ``vent stream flow rate, heating value, and ETOC.''
f. Paragraph (n) is amended by revising the word ``capcity'' to
read ``capacity.''
Sec. 60.672 [Amended]
204. In Sec. 60.672, paragraph (a)(1) is amended by revising the
words ``0.05 g/dscm'' to read ``0.05 g/dscm (0.022 gr/dscf).''
Sec. 60.676 [Amended]
205. In Sec. 60.676, paragraphs (a)(1)(i), (a)(4)(i), and
(a)(4)(ii) are amended by revising the word ``tons'' to read
``megagrams or tons'' wherever it occurs.
Sec. 60.685 [Amended]
206. Amend Sec. 60.685 as follows:
a. In paragraph (c)(1), the equation definitions are revised.
b. In paragraph (c)(2) by revising the words ``2.55 dscm (90
dscf)'' to read ``2.55 dscm (90.1 dscf).''
c. In paragraph (c)(3)(i) by revising the words ``ASTM Standard
Test Method D2584-68 (Reapproved 1979)'' to read ``ASTM D2584-68
(Reapproved 1985) or 94.''
The revisions read as follows:
Sec. 60.685 Test methods and procedures.
* * * * *
(c) * * *
(1) * * *
E = emission rate of particulate matter, kg/Mg (lb/ton).
Ct = concentration of particulate matter, g/dscm (gr/dscf).
Qsd = volumetric flow rate of effluent gas, dscm/hr (dscf/
hr).
Pavg = average glass pull rate, Mg/hr (ton/hr).
K = 1,000 g/kg (7,000 gr/lb).
* * * * *
Sec. 60.692-3 [Amended]
207. In Sec. 60.692-3, paragraph (b) is amended by revising the
words ``16 liters per second (250 gpm)'' to read ``16 liters per second
(250 gallons per minute (gpm)).''
Sec. 60.695 [Amended]
208. In Sec. 60.695, paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) are amended by
revising the words ``an accuracy of 1 percent of the temperature being
measured in deg.C or 0.5 deg.C (1.0 deg.F),
whichever is greater'' to read ``an accuracy of 1 percent
of the temperature being measured, expressed in deg.C, or
0.5 deg.C (0.9 deg.F), whichever is greater.''
Sec. 60.697 [Amended]
209. Amend Sec. 60.697 by adding paragraph (k) as follows:
Sec. 60.697 Recordkeeping requirements.
* * * * *
(k) For oil-water separators subject to Sec. 60.693-2, the
location, date, and corrective action shall be recorded for inspections
required by Secs. 60.693-2(a)(1)(iii)(A) and (B), and shall be
maintained for the time period specified in paragraphs (k)(1) and (2)
of this section.
(1) For inspections required by Sec. 60.693-2(a)(1)(iii)(A), ten
years after the information is recorded.
(2) For inspections required by Sec. 60.693-2(a)(1)(iii)(B), two
years after the information is recorded.
Sec. 60.704 [Amended]
210. Amend Sec. 60.704 as follows:
a. Paragraph (d)(2)(ii) is amended by revising ``ASTM D1946-77'' to
read ``ASTM D1946-77 or 90 (Reapproved 1994).''
b. The definition of ``Cj'' in paragraph (d)(4) is
amended by revising ``ASTM D1946-77'' to read ``ASTM D1946-77 or 90
(Reapproved 1994).''
c. The definition of ``Hj'' in paragraph (d)(4) is
amended by revising ``ASTM D2382-76'' to read ``ASTM D2382-76 or 88 or
D4809-95.''
Sec. 60.723 [Amended]
211. In Sec. 60.723, paragraph (b)(1) is amended by revising the
words ``Reference Method'' to read ``Method'' wherever they occur.
Sec. 60.724 [Amended]
212. In Sec. 60.724, paragraph (a)(2) is amended by revising the
words ``Reference Method'' to read ``Method.''
Sec. 60.732 [Amended]
213. In Sec. 60.732, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words
``0.057 g/dscm for dryers'' to read ``0.057 g/dscm (0.025 gr/dscf) for
dryers.''
Sec. 60.753 [Amended]
214. In Sec. 60.753, paragraph (c)(2) introductory text is amended
by revising the words ``Method 3A'' to read ``Method 3A or 3C.''
Sec. 60.754 [Amended]
215. Amend Sec. 60.754 as follows;
a. In paragraphs (a)(1)(i) and (a)(1)(ii), the equations are
amended by revising ``CNMOC'' to read ``CNMOC.''
[[Page 61779]]
b. In paragraph (a)(3), the introductory text is revised; and in
paragraph (d), the first sentence is removed and three sentences are
added in its place to read as follows:
Sec. 60.754 Test methods and procedures.
(a) * * *
(3) Tier 2. The landfill owner or operator shall determine the NMOC
concentration using the following sampling procedure. The landfill
owner or operator shall install at least two sample probes per hectare
of landfill surface that has retained waste for at least 2 years. If
the landfill is larger than 25 hectares in area, only 50 samples are
required. The sample probes should be located to avoid known areas of
nondegradable solid waste. The owner or operator shall collect and
analyze one sample of landfill gas from each probe to determine the
NMOC concentration using Method 25 or 25C of Appendix A of this part.
Method 18 of Appendix A of this part may be used to analyze the samples
collected by the Method 25 or 25C sampling procedure. Taking composite
samples from different probes into a single cylinder is allowed;
however, equal sample volumes must be taken from each probe. For each
composite, the sampling rate, collection times, beginning and ending
cylinder vacuums, or alternative volume measurements must be recorded
to verify that composite volumes are equal. Composite sample volumes
should not be less than one liter unless evidence can be provided to
substantiate the accuracy of smaller volumes. Terminate compositing
before the cylinder approaches ambient pressure where measurement
accuracy diminishes. If using Method 18, the owner or operator must
identify all compounds in the sample and, as a minimum, test for those
compounds published in the most recent Compilation of Air Pollutant
Emission Factors (AP-42), minus carbon monoxide, hydrogen sulfide, and
mercury. As a minimum, the instrument must be calibrated for each of
the compounds on the list. Convert the concentration of each Method 18
compound to CNMOC as hexane by multiplying by the ratio of
its carbon atoms divided by six. If more than the required number of
samples are taken, all samples must be used in the analysis. The
landfill owner or operator must divide the NMOC concentration from
Method 25 or 25C of Appendix A of this part by six to convert from
CNMOC as carbon to CNMOC as hexane. If the
landfill has an active or passive gas removal system in place, Method
25 or 25C samples may be collected from these systems instead of
surface probes provided the removal system can be shown to provide
sampling as representative as the two sampling probe per hectare
requirement. For active collection systems, samples may be collected
from the common header pipe before the gas moving or condensate removal
equipment. For these systems, a minimum of three samples must be
collected from the header pipe.
* * * * *
(d) For the performance test required in Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(iii)(B),
Method 25, 25C, or Method 18 of Appendix A of this part must be used to
determine compliance with the 98 weight-percent efficiency or the 20
ppmv outlet concentration level, unless another method to demonstrate
compliance has been approved by the Administrator as provided by
Sec. 60.752(b)(2)(i)(B). Method 3 or 3A shall be used to determine
oxygen for correcting the NMOC concentration as hexane to 3 percent. In
cases where the outlet concentration is less than 50 ppm NMOC as carbon
(8 ppm NMOC as hexane), Method 25A should be used in place of Method
25. * * *
* * * * *
216. In Part 60, Appendix A is amended by revising Methods 1, 1A,
2, 2A, 2B, 2C, 2D, 2E, 3, 3B, 4, 5, 5A, 5B, 5D, 5E, 5F, 5G, 5H, 6, 6A,
6B, 7, 7A, 7B, 7C, 7D, 8, 10A, 10B, 11, 12, 13A, 13B, 14, 15, 15A, 16,
16A, 16B, 17, 18, 19, 21, 22, 24, 24A, 25, 25A, 25B, 25C, 25D, 25E, 26,
26A, 27, 28, 28A, and 29 to read as follows:
METHOD 1--Sample and Velocity Traverses for Stationary Sources
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling)
essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by
reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain
reliable results, persons using this method should have a thorough
knowledge of at least the following additional test method: Method
2.
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Measured Parameters. The purpose of the method is to provide
guidance for the selection of sampling ports and traverse points at
which sampling for air pollutants will be performed pursuant to
regulations set forth in this part. Two procedures are presented: a
simplified procedure, and an alternative procedure (see Section 11.5).
The magnitude of cyclonic flow of effluent gas in a stack or duct is
the only parameter quantitatively measured in the simplified procedure.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable to gas streams
flowing in ducts, stacks, and flues. This method cannot be used when:
(1) the flow is cyclonic or swirling; or (2) a stack is smaller than
0.30 meter (12 in.) in diameter, or 0.071 m\2\ (113 in.\2\) in cross-
sectional area. The simplified procedure cannot be used when the
measurement site is less than two stack or duct diameters downstream or
less than a half diameter upstream from a flow disturbance.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
Note: The requirements of this method must be considered before
construction of a new facility from which emissions are to be
measured; failure to do so may require subsequent alterations to the
stack or deviation from the standard procedure. Cases involving
variants are subject to approval by the Administrator.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 This method is designed to aid in the representative
measurement of pollutant emissions and/or total volumetric flow rate
from a stationary source. A measurement site where the effluent stream
is flowing in a known direction is selected, and the cross-section of
the stack is divided into a number of equal areas. Traverse points are
then located within each of these equal areas.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials,
operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the
safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of
the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations
prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies.
6.1 Apparatus. The apparatus described below is required only when
utilizing the alternative site selection procedure described in Section
11.5 of this method.
6.1.1 Directional Probe. Any directional probe, such as United
Sensor Type DA Three-Dimensional Directional Probe, capable of
measuring both the pitch and yaw angles of gas flows is acceptable.
Before using the probe, assign an identification number to the
directional probe, and permanently mark or engrave the number on the
body of the probe. The pressure holes of directional probes are
susceptible to
[[Page 61780]]
plugging when used in particulate-laden gas streams. Therefore, a
procedure for cleaning the pressure holes by ``back-purging'' with
pressurized air is required.
6.1.2 Differential Pressure Gauges. Inclined manometers, U-tube
manometers, or other differential pressure gauges (e.g., magnehelic
gauges) that meet the specifications described in Method 2, Section
6.2.
Note: If the differential pressure gauge produces both negative
and positive readings, then both negative and positive pressure
readings shall be calibrated at a minimum of three points as
specified in Method 2, Section 6.2.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport [Reserved]
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Procedure
11.1 Selection of Measurement Site.
11.1.1 Sampling and/or velocity measurements are performed at a
site located at least eight stack or duct diameters downstream and two
diameters upstream from any flow disturbance such as a bend, expansion,
or contraction in the stack, or from a visible flame. If necessary, an
alternative location may be selected, at a position at least two stack
or duct diameters downstream and a half diameter upstream from any flow
disturbance.
11.1.2 An alternative procedure is available for determining the
acceptability of a measurement location not meeting the criteria above.
This procedure described in Section 11.5 allows for the determination
of gas flow angles at the sampling points and comparison of the
measured results with acceptability criteria.
11.2 Determining the Number of Traverse Points.
11.2.1 Particulate Traverses.
11.2.1.1 When the eight- and two-diameter criterion can be met,
the minimum number of traverse points shall be: (1) twelve, for
circular or rectangular stacks with diameters (or equivalent diameters)
greater than 0.61 meter (24 in.); (2) eight, for circular stacks with
diameters between 0.30 and 0.61 meter (12 and 24 in.); and (3) nine,
for rectangular stacks with equivalent diameters between 0.30 and 0.61
meter (12 and 24 in.).
11.2.1.2 When the eight- and two-diameter criterion cannot be met,
the minimum number of traverse points is determined from Figure 1-1.
Before referring to the figure, however, determine the distances from
the measurement site to the nearest upstream and downstream
disturbances, and divide each distance by the stack diameter or
equivalent diameter, to determine the distance in terms of the number
of duct diameters. Then, determine from Figure 1-1 the minimum number
of traverse points that corresponds: (1) to the number of duct
diameters upstream; and (2) to the number of diameters downstream.
Select the higher of the two minimum numbers of traverse points, or a
greater value, so that for circular stacks the number is a multiple of
4, and for rectangular stacks, the number is one of those shown in
Table 1-1.
11.2.2 Velocity (Non-Particulate) Traverses. When velocity or
volumetric flow rate is to be determined (but not particulate matter),
the same procedure as that used for particulate traverses (Section
11.2.1) is followed, except that Figure 1-2 may be used instead of
Figure 1-1.
11.3 Cross-Sectional Layout and Location of Traverse Points.
11.3.1 Circular Stacks.
11.3.1.1 Locate the traverse points on two perpendicular diameters
according to Table 1-2 and the example shown in Figure 1-3. Any
equation (see examples in References 2 and 3 in Section 16.0) that
gives the same values as those in Table 1-2 may be used in lieu of
Table 1-2.
11.3.1.2 For particulate traverses, one of the diameters must
coincide with the plane containing the greatest expected concentration
variation (e.g., after bends); one diameter shall be congruent to the
direction of the bend. This requirement becomes less critical as the
distance from the disturbance increases; therefore, other diameter
locations may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
11.3.1.3 In addition, for elliptical stacks having unequal
perpendicular diameters, separate traverse points shall be calculated
and located along each diameter. To determine the cross-sectional area
of the elliptical stack, use the following equation:
Square Area = D1 x D2 x 0.7854
Where: D1 = Stack diameter 1
D2 = Stack diameter 2
11.3.1.4 In addition, for stacks having diameters greater than
0.61 m (24 in.), no traverse points shall be within 2.5 centimeters
(1.00 in.) of the stack walls; and for stack diameters equal to or less
than 0.61 m (24 in.), no traverse points shall be located within 1.3 cm
(0.50 in.) of the stack walls. To meet these criteria, observe the
procedures given below.
11.3.2 Stacks With Diameters Greater Than 0.61 m (24 in.).
11.3.2.1 When any of the traverse points as located in Section
11.3.1 fall within 2.5 cm (1.0 in.) of the stack walls, relocate them
away from the stack walls to: (1) a distance of 2.5 cm (1.0 in.); or
(2) a distance equal to the nozzle inside diameter, whichever is
larger. These relocated traverse points (on each end of a diameter)
shall be the ``adjusted'' traverse points.
11.3.2.2 Whenever two successive traverse points are combined to
form a single adjusted traverse point, treat the adjusted point as two
separate traverse points, both in the sampling and/or velocity
measurement procedure, and in recording of the data.
11.3.3 Stacks With Diameters Equal To or Less Than 0.61 m (24
in.). Follow the procedure in Section 11.3.1.1, noting only that any
``adjusted'' points should be relocated away from the stack walls to:
(1) a distance of 1.3 cm (0.50 in.); or (2) a distance equal to the
nozzle inside diameter, whichever is larger.
11.3.4 Rectangular Stacks.
11.3.4.1 Determine the number of traverse points as explained in
Sections 11.1 and 11.2 of this method. From Table 1-1, determine the
grid configuration. Divide the stack cross-section into as many equal
rectangular elemental areas as traverse points, and then locate a
traverse point at the centroid of each equal area according to the
example in Figure 1-4.
11.3.4.2 To use more than the minimum number of traverse points,
expand the ``minimum number of traverse points'' matrix (see Table 1-1)
by adding the extra traverse points along one or the other or both legs
of the matrix; the final matrix need not be balanced. For example, if a
4 x 3 ``minimum number of points'' matrix were expanded to 36 points,
the final matrix could be 9 x 4 or 12 x 3, and would not
necessarily have to be 6 x 6. After constructing the final matrix,
divide the stack cross-section into as many equal rectangular,
elemental areas as traverse points, and locate a traverse point at the
centroid of each equal area.
11.3.4.3 The situation of traverse points being too close to the
stack walls is not expected to arise with rectangular stacks. If this
problem should ever arise, the Administrator must be contacted for
resolution of the matter.
11.4 Verification of Absence of Cyclonic Flow.
11.4.1 In most stationary sources, the direction of stack gas flow
is essentially parallel to the stack walls. However, cyclonic flow may
exist (1) after such devices as cyclones and inertial demisters
following venturi
[[Page 61781]]
scrubbers, or (2) in stacks having tangential inlets or other duct
configurations which tend to induce swirling; in these instances, the
presence or absence of cyclonic flow at the sampling location must be
determined. The following techniques are acceptable for this
determination.
11.4.2 Level and zero the manometer. Connect a Type S pitot tube
to the manometer and leak-check system. Position the Type S pitot tube
at each traverse point, in succession, so that the planes of the face
openings of the pitot tube are perpendicular to the stack cross-
sectional plane; when the Type S pitot tube is in this position, it is
at ``0 deg. reference.'' Note the differential pressure (p)
reading at each traverse point. If a null (zero) pitot reading is
obtained at 0 deg. reference at a given traverse point, an acceptable
flow condition exists at that point. If the pitot reading is not zero
at 0 deg. reference, rotate the pitot tube (up to 90 deg.
yaw angle), until a null reading is obtained. Carefully determine and
record the value of the rotation angle () to the nearest
degree. After the null technique has been applied at each traverse
point, calculate the average of the absolute values of ;
assign values of 0 deg. to those points for which no rotation
was required, and include these in the overall average. If the average
value of is greater than 20 deg., the overall flow condition
in the stack is unacceptable, and alternative methodology, subject to
the approval of the Administrator, must be used to perform accurate
sample and velocity traverses.
11.5 The alternative site selection procedure may be used to
determine the rotation angles in lieu of the procedure outlined in
Section 11.4.
11.5.1 Alternative Measurement Site Selection Procedure. This
alternative applies to sources where measurement locations are less
than 2 equivalent or duct diameters downstream or less than one-half
duct diameter upstream from a flow disturbance. The alternative should
be limited to ducts larger than 24 in. in diameter where blockage and
wall effects are minimal. A directional flow-sensing probe is used to
measure pitch and yaw angles of the gas flow at 40 or more traverse
points; the resultant angle is calculated and compared with acceptable
criteria for mean and standard deviation.
Note: Both the pitch and yaw angles are measured from a line
passing through the traverse point and parallel to the stack axis.
The pitch angle is the angle of the gas flow component in the plane
that INCLUDES the traverse line and is parallel to the stack axis.
The yaw angle is the angle of the gas flow component in the plane
PERPENDICULAR to the traverse line at the traverse point and is
measured from the line passing through the traverse point and
parallel to the stack axis.
11.5.2 Traverse Points. Use a minimum of 40 traverse points for
circular ducts and 42 points for rectangular ducts for the gas flow
angle determinations. Follow the procedure outlined in Section 11.3 and
Table 1-1 or 1-2 for the location and layout of the traverse points. If
the measurement location is determined to be acceptable according to
the criteria in this alternative procedure, use the same traverse point
number and locations for sampling and velocity measurements.
11.5.3 Measurement Procedure.
11.5.3.1 Prepare the directional probe and differential pressure
gauges as recommended by the manufacturer. Capillary tubing or surge
tanks may be used to dampen pressure fluctuations. It is recommended,
but not required, that a pretest leak check be conducted. To perform a
leak check, pressurize or use suction on the impact opening until a
reading of at least 7.6 cm (3 in.) H2O registers on the
differential pressure gauge, then plug the impact opening. The pressure
of a leak-free system will remain stable for at least 15 seconds.
11.5.3.2 Level and zero the manometers. Since the manometer level
and zero may drift because of vibrations and temperature changes,
periodically check the level and zero during the traverse.
11.5.3.3 Position the probe at the appropriate locations in the
gas stream, and rotate until zero deflection is indicated for the yaw
angle pressure gauge. Determine and record the yaw angle. Record the
pressure gauge readings for the pitch angle, and determine the pitch
angle from the calibration curve. Repeat this procedure for each
traverse point. Complete a ``back-purge'' of the pressure lines and the
impact openings prior to measurements of each traverse point.
11.5.3.4 A post-test check as described in Section 11.5.3.1 is
required. If the criteria for a leak-free system are not met, repair
the equipment, and repeat the flow angle measurements.
11.5.4 Calibration. Use a flow system as described in Sections
10.1.2.1 and 10.1.2.2 of Method 2. In addition, the flow system shall
have the capacity to generate two test-section velocities: one between
365 and 730 m/min (1,200 and 2,400 ft/min) and one between 730 and
1,100 m/min (2,400 and 3,600 ft/min).
11.5.4.1 Cut two entry ports in the test section. The axes through
the entry ports shall be perpendicular to each other and intersect in
the centroid of the test section. The ports should be elongated slots
parallel to the axis of the test section and of sufficient length to
allow measurement of pitch angles while maintaining the pitot head
position at the test-section centroid. To facilitate alignment of the
directional probe during calibration, the test section should be
constructed of plexiglass or some other transparent material. All
calibration measurements should be made at the same point in the test
section, preferably at the centroid of the test section.
11.5.4.2 To ensure that the gas flow is parallel to the central
axis of the test section, follow the procedure outlined in Section 11.4
for cyclonic flow determination to measure the gas flow angles at the
centroid of the test section from two test ports located 90 deg. apart.
The gas flow angle measured in each port must be 2 deg. of
0 deg.. Straightening vanes should be installed, if necessary, to meet
this criterion.
11.5.4.3 Pitch Angle Calibration. Perform a calibration traverse
according to the manufacturer's recommended protocol in 5 deg.
increments for angles from -60 deg. to +60 deg. at one velocity in each
of the two ranges specified above. Average the pressure ratio values
obtained for each angle in the two flow ranges, and plot a calibration
curve with the average values of the pressure ratio (or other suitable
measurement factor as recommended by the manufacturer) versus the pitch
angle. Draw a smooth line through the data points. Plot also the data
values for each traverse point. Determine the differences between the
measured data values and the angle from the calibration curve at the
same pressure ratio. The difference at each comparison must be within
2 deg. for angles between 0 deg. and 40 deg. and within 3 deg. for
angles between 40 deg. and 60 deg..
11.5.4.4 Yaw Angle Calibration. Mark the three-dimensional probe
to allow the determination of the yaw position of the probe. This is
usually a line extending the length of the probe and aligned with the
impact opening. To determine the accuracy of measurements of the yaw
angle, only the zero or null position need be calibrated as follows:
Place the directional probe in the test section, and rotate the probe
until the zero position is found. With a protractor or other angle
measuring device, measure the angle indicated by the yaw angle
indicator on the three-dimensional probe. This should be within 2 deg.
of 0 deg.. Repeat this measurement for any other points along the
length of the pitot where yaw angle measurements could be read in order
to account for
[[Page 61782]]
variations in the pitot markings used to indicate pitot head positions.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature.
L = length.
n = total number of traverse points.
Pi = pitch angle at traverse point i, degree.
Ravg = average resultant angle, degree.
Ri = resultant angle at traverse point i, degree.
Sd = standard deviation, degree.
W = width.
Yi = yaw angle at traverse point i, degree.
12.2 For a rectangular cross section, an equivalent diameter
(De) shall be calculated using the following equation, to
determine the upstream and downstream distances:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.037
12.3 If use of the alternative site selection procedure (Section
11.5 of this method) is required, perform the following calculations
using the equations below: the resultant angle at each traverse point,
the average resultant angle, and the standard deviation. Complete the
calculations retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond
that of the acquired data. Round the values after the final
calculations.
12.3.1 Calculate the resultant angle at each traverse point:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.038
12.3.2 Calculate the average resultant for the measurements:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.039
12.3.3 Calculate the standard deviations:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.040
12.3.4 Acceptability Criteria. The measurement location is
acceptable if Ravg 20 deg. and Sd
10 deg..
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Determining Dust Concentration in a Gas Stream, ASME
Performance Test Code No. 27. New York. 1957.
2. DeVorkin, Howard, et al. Air Pollution Source Testing Manual.
Air Pollution Control District. Los Angeles, CA. November 1963.
3. Methods for Determining of Velocity, Volume, Dust and Mist
Content of Gases. Western Precipitation Division of Joy
Manufacturing Co. Los Angeles, CA. Bulletin WP-50. 1968.
4. Standard Method for Sampling Stacks for Particulate Matter.
In: 1971 Book of ASTM Standards, Part 23. ASTM Designation D 2928-
71. Philadelphia, PA. 1971.
5. Hanson, H.A., et al. Particulate Sampling Strategies for
Large Power Plants Including Nonuniform Flow. USEPA, ORD, ESRL,
Research Triangle Park, NC. EPA-600/2-76-170. June 1976.
6. Entropy Environmentalists, Inc. Determination of the Optimum
Number of Sampling Points: An Analysis of Method 1 Criteria.
Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. EPA
Contract No. 68-01-3172, Task 7.
7. Hanson, H.A., R.J. Davini, J.K. Morgan, and A.A. Iversen.
Particulate Sampling Strategies for Large Power Plants Including
Nonuniform Flow. USEPA, Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No.
EPA-600/2-76-170. June 1976. 350 pp.
8. Brooks, E.F., and R.L. Williams. Flow and Gas Sampling
Manual. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle
Park, NC. Publication No. EPA-600/2-76-203. July 1976. 93 pp.
9. Entropy Environmentalists, Inc. Traverse Point Study. EPA
Contract No. 68-02-3172. June 1977. 19 pp.
10. Brown, J. and K. Yu. Test Report: Particulate Sampling
Strategy in Circular Ducts. Emission Measurement Branch. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.
July 31, 1980. 12 pp.
11. Hawksley, P.G.W., S. Badzioch, and J.H. Blackett.
Measurement of Solids in Flue Gases. Leatherhead, England, The
British Coal Utilisation Research Association. 1961. pp. 129-133.
12. Knapp, K.T. The Number of Sampling Points Needed for
Representative Source Sampling. In: Proceedings of the Fourth
National Conference on Energy and Environment. Theodore, L. et al.
(ed). Dayton, Dayton Section of the American Institute of Chemical
Engineers. October 3-7, 1976. pp. 563-568.
13. Smith, W.S. and D.J. Grove. A Proposed Extension of EPA
Method 1 Criteria. Pollution Engineering. XV (8):36-37. August 1983.
14. Gerhart, P.M. and M.J. Dorsey. Investigation of Field Test
Procedures for Large Fans. University of Akron. Akron, OH. (EPRI
Contract CS-1651). Final Report (RP-1649-5). December 1980.
15. Smith, W.S. and D.J. Grove. A New Look at Isokinetic
Sampling--Theory and Applications. Source Evaluation Society
Newsletter. VIII (3):19-24. August 1983.
[[Page 61783]]
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.041
[[Page 61784]]
Table 1-1 Cross-Section Layout for Rectangular Stacks
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number of tranverse points layout Matrix
------------------------------------------------------------------------
9...................................... 3 x 3
12..................................... 4 x 3
16..................................... 4 x 4
20..................................... 5 x 4
25..................................... 5 x 5
30..................................... 6 x 5
36..................................... 6 x 6
42..................................... 7 x 6
49..................................... 7 x 7
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 61785]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.042
[[Page 61786]]
Table 1-2.--Location of Traverse Points in Circular Stacks
[Percent of stack diameter from inside wall to tranverse point]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number of traverse points on a diameter
Traverse point number on a diameter -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1....................................................... 14.6 6.7 4.4 3.2 2.6 2.1 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.3 1.1 1.1
2....................................................... 85.4 25.0 14.6 10.5 8.2 6.7 5.7 4.9 4.4 3.9 3.5 3.2
3....................................................... 75.0 29.6 19.4 14.6 11.8 9.9 8.5 7.5 6.7 6.0 5.5
4....................................................... 93.3 70.4 32.3 22.6 17.7 14.6 12.5 10.9 9.7 8.7 7.9
5....................................................... 85.4 67.7 34.2 25.0 20.1 16.9 14.6 12.9 11.6 10.5
6....................................................... 95.6 80.6 65.8 35.6 26.9 22.0 18.8 16.5 14.6 13.2
7....................................................... 89.5 77.4 64.4 36.6 28.3 23.6 20.4 18.0 16.1
8....................................................... 96.8 85.4 75.0 63.4 37.5 29.6 25.0 21.8 19.4
9....................................................... 91.8 82.3 73.1 62.5 38.2 30.6 26.2 23.0
10...................................................... 97.4 88.2 79.9 71.7 61.8 38.8 31.5 27.2
11...................................................... 93.3 85.4 78.0 70.4 61.2 39.3 32.3
12...................................................... 97.9 90.1 83.1 76.4 69.4 60.7 39.8
13...................................................... 94.3 87.5 81.2 75.0 68.5 60.2
14...................................................... 98.2 91.5 85.4 79.6 73.8 67.7
15...................................................... 95.1 89.1 83.5 78.2 72.8
16...................................................... 98.4 92.5 87.1 82.0 77.0
17...................................................... 95.6 90.3 85.4 80.6
18...................................................... 98.6 93.3 88.4 83.9
19...................................................... 96.1 91.3 86.8
20...................................................... 98.7 94.0 89.5
21...................................................... 96.5 92.1
22...................................................... 98.9 94.5
23...................................................... 96.8
24...................................................... 99.9
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 61787]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.043
[[Page 61788]]
Method 1A--Sample and Velocity Traverses for Stationary Sources
With Small Stacks or Ducts
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling)
essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by
reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain
reliable results, persons using this method should have a thorough
knowledge of at least the following additional test method: Method
1.
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Measured Parameters. The purpose of the method is to provide
guidance for the selection of sampling ports and traverse points at
which sampling for air pollutants will be performed pursuant to
regulations set forth in this part.
1.2 Applicability. The applicability and principle of this method
are identical to Method 1, except its applicability is limited to
stacks or ducts. This method is applicable to flowing gas streams in
ducts, stacks, and flues of less than about 0.30 meter (12 in.) in
diameter, or 0.071 m 2 (113 in.2) in cross-
sectional area, but equal to or greater than about 0.10 meter (4 in.)
in diameter, or 0.0081 m 2 (12.57 in.2) in cross-
sectional area. This method cannot be used when the flow is cyclonic or
swirling.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 The method is designed to aid in the representative
measurement of pollutant emissions and/or total volumetric flow rate
from a stationary source. A measurement site or a pair of measurement
sites where the effluent stream is flowing in a known direction is
(are) selected. The cross-section of the stack is divided into a number
of equal areas. Traverse points are then located within each of these
equal areas.
2.2 In these small diameter stacks or ducts, the conventional
Method 5 stack assembly (consisting of a Type S pitot tube attached to
a sampling probe, equipped with a nozzle and thermocouple) blocks a
significant portion of the cross-section of the duct and causes
inaccurate measurements. Therefore, for particulate matter (PM)
sampling in small stacks or ducts, the gas velocity is measured using a
standard pitot tube downstream of the actual emission sampling site.
The straight run of duct between the PM sampling and velocity
measurement sites allows the flow profile, temporarily disturbed by the
presence of the sampling probe, to redevelop and stabilize.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials,
operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the
safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of
the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations
prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies [Reserved]
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport [Reserved]
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Procedure
11.1 Selection of Measurement Site.
11.1.1 Particulate Measurements--Steady or Unsteady Flow. Select a
particulate measurement site located preferably at least eight
equivalent stack or duct diameters downstream and 10 equivalent
diameters upstream from any flow disturbances such as bends,
expansions, or contractions in the stack, or from a visible flame.
Next, locate the velocity measurement site eight equivalent diameters
downstream of the particulate measurement site (see Figure 1A-1). If
such locations are not available, select an alternative particulate
measurement location at least two equivalent stack or duct diameters
downstream and two and one-half diameters upstream from any flow
disturbance. Then, locate the velocity measurement site two equivalent
diameters downstream from the particulate measurement site. (See
Section 12.2 of Method 1 for calculating equivalent diameters for a
rectangular cross-section.)
11.1.2 PM Sampling (Steady Flow) or Velocity (Steady or Unsteady
Flow) Measurements. For PM sampling when the volumetric flow rate in a
duct is constant with respect to time, Section 11.1.1 of Method 1 may
be followed, with the PM sampling and velocity measurement performed at
one location. To demonstrate that the flow rate is constant (within 10
percent) when PM measurements are made, perform complete velocity
traverses before and after the PM sampling run, and calculate the
deviation of the flow rate derived after the PM sampling run from the
one derived before the PM sampling run. The PM sampling run is
acceptable if the deviation does not exceed 10 percent.
11.2 Determining the Number of Traverse Points.
11.2.1 Particulate Measurements (Steady or Unsteady Flow). Use
Figure 1-1 of Method 1 to determine the number of traverse points to
use at both the velocity measurement and PM sampling locations. Before
referring to the figure, however, determine the distances between both
the velocity measurement and PM sampling sites to the nearest upstream
and downstream disturbances. Then divide each distance by the stack
diameter or equivalent diameter to express the distances in terms of
the number of duct diameters. Then, determine the number of traverse
points from Figure 1-1 of Method 1 corresponding to each of these four
distances. Choose the highest of the four numbers of traverse points
(or a greater number) so that, for circular ducts the number is a
multiple of four; and for rectangular ducts, the number is one of those
shown in Table 1-1 of Method 1. When the optimum duct diameter location
criteria can be satisfied, the minimum number of traverse points
required is eight for circular ducts and nine for rectangular ducts.
11.2.2 PM Sampling (Steady Flow) or only Velocity (Non-
Particulate) Measurements. Use Figure 1-2 of Method 1 to determine
number of traverse points, following the same procedure used for PM
sampling as described in Section 11.2.1 of Method 1. When the optimum
duct diameter location criteria can be satisfied, the minimum number of
traverse points required is eight for circular ducts and nine for
rectangular ducts.
11.3 Cross-sectional Layout, Location of Traverse Points, and
Verification of the Absence of Cyclonic Flow. Same as Method 1,
Sections 11.3 and 11.4, respectively.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations [Reserved]
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as Method 1, Section 16.0, References 1 through 6, with the
addition of the following:
1. Vollaro, Robert F. Recommended Procedure for Sample Traverses in
Ducts Smaller Than 12 Inches in
[[Page 61789]]
Diameter. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement
Branch, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina. January 1977.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.044
Method 2--Determination of Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric Flow
Rate (Type S Pitot Tube)
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling)
essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by
reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain
reliable results, persons using this method should have a thorough
knowledge of at
least the following additional test method:
Method 1.
1.0 Scope and Application.
1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of the average
velocity and the volumetric flow rate of a gas stream.
1.2 This method is not applicable at measurement sites that fail
to meet the criteria of Method 1, Section 11.1. Also, the method cannot
be used for direct measurement in cyclonic or swirling gas streams;
Section 11.4 of Method 1 shows how to determine cyclonic or swirling
flow conditions. When unacceptable conditions exist, alternative
procedures, subject to the approval of the Administrator, must be
employed to produce accurate flow rate determinations. Examples of such
alternative procedures are: (1) to install straightening vanes; (2) to
calculate the total volumetric flow rate stoichiometrically, or (3) to
move to another measurement site at which the flow is acceptable.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method.
2.1 The average gas velocity in a stack is determined from the gas
density and from measurement of the average velocity head with a Type S
(Stausscheibe or reverse type) pitot tube.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials,
operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the
safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of
the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations
prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Specifications for the apparatus are given below. Any other
apparatus that has been demonstrated (subject to approval of the
Administrator) to be capable of meeting the specifications will be
considered acceptable.
6.1 Type S Pitot Tube.
6.1.1 Pitot tube made of metal tubing (e.g., stainless steel) as
shown in Figure 2-1. It is recommended that the external tubing
diameter (dimension Dt, Figure 2-2b) be between 0.48 and
0.95 cm (\3/16\ and \3/8\ inch). There shall be an equal distance from
the base of each leg of the pitot tube to its face-opening plane
(dimensions PA and PB, Figure 2-2b); it is
recommended that this distance be between 1.05 and 1.50 times the
external tubing diameter. The face openings of the pitot tube shall,
preferably, be aligned as shown in Figure 2-2; however, slight
misalignments of the openings are permissible (see Figure 2-3).
6.1.2 The Type S pitot tube shall have a known coefficient,
determined as outlined in Section 10.0. An identification number shall
be assigned to the pitot tube; this number shall be permanently marked
or engraved on the body of the tube. A standard pitot tube may be used
instead of a Type S, provided that it meets the specifications of
Sections 6.7 and 10.2. Note, however, that the static and impact
pressure holes of standard pitot tubes are susceptible to plugging in
particulate-laden gas streams. Therefore, whenever a standard pitot
tube is used to perform a traverse, adequate proof must be furnished
that the openings of the pitot tube have not plugged up during the
traverse period. This can be accomplished by comparing the velocity
head (p) measurement recorded at a selected traverse point
(readable p value) with a second p measurement
recorded after ``back purging'' with pressurized air to clean the
impact and static holes of the standard pitot tube. If the before and
[[Page 61790]]
after p measurements are within 5 percent, then the traverse
data are acceptable. Otherwise, the data should be rejected and the
traverse measurements redone. Note that the selected traverse point
should be one that demonstrates a readable p value. If ``back
purging'' at regular intervals is part of a routine procedure, then
comparative p measurements shall be conducted as above for the
last two traverse points that exhibit suitable p measurements.
6.2 Differential Pressure Gauge. An inclined manometer or
equivalent device. Most sampling trains are equipped with a 10 in.
(water column) inclined-vertical manometer, having 0.01 in.
H20 divisions on the 0 to 1 in. inclined scale, and 0.1 in.
H20 divisions on the 1 to 10 in. vertical scale. This type
of manometer (or other gauge of equivalent sensitivity) is satisfactory
for the measurement of p values as low as 1.27 mm (0.05 in.)
H20. However, a differential pressure gauge of greater
sensitivity shall be used (subject to the approval of the
Administrator), if any of the following is found to be true: (1) the
arithmetic average of all p readings at the traverse points in
the stack is less than 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H20; (2) for
traverses of 12 or more points, more than 10 percent of the individual
p readings are below 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H20; or (3)
for traverses of fewer than 12 points, more than one p reading
is below 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H20. Reference 18 (see Section
17.0) describes commercially available instrumentation for the
measurement of low-range gas velocities.
6.2.1 As an alternative to criteria (1) through (3) above,
Equation 2-1 (Section 12.2) may be used to determine the necessity of
using a more sensitive differential pressure gauge. If T is greater
than 1.05, the velocity head data are unacceptable and a more sensitive
differential pressure gauge must be used.
Note: If differential pressure gauges other than inclined
manometers are used (e.g., magnehelic gauges), their calibration
must be checked after each test series. To check the calibration of
a differential pressure gauge, compare p readings of the
gauge with those of a gauge-oil manometer at a minimum of three
points, approximately representing the range of p values in
the stack. If, at each point, the values of p as read by
the differential pressure gauge and gauge-oil manometer agree to
within 5 percent, the differential pressure gauge shall be
considered to be in proper calibration. Otherwise, the test series
shall either be voided, or procedures to adjust the measured
p values and final results shall be used, subject to the
approval of the Administrator.
6.3 Temperature Sensor. A thermocouple, liquid-filled bulb
thermometer, bimetallic thermometer, mercury-in-glass thermometer, or
other gauge capable of measuring temperatures to within 1.5 percent of
the minimum absolute stack temperature. The temperature sensor shall be
attached to the pitot tube such that the sensor tip does not touch any
metal; the gauge shall be in an interference-free arrangement with
respect to the pitot tube face openings (see Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-
4). Alternative positions may be used if the pitot tube-temperature
gauge system is calibrated according to the procedure of Section 10.0.
Provided that a difference of not more than 1 percent in the average
velocity measurement is introduced, the temperature gauge need not be
attached to the pitot tube. This alternative is subject to the approval
of the Administrator.
6.4 Pressure Probe and Gauge. A piezometer tube and mercury- or
water-filled U-tube manometer capable of measuring stack pressure to
within 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) Hg. The static tap of a standard type pitot
tube or one leg of a Type S pitot tube with the face opening planes
positioned parallel to the gas flow may also be used as the pressure
probe.
6.5 Barometer. A mercury, aneroid, or other barometer capable of
measuring atmospheric pressure to within 2.54 mm (0.1 in.) Hg.
Note: The barometric pressure reading may be obtained from a
nearby National Weather Service station. In this case, the station
value (which is the absolute barometric pressure) shall be requested
and an adjustment for elevation differences between the weather
station and sampling point shall be made at a rate of minus 2.5 mm
(0.1 in.) Hg per 30 m (100 ft) elevation increase or plus 2.5 mm
(0.1 in.) Hg per 30 m (100 ft.) for elevation decrease.
6.6 Gas Density Determination Equipment. Method 3 equipment, if
needed (see Section 8.6), to determine the stack gas dry molecular
weight, and Method 4 (reference method) or Method 5 equipment for
moisture content determination. Other methods may be used subject to
approval of the Administrator.
6.7 Calibration Pitot Tube. When calibration of the Type S pitot
tube is necessary (see Section 10.1), a standard pitot tube shall be
used for a reference. The standard pitot tube shall, preferably, have a
known coefficient, obtained either (1) directly from the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), Gaithersburg MD 20899,
(301) 975-2002, or (2) by calibration against another standard pitot
tube with an NIST-traceable coefficient. Alternatively, a standard
pitot tube designed according to the criteria given in Sections 6.7.1
through 6.7.5 below and illustrated in Figure 2-5 (see also References
7, 8, and 17 in Section 17.0) may be used. Pitot tubes designed
according to these specifications will have baseline coefficients of
0.99 0.01.
6.7.1 Standard Pitot Design.
6.7.1.1 Hemispherical (shown in Figure 2-5), ellipsoidal, or
conical tip.
6.7.1.2 A minimum of six diameters straight run (based upon D, the
external diameter of the tube) between the tip and the static pressure
holes.
6.7.1.3 A minimum of eight diameters straight run between the
static pressure holes and the centerline of the external tube,
following the 90 deg. bend.
6.7.1.4 Static pressure holes of equal size (approximately 0.1 D),
equally spaced in a piezometer ring configuration.
6.7.1.5 90 deg. bend, with curved or mitered junction.
6.8 Differential Pressure Gauge for Type S Pitot Tube Calibration.
An inclined manometer or equivalent. If the single-velocity calibration
technique is employed (see Section 10.1.2.3), the calibration
differential pressure gauge shall be readable to the nearest 0.127 mm
(0.005 in.) H20. For multivelocity calibrations, the gauge
shall be readable to the nearest 0.127 mm (0.005 in.) H20
for p values between 1.27 and 25.4 mm (0.05 and 1.00 in.)
H20, and to the nearest 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H20
for p values above 25.4 mm (1.00 in.) H20. A
special, more sensitive gauge will be required to read p
values below 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H20 (see Reference 18 in
Section 16.0).
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
8.1 Set up the apparatus as shown in Figure 2-1. Capillary tubing
or surge tanks installed between the manometer and pitot tube may be
used to dampen p fluctuations. It is recommended, but not
required, that a pretest leak-check be conducted as follows: (1) blow
through the pitot impact opening until at least 7.6 cm (3.0 in.)
H20 velocity head registers on the manometer; then, close
off the impact opening. The pressure shall remain stable for at least
15 seconds; (2) do the same for the static pressure side, except using
suction to obtain the minimum of 7.6 cm (3.0 in.) H20. Other
leak-check procedures, subject to the approval of the Administrator,
may be used.
8.2 Level and zero the manometer. Because the manometer level and
zero
[[Page 61791]]
may drift due to vibrations and temperature changes, make periodic
checks during the traverse (at least once per hour). Record all
necessary data on a form similar to that shown in Figure 2-6.
8.3 Measure the velocity head and temperature at the traverse
points specified by Method 1. Ensure that the proper differential
pressure gauge is being used for the range of p values
encountered (see Section 6.2). If it is necessary to change to a more
sensitive gauge, do so, and remeasure the p and temperature
readings at each traverse point. Conduct a post-test leak-check
(mandatory), as described in Section 8.1 above, to validate the
traverse run.
8.4 Measure the static pressure in the stack. One reading is
usually adequate.
8.5 Determine the atmospheric pressure.
8.6 Determine the stack gas dry molecular weight. For combustion
processes or processes that emit essentially CO2,
O2, CO, and N2, use Method 3. For processes
emitting essentially air, an analysis need not be conducted; use a dry
molecular weight of 29.0. For other processes, other methods, subject
to the approval of the Administrator, must be used.
8.7 Obtain the moisture content from Method 4 (reference method,
or equivalent) or from Method 5.
8.8 Determine the cross-sectional area of the stack or duct at the
sampling location. Whenever possible, physically measure the stack
dimensions rather than using blueprints. Do not assume that stack
diameters are equal. Measure each diameter distance to verify its
dimensions.
9.0 Quality Control
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quality control
Section measure Effect
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.1-10.4..................... Sampling Ensure accurate
equipment measurement of stack
calibration. gas flow rate,
sample volume.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Type S Pitot Tube. Before its initial use, carefully examine
the Type S pitot tube top, side, and end views to verify that the face
openings of the tube are aligned within the specifications illustrated
in Figures 2-2 and 2-3. The pitot tube shall not be used if it fails to
meet these alignment specifications. After verifying the face opening
alignment, measure and record the following dimensions of the pitot
tube: (a) the external tubing diameter (dimension Dt, Figure
2-2b); and (b) the base-to-opening plane distances (dimensions
PA and PB, Figure 2-2b). If Dt is
between 0.48 and 0.95 cm \3/16\ and \3/8\ in.), and if PA
and PB are equal and between 1.05 and 1.50 Dt,
there are two possible options: (1) the pitot tube may be calibrated
according to the procedure outlined in Sections 10.1.2 through 10.1.5,
or (2) a baseline (isolated tube) coefficient value of 0.84 may be
assigned to the pitot tube. Note, however, that if the pitot tube is
part of an assembly, calibration may still be required, despite
knowledge of the baseline coefficient value (see Section 10.1.1). If
Dt, PA, and PB are outside the
specified limits, the pitot tube must be calibrated as outlined in
Sections 10.1.2 through 10.1.5.
10.1.1 Type S Pitot Tube Assemblies. During sample and velocity
traverses, the isolated Type S pitot tube is not always used; in many
instances, the pitot tube is used in combination with other source-
sampling components (e.g., thermocouple, sampling probe, nozzle) as
part of an ``assembly.'' The presence of other sampling components can
sometimes affect the baseline value of the Type S pitot tube
coefficient (Reference 9 in Section 17.0); therefore, an assigned (or
otherwise known) baseline coefficient value may or may not be valid for
a given assembly. The baseline and assembly coefficient values will be
identical only when the relative placement of the components in the
assembly is such that aerodynamic interference effects are eliminated.
Figures 2-4, 2-7, and 2-8 illustrate interference-free component
arrangements for Type S pitot tubes having external tubing diameters
between 0.48 and 0.95 cm (\3/16\ and \3/8\ in.). Type S pitot tube
assemblies that fail to meet any or all of the specifications of
Figures 2-4, 2-7, and 2-8 shall be calibrated according to the
procedure outlined in Sections 10.1.2 through 10.1.5, and prior to
calibration, the values of the intercomponent spacings (pitot-nozzle,
pitot-thermocouple, pitot-probe sheath) shall be measured and recorded.
Note: Do not use a Type S pitot tube assembly that is
constructed such that the impact pressure opening plane of the pitot
tube is below the entry plane of the nozzle (see Figure 2-6B).
10.1.2 Calibration Setup. If the Type S pitot tube is to be
calibrated, one leg of the tube shall be permanently marked A, and the
other, B. Calibration shall be performed in a flow system having the
following essential design features:
10.1.2.1 The flowing gas stream must be confined to a duct of
definite cross-sectional area, either circular or rectangular. For
circular cross sections, the minimum duct diameter shall be 30.48 cm
(12 in.); for rectangular cross sections, the width (shorter side)
shall be at least 25.4 cm (10 in.).
10.1.2.2 The cross-sectional area of the calibration duct must be
constant over a distance of 10 or more duct diameters. For a
rectangular cross section, use an equivalent diameter, calculated
according to Equation 2-2 (see Section 12.3), to determine the number
of duct diameters. To ensure the presence of stable, fully developed
flow patterns at the calibration site, or ``test section,'' the site
must be located at least eight diameters downstream and two diameters
upstream from the nearest disturbances.
Note: The eight- and two-diameter criteria are not absolute;
other test section locations may be used (subject to approval of the
Administrator), provided that the flow at the test site has been
demonstrated to be or found stable and parallel to the duct axis.
10.1.2.3 The flow system shall have the capacity to generate a
test-section velocity around 910 m/min (3,000 ft/min). This velocity
must be constant with time to guarantee steady flow during calibration.
Note that Type S pitot tube coefficients obtained by single-velocity
calibration at 910 m/min (3,000 ft/min) will generally be valid to
3 percent for the measurement of velocities above 300 m/min
(1,000 ft/min) and to 6 percent for the measurement of
velocities between 180 and 300 m/min (600 and 1,000 ft/min). If a more
precise correlation between the pitot tube coefficient,
(Cp), and velocity is desired, the flow system should have
the capacity to generate at least four distinct, time-invariant test-
section velocities covering the velocity range from 180 to 1,500 m/min
(600 to 5,000 ft/min), and calibration data shall be taken at regular
velocity intervals over this range (see References 9 and 14 in Section
17.0 for details).
10.1.2.4 Two entry ports, one for each of the standard and Type S
pitot tubes, shall be cut in the test section. The standard pitot entry
port shall be located slightly downstream of the Type S port, so that
the standard and Type S
[[Page 61792]]
impact openings will lie in the same cross-sectional plane during
calibration. To facilitate alignment of the pitot tubes during
calibration, it is advisable that the test section be constructed of
PlexiglasTM or some other transparent material.
10.1.3 Calibration Procedure. Note that this procedure is a
general one and must not be used without first referring to the special
considerations presented in Section 10.1.5. Note also that this
procedure applies only to single-velocity calibration. To obtain
calibration data for the A and B sides of the Type S pitot tube,
proceed as follows:
10.1.3.1 Make sure that the manometer is properly filled and that
the oil is free from contamination and is of the proper density.
Inspect and leak-check all pitot lines; repair or replace if necessary.
10.1.3.2 Level and zero the manometer. Switch on the fan, and
allow the flow to stabilize. Seal the Type S pitot tube entry port.
10.1.3.3 Ensure that the manometer is level and zeroed. Position
the standard pitot tube at the calibration point (determined as
outlined in Section 10.1.5.1), and align the tube so that its tip is
pointed directly into the flow. Particular care should be taken in
aligning the tube to avoid yaw and pitch angles. Make sure that the
entry port surrounding the tube is properly sealed.
10.1.3.4 Read pstd, and record its value in a
data table similar to the one shown in Figure 2-9. Remove the standard
pitot tube from the duct, and disconnect it from the manometer. Seal
the standard entry port.
10.1.3.5 Connect the Type S pitot tube to the manometer and leak-
check. Open the Type S tube entry port. Check the manometer level and
zero. Insert and align the Type S pitot tube so that its A side impact
opening is at the same point as was the standard pitot tube and is
pointed directly into the flow. Make sure that the entry port
surrounding the tube is properly sealed.
10.1.3.6 Read ps, and enter its value in the
data table. Remove the Type S pitot tube from the duct, and disconnect
it from the manometer.
10.1.3.7 Repeat Steps 10.1.3.3 through 10.1.3.6 until three pairs
of p readings have been obtained for the A side of the Type S
pitot tube.
10.1.3.8 Repeat Steps 10.1.3.3 through 10.1.3.7 for the B side of
the Type S pitot tube.
10.1.3.9 Perform calculations as described in Section 12.4. Use
the Type S pitot tube only if the values of A and
B are less than or equal to 0.01 and if the
absolute value of the difference between Cp(A) and
Cp(B) is 0.01 or less.
10.1.4 Special Considerations.
10.1.4.1 Selection of Calibration Point.
10.1.4.1.1 When an isolated Type S pitot tube is calibrated,
select a calibration point at or near the center of the duct, and
follow the procedures outlined in Section 10.1.3. The Type S pitot
coefficients measured or calculated, (i.e. Cp(A) and
Cp(B)) will be valid, so long as either: (1) the isolated
pitot tube is used; or (2) the pitot tube is used with other components
(nozzle, thermocouple, sample probe) in an arrangement that is free
from aerodynamic interference effects (see Figures 2-4, 2-7, and 2-8).
10.1.4.1.2 For Type S pitot tube-thermocouple combinations
(without probe assembly), select a calibration point at or near the
center of the duct, and follow the procedures outlined in Section
10.1.3. The coefficients so obtained will be valid so long as the pitot
tube-thermocouple combination is used by itself or with other
components in an interference-free arrangement (Figures 2-4, 2-7, and
2-8).
10.1.4.1.3 For Type S pitot tube combinations with complete probe
assemblies, the calibration point should be located at or near the
center of the duct; however, insertion of a probe sheath into a small
duct may cause significant cross-sectional area interference and
blockage and yield incorrect coefficient values (Reference 9 in Section
17.0). Therefore, to minimize the blockage effect, the calibration
point may be a few inches off-center if necessary. The actual blockage
effect will be negligible when the theoretical blockage, as determined
by a projected-area model of the probe sheath, is 2 percent or less of
the duct cross-sectional area for assemblies without external sheaths
(Figure 2-10a), and 3 percent or less for assemblies with external
sheaths (Figure 2-10b).
10.1.4.2 For those probe assemblies in which pitot tube-nozzle
interference is a factor (i.e., those in which the pitot-nozzle
separation distance fails to meet the specifications illustrated in
Figure 2-7A), the value of Cp(s) depends upon the amount of
free space between the tube and nozzle and, therefore, is a function of
nozzle size. In these instances, separate calibrations shall be
performed with each of the commonly used nozzle sizes in place. Note
that the single-velocity calibration technique is acceptable for this
purpose, even though the larger nozzle sizes (>0.635 cm or \1/4\ in.)
are not ordinarily used for isokinetic sampling at velocities around
910 m/min (3,000 ft/min), which is the calibration velocity. Note also
that it is not necessary to draw an isokinetic sample during
calibration (see Reference 19 in Section 17.0).
10.1.4.3 For a probe assembly constructed such that its pitot tube
is always used in the same orientation, only one side of the pitot tube
need be calibrated (the side which will face the flow). The pitot tube
must still meet the alignment specifications of Figure 2-2 or 2-3,
however, and must have an average deviation () value of 0.01
or less (see Section 10.1.4.4).
10.1.5 Field Use and Recalibration.
10.1.5.1 Field Use.
10.1.5.1.1 When a Type S pitot tube (isolated or in an assembly)
is used in the field, the appropriate coefficient value (whether
assigned or obtained by calibration) shall be used to perform velocity
calculations. For calibrated Type S pitot tubes, the A side coefficient
shall be used when the A side of the tube faces the flow, and the B
side coefficient shall be used when the B side faces the flow.
Alternatively, the arithmetic average of the A and B side coefficient
values may be used, irrespective of which side faces the flow.
10.1.5.1.2 When a probe assembly is used to sample a small duct,
30.5 to 91.4 cm (12 to 36 in.) in diameter, the probe sheath sometimes
blocks a significant part of the duct cross-section, causing a
reduction in the effective value of Cp(s). Consult Reference
9 (see Section 17.0) for details. Conventional pitot-sampling probe
assemblies are not recommended for use in ducts having inside diameters
smaller than 30.5 cm (12 in.) (see Reference 16 in Section 17.0).
10.1.5.2 Recalibration.
10.1.5.2.1 Isolated Pitot Tubes. After each field use, the pitot
tube shall be carefully reexamined in top, side, and end views. If the
pitot face openings are still aligned within the specifications
illustrated in Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3, it can be assumed that the
baseline coefficient of the pitot tube has not changed. If, however,
the tube has been damaged to the extent that it no longer meets the
specifications of Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3, the damage shall either be
repaired to restore proper alignment of the face openings, or the tube
shall be discarded.
10.1.5.2.2 Pitot Tube Assemblies. After each field use, check the
face opening alignment of the pitot tube, as in Section 10.1.5.2.1.
Also, remeasure the intercomponent spacings of the assembly. If the
intercomponent spacings have not changed and the face opening alignment
is acceptable, it can be assumed that the coefficient of the assembly
has not changed. If the face
[[Page 61793]]
opening alignment is no longer within the specifications of Figure 2-2
and Figure 2-3, either repair the damage or replace the pitot tube
(calibrating the new assembly, if necessary). If the intercomponent
spacings have changed, restore the original spacings, or recalibrate
the assembly.
10.2 Standard Pitot Tube (if applicable). If a standard pitot tube
is used for the velocity traverse, the tube shall be constructed
according to the criteria of Section 6.7 and shall be assigned a
baseline coefficient value of 0.99. If the standard pitot tube is used
as part of an assembly, the tube shall be in an interference-free
arrangement (subject to the approval of the Administrator).
10.3 Temperature Sensors.
10.3.1 After each field use, calibrate dial thermometers, liquid-
filled bulb thermometers, thermocouple-potentiometer systems, and other
sensors at a temperature within 10 percent of the average absolute
stack temperature. For temperatures up to 405 deg.C (761 deg.F), use
an ASTM mercury-in-glass reference thermometer, or equivalent, as a
reference. Alternatively, either a reference thermocouple and
potentiometer (calibrated against NIST standards) or thermometric fixed
points (e.g., ice bath and boiling water, corrected for barometric
pressure) may be used. For temperatures above 405 deg.C (761 deg.F),
use a reference thermocouple-potentiometer system calibrated against
NIST standards or an alternative reference, subject to the approval of
the Administrator.
10.3.2 The temperature data recorded in the field shall be
considered valid. If, during calibration, the absolute temperature
measured with the sensor being calibrated and the reference sensor
agree within 1.5 percent, the temperature data taken in the field shall
be considered valid. Otherwise, the pollutant emission test shall
either be considered invalid or adjustments (if appropriate) of the
test results shall be made, subject to the approval of the
Administrator.
10.4 Barometer. Calibrate the barometer used against a mercury
barometer.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see
Section 8.0).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant
figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final
calculation.
12.1 Nomenclature.
A = Cross-sectional area of stack, m\2\ (ft\2\).
Bws = Water vapor in the gas stream (from Method 4
(reference method) or Method 5), proportion by volume.
Cp = Pitot tube coefficient, dimensionless.
Cp(s) = Type S pitot tube coefficient, dimensionless.
Cp(std) = Standard pitot tube coefficient; use 0.99 if the
coefficient is unknown and the tube is designed according to the
criteria of Sections 6.7.1 to 6.7.5 of this method.
De = Equivalent diameter.
K = 0.127 mm H2O (metric units). 0.005 in. H2O
(English units).
Kp = Velocity equation constant.
L = Length.
Md = Molecular weight of stack gas, dry basis (see Section
8.6), g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
Ms = Molecular weight of stack gas, wet basis, g/g-mole (lb/
lb-mole).
n = Total number of traverse points.
Pbar = Barometric pressure at measurement site, mm Hg (in.
Hg).
Pg = Stack static pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Ps = Absolute stack pressure (Pbar +
Pg), mm Hg (in. Hg),
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
Qsd = Dry volumetric stack gas flow rate corrected to
standard conditions, dscm/hr (dscf/hr).
T = Sensitivity factor for differential pressure gauges.
Ts = Stack temperature, deg.C ( deg.F).
Ts(abs) = Absolute stack temperature, deg.K ( deg.R).
= 273 + Ts for metric units,
= 460 + Ts for English units.
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 deg.K (528
deg.R).
Vs = Average stack gas velocity, m/sec (ft/sec).
W = Width.
p = Velocity head of stack gas, mm H2O (in.
H20).
pi = Individual velocity head reading at traverse
point ``i'', mm (in.) H2O.
pstd = Velocity head measured by the standard pitot
tube, cm (in.) H2O.
ps = Velocity head measured by the Type S pitot
tube, cm (in.) H2O.
3600 = Conversion Factor, sec/hr.
18.0 = Molecular weight of water, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
12.2 Calculate T as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.045
12.3 Calculate De as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.046
12.4 Calibration of Type S Pitot Tube.
12.4.1 For each of the six pairs of p readings (i.e.,
three from side A and three from side B) obtained in Section 10.1.3,
calculate the value of the Type S pitot tube coefficient according to
Equation 2-3:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.047
12.4.2 Calculate Cp(A), the mean A-side coefficient,
and Cp(B), the mean B-side coefficient. Calculate the
difference between these two average values.
12.4.3 Calculate the deviation of each of the three A-side values
of Cp(s) from Cp(A), and the deviation of each of
the three B-side values of Cp(s) from Cp(B),
using Equation 2-4:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.048
12.4.4 Calculate the average deviation from the mean,
for both the A and B sides of the pitot tube. Use Equation 2-5:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.049
12.5 Molecular Weight of Stack Gas.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.050
12.6 Average Stack Gas Velocity.
[[Page 61794]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.051
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.052
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.053
12.7 Average Stack Gas Dry Volumetric Flow Rate.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.054
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Mark, L.S. Mechanical Engineers' Handbook. New York. McGraw-
Hill Book Co., Inc. 1951.
2. Perry, J.H., ed. Chemical Engineers' Handbook. New York.
McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc. 1960.
3. Shigehara, R.T., W.F. Todd, and W.S. Smith. Significance of
Errors in Stack Sampling Measurements. U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Research Triangle Park, N.C. (Presented at the Annual
Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association, St. Louis, MO.,
June 14-19, 1970).
4. Standard Method for Sampling Stacks for Particulate Matter.
In: 1971 Book of ASTM Standards, Part 23. Philadelphia, PA. 1971.
ASTM Designation D 2928-71.
5. Vennard, J.K. Elementary Fluid Mechanics. New York. John
Wiley and Sons, Inc. 1947.
6. Fluid Meters--Their Theory and Application. American Society
of Mechanical Engineers, New York, N.Y. 1959.
7. ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. 1972. p. 208.
8. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 26. 1974. p. 648.
9. Vollaro, R.F. Guidelines for Type S Pitot Tube Calibration.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, N.C.
(Presented at 1st Annual Meeting, Source Evaluation Society, Dayton,
OH, September 18, 1975.)
10. Vollaro, R.F. A Type S Pitot Tube Calibration Study. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch,
Research Triangle Park, N.C. July 1974.
11. Vollaro, R.F. The Effects of Impact Opening Misalignment on
the Value of the Type S Pitot Tube Coefficient. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle
Park, NC. October 1976.
12. Vollaro, R.F. Establishment of a Baseline Coefficient Value
for Properly Constructed Type S Pitot Tubes. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle
Park, NC. November 1976.
13. Vollaro, R.F. An Evaluation of Single-Velocity Calibration
Technique as a Means of Determining Type S Pitot Tube Coefficients.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch,
Research Triangle Park, NC. August 1975.
14. Vollaro, R.F. The Use of Type S Pitot Tubes for the
Measurement of Low Velocities. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, NC. November
1976.
15. Smith, Marvin L. Velocity Calibration of EPA Type Source
Sampling Probe. United Technologies Corporation, Pratt and Whitney
Aircraft Division, East Hartford, CT. 1975.
16. Vollaro, R.F. Recommended Procedure for Sample Traverses in
Ducts Smaller than 12 Inches in Diameter. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle
Park, NC. November 1976.
17. Ower, E. and R.C. Pankhurst. The Measurement of Air Flow,
4th Ed. London, Pergamon Press. 1966.
18. Vollaro, R.F. A Survey of Commercially Available
Instrumentation for the Measurement of Low-Range Gas Velocities.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch,
Research Triangle Park, NC. November 1976. (Unpublished Paper).
19. Gnyp, A.W., et al. An Experimental Investigation of the
Effect of Pitot Tube-Sampling Probe Configurations on the Magnitude
of the S Type Pitot Tube Coefficient for Commercially Available
Source Sampling Probes. Prepared by the University of Windsor for
the Ministry of the Environment, Toronto, Canada. February 1975.
[[Page 61795]]
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.055
[[Page 61796]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.056
[[Page 61797]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.057
[[Page 61798]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.058
[[Page 61799]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.059
PLANT-----------------------------------------------------------------
DATE------------------------------------------------------------------
RUN NO.---------------------------------------------------------------
STACK DIA. OR DIMENSIONS, m (in.)-------------------------------------
BAROMETRIC PRESS., mm Hg (in. Hg)-------------------------------------
CROSS SECTIONAL AREA, m\2\ (ft\2\)------------------------------------
OPERATORS-------------------------------------------------------------
PITOT TUBE I.D. NO.---------------------------------------------------
AVG. COEFFICIENT, Cp =------------------------------------------------
LAST DATE CALIBRATED--------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
SCHEMATIC OF STACK CROSS SECTION
[[Page 61800]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Stack temperature
Traverse Pt. No. Vel. Hd., p ----------------------------------------------- Pg mm Hg (in. Hg) (p)\1/2\
mm (in.) H2O Ts, deg.C ( deg.F) Ts, deg.K ( deg.R)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Average(1)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 2-6. Velocity Traverse Data
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.060
[[Page 61801]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.061
[[Page 61802]]
PITOT TUBE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER:-------------------------------------
DATE:-----------------------------------------------------------------
CALIBRATED BY:--------------------------------------------------------
``A'' Side Calibration
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pstd cm P(s) cm Deviation Cp(s)--
Run No. H2O (in H2O) H2O (in H2O) Cp(s) Cp(A)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cp, avg
(SIDE A)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
``B'' Side Calibration
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pstd cm P(s) cm Deviation Cp(s)--
Run No. H2O (in H2O) H2O (in H2O) Cp(s) Cp(B)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cp, avg
(SIDE B)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.062
[Cp, avg (side A)--Cp, avg (side B)]*
*Must be less than or equal to 0.01
Figure 2-9. Pitot Tube Calibration Data
[[Page 61803]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.063
Method 2A--Direct Measurement of Gas Volume Through Pipes and Small
Ducts
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling)
essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by
reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain
reliable results, persons using this method should have a thorough
knowledge of at least the following additional test methods: Method
1, Method 2.
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of gas flow
rates in pipes and small ducts, either in-line or at exhaust positions,
within the temperature range of 0 to 50 deg.C (32 to 122 deg.F).
1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A gas volume meter is used to measure gas volume directly.
Temperature and pressure measurements are made to allow correction of
the volume to standard conditions.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials,
operations, and equipment. This test method may
[[Page 61804]]
not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is
the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish
appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability
of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Specifications for the apparatus are given below. Any other
apparatus that has been demonstrated (subject to approval of the
Administrator) to be capable of meeting the specifications will be
considered acceptable.
6.1 Gas Volume Meter. A positive displacement meter, turbine
meter, or other direct measuring device capable of measuring volume to
within 2 percent. The meter shall be equipped with a temperature sensor
(accurate to within 2 percent of the minimum absolute
temperature) and a pressure gauge (accurate to within 2.5
mm Hg). The manufacturer's recommended capacity of the meter shall be
sufficient for the expected maximum and minimum flow rates for the
sampling conditions. Temperature, pressure, corrosive characteristics,
and pipe size are factors necessary to consider in selecting a suitable
gas meter.
6.2 Barometer. A mercury, aneroid, or other barometer capable of
measuring atmospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm Hg.
Note: In many cases, the barometric reading may be obtained from
a nearby National Weather Service station, in which case the station
value (which is the absolute barometric pressure) shall be requested
and an adjustment for elevation differences between the weather
station and sampling point shall be applied at a rate of minus 2.5
mm (0.1 in.) Hg per 30 m (100 ft) elevation increase or vice versa
for elevation decrease.
6.3 Stopwatch. Capable of measurement to within 1 second.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
8.1 Installation. As there are numerous types of pipes and small
ducts that may be subject to volume measurement, it would be difficult
to describe all possible installation schemes. In general, flange
fittings should be used for all connections wherever possible. Gaskets
or other seal materials should be used to assure leak-tight
connections. The volume meter should be located so as to avoid severe
vibrations and other factors that may affect the meter calibration.
8.2 Leak Test.
8.2.1 A volume meter installed at a location under positive
pressure may be leak-checked at the meter connections by using a liquid
leak detector solution containing a surfactant. Apply a small amount of
the solution to the connections. If a leak exists, bubbles will form,
and the leak must be corrected.
8.2.2 A volume meter installed at a location under negative
pressure is very difficult to test for leaks without blocking flow at
the inlet of the line and watching for meter movement. If this
procedure is not possible, visually check all connections to assure
leak-tight seals.
8.3 Volume Measurement.
8.3.1 For sources with continuous, steady emission flow rates,
record the initial meter volume reading, meter temperature(s), meter
pressure, and start the stopwatch. Throughout the test period, record
the meter temperatures and pressures so that average values can be
determined. At the end of the test, stop the timer, and record the
elapsed time, the final volume reading, meter temperature, and
pressure. Record the barometric pressure at the beginning and end of
the test run. Record the data on a table similar to that shown in
Figure 2A-1.
8.3.2 For sources with noncontinuous, non-steady emission flow
rates, use the procedure in Section 8.3.1 with the addition of the
following: Record all the meter parameters and the start and stop times
corresponding to each process cyclical or noncontinuous event.
9.0 Quality Control
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quality control
Section measure Effect
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.1-10.4..................... Sampling Ensure accurate
equipment measurement of stack
calibration. gas flow rate,
sample volume.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Volume Meter.
10.1.1 The volume meter is calibrated against a standard reference
meter prior to its initial use in the field. The reference meter is a
spirometer or liquid displacement meter with a capacity consistent with
that of the test meter.
10.1.2 Alternatively, a calibrated, standard pitot may be used as
the reference meter in conjunction with a wind tunnel assembly. Attach
the test meter to the wind tunnel so that the total flow passes through
the test meter. For each calibration run, conduct a 4-point traverse
along one stack diameter at a position at least eight diameters of
straight tunnel downstream and two diameters upstream of any bend,
inlet, or air mover. Determine the traverse point locations as
specified in Method 1. Calculate the reference volume using the
velocity values following the procedure in Method 2, the wind tunnel
cross-sectional area, and the run time.
10.1.3 Set up the test meter in a configuration similar to that
used in the field installation (i.e., in relation to the flow moving
device). Connect the temperature sensor and pressure gauge as they are
to be used in the field. Connect the reference meter at the inlet of
the flow line, if appropriate for the meter, and begin gas flow through
the system to condition the meters. During this conditioning operation,
check the system for leaks.
10.1.4 The calibration shall be performed during at least three
different flow rates. The calibration flow rates shall be about 0.3,
0.6, and 0.9 times the rated maximum flow rate of the test meter.
10.1.5 For each calibration run, the data to be collected include:
reference meter initial and final volume readings, the test meter
initial and final volume reading, meter average temperature and
pressure, barometric pressure, and run time. Repeat the runs at each
flow rate at least three times.
10.1.6 Calculate the test meter calibration coefficient as
indicated in Section 12.2.
10.1.7 Compare the three Ym values at each of the flow
rates tested and determine the maximum and minimum values. The
difference between the maximum and minimum values at each flow rate
should be no greater than 0.030. Extra runs may be required to complete
this requirement. If this specification cannot be met in six successive
runs, the test meter is not suitable for use. In addition, the meter
coefficients should be between 0.95 and 1.05. If these specifications
are met at all the flow rates, average all the Ym values
from runs meeting the specifications to obtain an average meter
calibration coefficient, Ym.
10.1.8 The procedure above shall be performed at least once for
each volume meter. Thereafter, an abbreviated calibration check shall
be completed
[[Page 61805]]
following each field test. The calibration of the volume meter shall be
checked with the meter pressure set at the average value encountered
during the field test. Three calibration checks (runs) shall be
performed using this average flow rate value. Calculate the average
value of the calibration factor. If the calibration has changed by more
than 5 percent, recalibrate the meter over the full range of flow as
described above.
Note: If the volume meter calibration coefficient values
obtained before and after a test series differ by more than 5
percent, the test series shall either be voided, or calculations for
the test series shall be performed using whichever meter coefficient
value (i.e., before or after) gives the greater value of pollutant
emission rate.
10.2 Temperature Sensor. After each test series, check the
temperature sensor at ambient temperature. Use an American Society for
Testing and Materials (ASTM) mercury-in-glass reference thermometer, or
equivalent, as a reference. If the sensor being checked agrees within 2
percent (absolute temperature) of the reference, the temperature data
collected in the field shall be considered valid. Otherwise, the test
data shall be considered invalid or adjustments of the results shall be
made, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
10.3 Barometer. Calibrate the barometer used against a mercury
barometer prior to the field test.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see
Section 8.0).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra decimal figure
beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final
calculation.
12.1 Nomenclature.
f = Final reading.
i = Initial reading.
Pbar = Barometric pressure, mm Hg.
Pg = Average static pressure in volume meter, mm Hg.
Qs = Gas flow rate, m3/min, standard conditions.
s = Standard conditions, 20 deg.C and 760 mm Hg.
Tr = Reference meter average temperature, deg.K ( deg.R).
Tm = Test meter average temperature, deg.K ( deg.R).
Vr = Reference meter volume reading, m3.
Vm = Test meter volume reading, m3.
Ym = Test meter calibration coefficient, dimensionless.
= Elapsed test period time, min.
12.2 Test Meter Calibration Coefficient.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.064
12.3 Volume.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.065
12.4 Gas Flow Rate.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.066
13.0 Method Performance. [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention. [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management. [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Rom, Jerome J. Maintenance, Calibration, and Operation of
Isokinetic Source Sampling Equipment. U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. APTD-0576. March
1972.
2. Wortman, Martin, R. Vollaro, and P.R. Westlin. Dry Gas Volume
Meter Calibrations. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. Vol. 2,
No. 2. May 1977.
3. Westlin, P.R., and R.T. Shigehara. Procedure for Calibrating
and Using Dry Gas Volume Meters as Calibration Standards. Source
Evaluation Society Newsletter. Vol. 3, No. 1. February 1978.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Method 2B--Determination of Exhaust Gas Volume Flow Rate From
Gasoline Vapor Incinerators
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and
analytical) essential to its performance. Some material is
incorporated by reference from other methods in this part.
Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method
should also have a thorough knowledge of at least the following
additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 2A, Method 10,
Method 25A, Method 25B.
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of exhaust
volume flow rate from incinerators that process gasoline vapors
consisting primarily of alkanes, alkenes, and/or arenes (aromatic
hydrocarbons). It is assumed that the amount of auxiliary fuel is
negligible.
1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Organic carbon concentration and volume flow rate are measured
at the incinerator inlet using either Method 25A or Method 25B and
Method 2A, respectively. Organic carbon, carbon dioxide
(CO2), and carbon monoxide (CO) concentrations are measured
at the outlet using either Method 25A or Method 25B and Method 10,
respectively. The ratio of total carbon at the incinerator inlet and
outlet is multiplied by the inlet volume to determine the exhaust
volume flow rate.
3.0 Definitions
Same as Section 3.0 of Method 10 and Method 25A.
4.0 Interferences
Same as Section 4.0 of Method 10.
[[Page 61806]]
5.0 Safety
5.1 This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and
equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems
associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and
determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to
performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as Section 6.0 of Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A and/or
Method 25B as applicable, with the addition of the following:
6.1 This analyzer must meet the specifications set forth in
Section 6.1.2 of Method 10, except that the span shall be 15 percent
CO2 by volume.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as Section 7.0 of Method 10 and Method 25A, with the following
addition and exceptions:
7.1 Carbon Dioxide Analyzer Calibration. CO2 gases
meeting the specifications set forth in Section 7 of Method 6C are
required.
7.2 Hydrocarbon Analyzer Calibration. Methane shall not be used as
a calibration gas when performing this method.
7.3 Fuel Gas. If Method 25B is used to measure the organic carbon
concentrations at both the inlet and exhaust, no fuel gas is required.
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
8.1 Pre-test Procedures. Perform all pre-test procedures (e.g.,
system performance checks, leak checks) necessary to determine gas
volume flow rate and organic carbon concentration in the vapor line to
the incinerator inlet and to determine organic carbon, carbon monoxide,
and carbon dioxide concentrations at the incinerator exhaust, as
outlined in Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A and/or Method 25B as
applicable.
8.2 Sampling. At the beginning of the test period, record the
initial parameters for the inlet volume meter according to the
procedures in Method 2A and mark all of the recorder strip charts to
indicate the start of the test. Conduct sampling and analysis as
outlined in Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A and/or Method 25B as
applicable. Continue recording inlet organic and exhaust
CO2, CO, and organic concentrations throughout the test.
During periods of process interruption and halting of gas flow, stop
the timer and mark the recorder strip charts so that data from this
interruption are not included in the calculations. At the end of the
test period, record the final parameters for the inlet volume meter and
mark the end on all of the recorder strip charts.
8.3 Post-test Procedures. Perform all post-test procedures (e.g.,
drift tests, leak checks), as outlined in Method 2A, Method 10, and
Method 25A and/or Method 25B as applicable.
9.0 Quality Control
Same as Section 9.0 of Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Section 10.0 of Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A.
Note: If a manifold system is used for the exhaust analyzers,
all the analyzers and sample pumps must be operating when the
analyzer calibrations are performed.
10.1 If an analyzer output does not meet the specifications of the
method, invalidate the test data for the period. Alternatively,
calculate the exhaust volume results using initial calibration data and
using final calibration data and report both resulting volumes. Then,
for emissions calculations, use the volume measurement resulting in the
greatest emission rate or concentration.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see
Section 8.0).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out the calculations, retaining at least one extra decimal
figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after the
final calculation.
12.1 Nomenclature.
Coe = Mean carbon monoxide concentration in system exhaust,
ppm.
(CO2)2 = Ambient carbon dioxide concentration,
ppm (if not measured during the test period, may be assumed to equal
300 ppm).
(CO2)e = Mean carbon dioxide concentration in
system exhaust, ppm.
HCe = Mean organic concentration in system exhaust as
defined by the calibration gas, ppm.
Hci = Mean organic concentration in system inlet as defined
by the calibration gas, ppm.
Ke = Hydrocarbon calibration gas factor for the exhaust
hydrocarbon analyzer, unitless [equal to the number of carbon atoms per
molecule of the gas used to calibrate the analyzer (2 for ethane, 3 for
propane, etc.)].
Ki = Hydrocarbon calibration gas factor for the inlet
hydrocarbon analyzer, unitless.
Ves = Exhaust gas volume, m\3\.
Vis = Inlet gas volume, m\3\.
Qes = Exhaust gas volume flow rate, m\3\/min.
Qis = Inlet gas volume flow rate, m\3\/min.
= Sample run time, min.
s = Standard conditions: 20 deg.C, 760 mm Hg.
12.2 Concentrations. Determine mean concentrations of inlet
organics, outlet CO2, outlet CO, and outlet organics
according to the procedures in the respective methods and the
analyzers' calibration curves, and for the time intervals specified in
the applicable regulations.
12.3 Exhaust Gas Volume. Calculate the exhaust gas volume as
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.067
[[Page 61807]]
12.4 Exhaust Gas Volume Flow Rate. Calculate the exhaust gas
volume flow rate as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.210
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as Section 16.0 of Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Method 2C--Determination of Gas Velocity and Volumetric Flow Rate
in Small Stacks or Ducts (Standard Pitot Tube)
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling)
essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by
reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain
reliable results, persons using this method should also have a
thorough knowledge of at least the following additional test
methods: Method 1, Method 2.
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of average
velocity and volumetric flow rate of gas streams in small stacks or
ducts. Limits on the applicability of this method are identical to
those set forth in Method 2, Section 1.0, except that this method is
limited to stationary source stacks or ducts less than about 0.30 meter
(12 in.) in diameter, or 0.071 m\2\ (113 in.\2\) in cross-sectional
area, but equal to or greater than about 0.10 meter (4 in.) in
diameter, or 0.0081 m\2\ (12.57 in.\2\) in cross-sectional area.
1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 The average gas velocity in a stack or duct is determined from
the gas density and from measurement of velocity heads with a standard
pitot tube.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and
equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems
associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and
determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to
performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as Method 2, Section 6.0, with the exception of the following:
6.1 Standard Pitot Tube (instead of Type S). A standard pitot tube
which meets the specifications of Section 6.7 of Method 2. Use a
coefficient of 0.99 unless it is calibrated against another standard
pitot tube with a NIST-traceable coefficient (see Section 10.2 of
Method 2).
6.2 Alternative Pitot Tube. A modified hemispherical-nosed pitot
tube (see Figure 2C-1), which features a shortened stem and enlarged
impact and static pressure holes. Use a coefficient of 0.99 unless it
is calibrated as mentioned in Section 6.1 above. This pitot tube is
useful in particulate liquid droplet-laden gas streams when a ``back
purge'' is ineffective.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
8.1 Follow the general procedures in Section 8.0 of Method 2,
except conduct the measurements at the traverse points specified in
Method 1A. The static and impact pressure holes of standard pitot tubes
are susceptible to plugging in particulate-laden gas streams.
Therefore, adequate proof that the openings of the pitot tube have not
plugged during the traverse period must be furnished; this can be done
by taking the velocity head (p) heading at the final traverse
point, cleaning out the impact and static holes of the standard pitot
tube by ``back-purging'' with pressurized air, and then taking another
p reading. If the p readings made before and after
the air purge are the same (within 5 percent) the traverse
is acceptable. Otherwise, reject the run. Note that if the p
at the final traverse point is unsuitably low, another point may be
selected. If ``back purging'' at regular intervals is part of the
procedure, then take comparative p readings, as above, for the
last two back purges at which suitably high p readings are
observed.
9.0 Quality Control
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quality control
Section measure Effect
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.0.......................... Sampling Ensure accurate
equipment measurement of stack
calibration. gas velocity head.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Method 2, Sections 10.2 through 10.4.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see
Section 8.0).
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
Same as Method 2, Section 12.0.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as Method 2, Section 16.0.
[[Page 61808]]
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.068
Method 2D--Measurement of Gas Volume Flow Rates in Small Pipes and
Ducts
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling)
essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by
reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain
reliable results, persons using this method should also have a
thorough knowledge of at least the following additional test
methods: Method 1, Method 2, and Method 2A.
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of the
volumetric flow rates of gas streams in small pipes and ducts. It can
be applied to intermittent or variable gas flows only with particular
caution.
1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 All the gas flow in the pipe or duct is directed through a
rotameter, orifice plate or similar device to measure flow rate or
pressure drop. The device has been previously calibrated in a manner
that insures its proper calibration for the gas being measured.
Absolute temperature and pressure measurements are made to allow
correction of volumetric flow rates to standard conditions.
3.0 Definitions. [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences. [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and
equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems
associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and
determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to
performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Specifications for the apparatus are given below. Any other
apparatus that has been demonstrated (subject to approval of the
Administrator) to be capable of meeting the specifications will be
considered acceptable.
6.1 Gas Metering Rate or Flow Element Device. A rotameter, orifice
plate, or other volume rate or pressure drop measuring device capable
of measuring the stack flow rate to within 5 percent. The
metering device shall be equipped with a temperature gauge accurate to
within 2 percent of the minimum absolute stack temperature
and a pressure gauge (accurate to within 5 mm Hg). The
capacity of the metering device shall be sufficient for the expected
maximum and minimum flow rates at the stack gas conditions. The
magnitude and variability of stack gas flow rate, molecular weight,
temperature, pressure, dewpoint, and corrosive characteristics, and
pipe or duct size are factors to consider in choosing a suitable
metering device.
6.2 Barometer. Same as Method 2, Section 6.5.
6.3 Stopwatch. Capable of measurement to within 1 second.
7.0 Reagents and Standards. [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
8.1 Installation and Leak Check. Same as Method 2A, Sections 8.1
and 8.2, respectively.
8.2 Volume Rate Measurement.
8.2.1 Continuous, Steady Flow. At least once an hour, record the
metering device flow rate or pressure drop reading, and the metering
device temperature and pressure. Make a minimum of 12 equally spaced
readings of each parameter during the test period. Record the
barometric pressure at the beginning and end of the test period. Record
the data on a table similar to that shown in Figure 2D-1.
8.2.2 Noncontinuous and Nonsteady Flow. Use volume rate devices
with particular caution. Calibration will be affected by variation in
stack gas temperature, pressure and molecular
[[Page 61809]]
weight. Use the procedure in Section 8.2.1 with the addition of the
following: Record all the metering device parameters on a time interval
frequency sufficient to adequately profile each process cyclical or
noncontinuous event. A multichannel continuous recorder may be used.
9.0 Quality Control
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quality control
Section measure Effect
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.0.......................... Sampling Ensure accurate
equipment measurement of stack
calibration. gas flow rate or
sample volume.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Method 2A, Section 10.0, with the following exception:
10.1 Gas Metering Device. Same as Method 2A, Section 10.1, except
calibrate the metering device with the principle stack gas to be
measured (examples: air, nitrogen) against a standard reference meter.
A calibrated dry gas meter is an acceptable reference meter. Ideally,
calibrate the metering device in the field with the actual gas to be
metered. For metering devices that have a volume rate readout,
calculate the test metering device calibration coefficient,
Ym, for each run shown in Equation 2D-2 Section 12.3.
10.2 For metering devices that do not have a volume rate readout,
refer to the manufacturer's instructions to calculate the
Vm2 corresponding to each Vr.
10.3 Temperature Gauge. Use the procedure and specifications in
Method 2A, Section 10.2. Perform the calibration at a temperature that
approximates field test conditions.
10.4 Barometer. Calibrate the barometer to be used in the field
test with a mercury barometer prior to the field test.
11.0 Analytical Procedure.
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see
Section 8.0).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature.
Pbar = Barometric pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pm = Test meter average static pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Qr = Reference meter volume flow rate reading, m\3\/min
(ft\3\/min).
Qm = Test meter volume flow rate reading, m\3\/min (ft\3\/
min).
Tr = Absolute reference meter average temperature, deg.K
( deg.R).
Tm = Absolute test meter average temperature, deg.K
( deg.R).
Kl = 0.3855 deg.K/mm Hg for metric units, = 17.65 deg.R/
in. Hg for English units.
12.2 Gas Flow Rate.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.069
12.3 Test Meter Device Calibration Coefficient. Calculation for
testing metering device calibration coefficient, Ym.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.070
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Spink, L.K. Principles and Practice of Flowmeter Engineering.
The Foxboro Company. Foxboro, MA. 1967.
2. Benedict, R.P. Fundamentals of Temperature, Pressure, and
Flow Measurements. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York, NY. 1969.
3. Orifice Metering of Natural Gas. American Gas Association.
Arlington, VA. Report No. 3. March 1978. 88 pp.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Plant-----------------------------------------------------------------
Date------------------------------------------------------------------
Run No.---------------------------------------------------------------
Sample location-------------------------------------------------------
Barometric pressure (mm Hg):
Start-----------------------------------------------------------------
Finish----------------------------------------------------------------
Operators-------------------------------------------------------------
Metering device No.---------------------------------------------------
Calibration coefficient-----------------------------------------------
Calibration gas-------------------------------------------------------
Date to recalibrate---------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Temperature
Time Flow rate reading Static Pressure ---------------------------------------
[mm Hg (in. Hg)] deg.C ( deg.F) deg.K ( deg.R)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Average
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 2D-1. Volume Flow Rate Measurement Data
[[Page 61810]]
Method 2E--Determination of Landfill Gas Production Flow Rate
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and
analytical) essential to its performance. Some material is
incorporated by reference from other methods in this part.
Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method
should also have a thorough knowledge of at least the following
additional test methods: Methods 2 and 3C.
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Applicability. This method applies to the measurement of
landfill gas (LFG) production flow rate from municipal solid waste
landfills and is used to calculate the flow rate of nonmethane organic
compounds (NMOC) from landfills.
1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Extraction wells are installed either in a cluster of three or
at five dispersed locations in the landfill. A blower is used to
extract LFG from the landfill. LFG composition, landfill pressures, and
orifice pressure differentials from the wells are measured and the
landfill gas production flow rate is calculated.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Since this method is complex, only experienced personnel
should perform the test. Landfill gas contains methane, therefore
explosive mixtures may exist at or near the landfill. It is advisable
to take appropriate safety precautions when testing landfills, such as
refraining from smoking and installing explosion-proof equipment.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Well Drilling Rig. Capable of boring a 0.61 m (24 in.)
diameter hole into the landfill to a minimum of 75 percent of the
landfill depth. The depth of the well shall not extend to the bottom of
the landfill or the liquid level.
6.2 Gravel. No fines. Gravel diameter should be appreciably larger
than perforations stated in Sections 6.10 and 8.2.
6.3 Bentonite.
6.4 Backfill Material. Clay, soil, and sandy loam have been found
to be acceptable.
6.5 Extraction Well Pipe. Minimum diameter of 3 in., constructed
of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), high density polyethylene (HDPE),
fiberglass, stainless steel, or other suitable nonporous material
capable of transporting landfill gas.
6.6 Above Ground Well Assembly. Valve capable of adjusting gas
flow, such as a gate, ball, or butterfly valve; sampling ports at the
well head and outlet; and a flow measuring device, such as an in-line
orifice meter or pitot tube. A schematic of the aboveground well head
assembly is shown in Figure 2E-1.
6.7 Cap. Constructed of PVC or HDPE.
6.8 Header Piping. Constructed of PVC or HDPE.
6.9 Auger. Capable of boring a 0.15-to 0.23-m (6-to 9-in.)
diameter hole to a depth equal to the top of the perforated section of
the extraction well, for pressure probe installation.
6.10 Pressure Probe. Constructed of PVC or stainless steel (316),
0.025-m (1-in.). Schedule 40 pipe. Perforate the bottom two-thirds. A
minimum requirement for perforations is slots or holes with an open
area equivalent to four 0.006-m (\1/4\-in.) diameter holes spaced
90 deg. apart every 0.15 m (6 in.).
6.11 Blower and Flare Assembly. Explosion-proof blower, capable of
extracting LFG at a flow rate of 8.5 m 3/min (300 ft
3/min), a water knockout, and flare or incinerator.
6.12 Standard Pitot Tube and Differential Pressure Gauge for Flow
Rate Calibration with Standard Pitot. Same as Method 2, Sections 6.7
and 6.8.
6.13 Orifice Meter. Orifice plate, pressure tabs, and pressure
measuring device to measure the LFG flow rate.
6.14 Barometer. Same as Method 4, Section 6.1.5.
6.15 Differential Pressure Gauge. Water-filled U-tube manometer or
equivalent, capable of measuring within 0.02 mm Hg (0.01 in.
H2O), for measuring the pressure of the pressure probes.
7.0 Reagents and Standards. Not Applicable
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Placement of Extraction Wells. The landfill owner or operator
may install a single cluster of three extraction wells in a test area
or space five equal-volume wells over the landfill. The cluster wells
are recommended but may be used only if the composition, age of the
refuse, and the landfill depth of the test area can be determined.
8.1.1 Cluster Wells. Consult landfill site records for the age of
the refuse, depth, and composition of various sections of the landfill.
Select an area near the perimeter of the landfill with a depth equal to
or greater than the average depth of the landfill and with the average
age of the refuse between 2 and 10 years old. Avoid areas known to
contain nondecomposable materials, such as concrete and asbestos.
Locate the cluster wells as shown in Figure 2E-2.
8.1.1.1 The age of the refuse in a test area will not be uniform,
so calculate a weighted average age of the refuse as shown in Section
12.2.
8.1.2 Equal Volume Wells. Divide the sections of the landfill that
are at least 2 years old into five areas representing equal volumes.
Locate an extraction well near the center of each area.
8.2 Installation of Extraction Wells. Use a well drilling rig to
dig a 0.6 m (24 in.) diameter hole in the landfill to a minimum of 75
percent of the landfill depth, not to extend to the bottom of the
landfill or the liquid level. Perforate the bottom two thirds of the
extraction well pipe. A minimum requirement for perforations is holes
or slots with an open area equivalent to 0.01-m (0.5-in.) diameter
holes spaced 90 deg. apart every 0.1 to 0.2 m (4 to 8 in.). Place the
extraction well in the center of the hole and backfill with gravel to a
level 0.30 m (1 ft) above the perforated section. Add a layer of
backfill material 1.2 m (4 ft) thick. Add a layer of bentonite 0.9 m (3
ft) thick, and backfill the remainder of the hole with cover material
or material equal in permeability to the existing cover material. The
specifications for extraction well installation are shown in Figure 2E-
3.
8.3 Pressure Probes. Shallow pressure probes are used in the check
for infiltration of air into the landfill, and deep pressure probes are
use to determine the radius of influence. Locate pressure probes along
three radial arms approximately 120 deg. apart at distances of 3, 15,
30, and 45 m (10, 50, 100, and 150 ft) from the extraction well. The
tester has the option of locating additional pressure probes at
distances every 15 m (50 feet) beyond 45 m (150 ft). Example placements
of probes are shown in Figure 2E-4. The 15-, 30-, and 45-m, (50-, 100-,
and 150-ft) probes from each well, and any additional probes located
along the three radial arms (deep probes), shall
[[Page 61811]]
extend to a depth equal to the top of the perforated section of the
extraction wells. All other probes (shallow probes) shall extend to a
depth equal to half the depth of the deep probes.
8.3.1 Use an auger to dig a hole, 0.15- to 0.23-m (6-to 9-in.) in
diameter, for each pressure probe. Perforate the bottom two thirds of
the pressure probe. A minimum requirement for perforations is holes or
slots with an open area equivalent to four 0.006-m (0.25-in.) diameter
holes spaced 90 deg. apart every 0.15 m (6 in.). Place the pressure
probe in the center of the hole and backfill with gravel to a level
0.30 m (1 ft) above the perforated section. Add a layer of backfill
material at least 1.2 m (4 ft) thick. Add a layer of bentonite at least
0.3 m (1 ft) thick, and backfill the remainder of the hole with cover
material or material equal in permeability to the existing cover
material. The specifications for pressure probe installation are shown
in Figure 2E-5.
8.4 LFG Flow Rate Measurement. Place the flow measurement device,
such as an orifice meter, as shown in Figure 2E-1. Attach the wells to
the blower and flare assembly. The individual wells may be ducted to a
common header so that a single blower, flare assembly, and flow meter
may be used. Use the procedures in Section 10.1 to calibrate the flow
meter.
8.5 Leak-Check. A leak-check of the above ground system is
required for accurate flow rate measurements and for safety. Sample LFG
at the well head sample port and at the outlet sample port. Use Method
3C to determine nitrogen (N2) concentrations. Determine the
difference between the well head and outlet N2
concentrations using the formula in Section 12.3. The system passes the
leak-check if the difference is less than 10,000 ppmv.
8.6 Static Testing. Close the control valves on the well heads
during static testing. Measure the gauge pressure (Pg) at
each deep pressure probe and the barometric pressure (Pbar)
every 8 hours (hr) for 3 days. Convert the gauge pressure of each deep
pressure probe to absolute pressure using the equation in Section 12.4.
Record as Pi (initial absolute pressure).
8.6.1 For each probe, average all of the 8-hr deep pressure probe
readings (Pi) and record as Pia (average absolute
pressure). Pia is used in Section 8.7.5 to determine the
maximum radius of influence.
8.6.2 Measure the static flow rate of each well once during static
testing.
8.7 Short-Term Testing. The purpose of short-term testing is to
determine the maximum vacuum that can be applied to the wells without
infiltration of ambient air into the landfill. The short-term testing
is performed on one well at a time. Burn all LFG with a flare or
incinerator.
8.7.1 Use the blower to extract LFG from a single well at a rate
at least twice the static flow rate of the respective well measured in
Section 8.6.2. If using a single blower and flare assembly and a common
header system, close the control valve on the wells not being measured.
Allow 24 hr for the system to stabilize at this flow rate.
8.7.2 Test for infiltration of air into the landfill by measuring
the gauge pressures of the shallow pressure probes and using Method 3C
to determine the LFG N2 concentration. If the LFG
N2 concentration is less than 5 percent and all of the
shallow probes have a positive gauge pressure, increase the blower
vacuum by 3.7 mm Hg (2 in. H2O), wait 24 hr, and repeat the
tests for infiltration. Continue the above steps of increasing blower
vacuum by 3.7 mm Hg (2 in. H2O), waiting 24 hr, and testing
for infiltration until the concentration of N2 exceeds 5
percent or any of the shallow probes have a negative gauge pressure.
When this occurs,reduce the blower vacuum to the maximum setting at
which the N2 concentration was less than 5 percent and the
gauge pressures of the shallow probes are positive.
8.7.3 At this blower vacuum, measure atmospheric pressure
(Pbar) every 8 hr for 24 hr, and record the LFG flow rate
(Qs) and the probe gauge pressures (Pf) for all
of the probes. Convert the gauge pressures of the deep probes to
absolute pressures for each 8-hr reading at Qs as shown in
Section 12.4.
8.7.4 For each probe, average the 8-hr deep pressure probe
absolute pressure readings and record as Pfa (the final
average absolute pressure).
8.7.5 For each probe, compare the initial average pressure
(Pia) from Section 8.6.1 to the final average pressure
(Pfa). Determine the furthermost point from the well head
along each radial arm where Pfa Pia.
This distance is the maximum radius of influence (Rm), which
is the distance from the well affected by the vacuum. Average these
values to determine the average maximum radius of influence
(Rma).
8.7.6 Calculate the depth (Dst) affected by the
extraction well during the short term test as shown in Section 12.6. If
the computed value of Dst exceeds the depth of the landfill,
set Dst equal to the landfill depth.
8.7.7 Calculate the void volume (V) for the extraction well as
shown in Section 12.7.
8.7.8 Repeat the procedures in Section 8.7 for each well.
8.8 Calculate the total void volume of the test wells
(Vv) by summing the void volumes (V) of each well.
8.9 Long-Term Testing. The purpose of long-term testing is to
extract two void volumes of LFG from the extraction wells. Use the
blower to extract LFG from the wells. If a single Blower and flare
assembly and common header system are used, open all control valves and
set the blower vacuum equal to the highest stabilized blower vacuum
demonstrated by any individual well in Section 8.7. Every 8 hr, sample
the LFG from the well head sample port, measure the gauge pressures of
the shallow pressure probes, the blower vacuum, the LFG flow rate, and
use the criteria for infiltration in Section 8.7.2 and Method 3C to
test for infiltration. If infiltration is detected, do not reduce the
blower vacuum, instead reduce the LFG flow rate from the well by
adjusting the control valve on the well head. Adjust each affected well
individually. Continue until the equivalent of two total void volumes
(Vv) have been extracted, or until Vt =
2Vv.
8.9.1 Calculate Vt, the total volume of LFG extracted
from the wells, as shown in Section 12.8.
8.9.2 Record the final stabilized flow rate as Qf and
the gauge pressure for each deep probe. If, during the long term
testing, the flow rate does not stabilize, calculate Qf by
averaging the last 10 recorded flow rates.
8.9.3 For each deep probe, convert each gauge pressure to absolute
pressure as in Section 12.4. Average these values and record as
Psa. For each probe, compare Pia to
Psa. Determine the furthermost point from the well head
along each radial arm where Psa Pia.
This distance is the stabilized radius of influence. Average these
values to determine the average stabilized radius of influence
(Rsa).
8.10 Determine the NMOC mass emission rate using the procedures in
Section 12.9 through 12.15.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
[[Page 61812]]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quality control
Section measure Effect
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.1.......................... LFG flow rate Ensures accurate
meter measurement of LFG
calibration. flow rate and sample
volume
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 LFG Flow Rate Meter (Orifice) Calibration Procedure. Locate a
standard pitot tube in line with an orifice meter. Use the procedures
in Section 8, 12.5, 12.6, and 12.7 of Method 2 to determine the average
dry gas volumetric flow rate for at least five flow rates that bracket
the expected LFG flow rates, except in Section 8.1, use a standard
pitot tube rather than a Type S pitot tube. Method 3C may be used to
determine the dry molecular weight. It may be necessary to calibrate
more than one orifice meter in order to bracket the LFG flow rates.
Construct a calibration curve by plotting the pressure drops across the
orifice meter for each flow rate versus the average dry gas volumetric
flow rate in m\3\/min of the gas.
11.0 Procedures [Reserved]
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature.
A = Age of landfill, yr.
Aavg = Average age of the refuse tested, yr.
Ai = Age of refuse in the ith fraction, yr.
Ar = Acceptance rate, Mg/yr.
CNMOC = NMOC concentration, ppmv as hexane (CNMOC
= Ct/6).
Co = Concentration of N2 at the outlet, ppmv.
Ct = NMOC concentration, ppmv (carbon equivalent) from
Method 25C.
Cw = Concentration of N2 at the wellhead, ppmv.
D = Depth affected by the test wells, m.
Dst = Depth affected by the test wells in the short-term
test, m.
e = Base number for natural logarithms (2.718).
f = Fraction of decomposable refuse in the landfill.
fi = Fraction of the refuse in the ith section.
k = Landfill gas generation constant, yr-\1\.
Lo = Methane generation potential, m\3\/Mg.
Lo' = Revised methane generation potential to account for
the amount of nondecomposable material in the landfill, m\3\/Mg.
Mi = Mass of refuse in the ith section, Mg.
Mr = Mass of decomposable refuse affected by the test well,
Mg.
Pbar = Atmospheric pressure, mm Hg.
Pf = Final absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes
during short-term testing, mm Hg.
Pfa = Average final absolute pressure of the deep pressure
probes during short-term testing, mm Hg.
Pgf = final gauge pressure of the deep pressure probes, mm
Hg.
Pgi = Initial gauge pressure of the deep pressure probes, mm
Hg.
Pi = Initial absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes
during static testing, mm Hg.
Pia = Average initial absolute pressure of the deep pressure
probes during static testing, mm Hg.
Ps = Final absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes
during long-term testing, mm Hg.
Psa = Average final absolute pressure of the deep pressure
probes during long-term testing, mm Hg.
Qf = Final stabilized flow rate, m\3\/min.
Qi = LFG flow rate measured at orifice meter during the ith
interval, m\3\/min.
Qs = Maximum LFG flow rate at each well determined by short-
term test, m\3\/min.
Qt = NMOC mass emission rate, m\3\/min.
Rm = Maximum radius of influence, m.
Rma = Average maximum radius of influence, m.
Rs = Stabilized radius of influence for an individual well,
m.
Rsa = Average stabilized radius of influence, m.
ti = Age of section i, yr.
tt = Total time of long-term testing, yr.
tvi = Time of the ith interval (usually 8), hr.
V = Void volume of test well, m\3\.
Vr = Volume of refuse affected by the test well, m\3\.
Vt = Total volume of refuse affected by the long-term
testing, m\3\.
Vv = Total void volume affected by test wells, m\3\.
WD = Well depth, m.
= Refuse density, Mg/m\3\ (Assume 0.64 Mg/m\3\ if data are
unavailable).
12.2 Use the following equation to calculate a weighted average
age of landfill refuse.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.071
12.3 Use the following equation to determine the difference in
N2 concentrations (ppmv) at the well head and outlet
location.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.072
12.4 Use the following equation to convert the gauge pressure
(Pg) of each initial deep pressure probe to absolute
pressure (Pi).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.073
12.5 Use the following equation to convert the gauge pressures of
the deep probes to absolute pressures for each 8-hr reading at
Qs.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.074
12.6 Use the following equation to calculate the depth
(Dst) affected by the extraction well during the short-term
test.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.075
12.7 Use the following equation to calculate the void volume for
the extraction well (V).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.076
12.8 Use the following equation to calculate Vt, the
total volume of LFG extracted from the wells.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.077
12.9 Use the following equation to calculate the depth affected by
the test well. If using cluster wells, use the average depth of the
wells for WD. If the value of D is greater than the depth of the
landfill, set D equal to the landfill depth.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.078
12.10 Use the following equation to calculate the volume of refuse
affected by the test well.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.079
12.11 Use the following equation to calculate the mass affected by
the test well.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.080
12.12 Modify Lo to account for the nondecomposable
refuse in the landfill.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.081
12.13 In the following equation, solve for k (landfill gas
generation constant) by iteration. A suggested procedure is to select a
value for k, calculate the left side of the equation, and if not equal
to zero, select another value for k. Continue this process until the
left hand side of the equation equals zero, 0.001.
[[Page 61813]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.082
12.14 Use the following equation to determine landfill NMOC mass
emission rate if the yearly acceptance rate of refuse has been
consistent (10 percent) over the life of the landfill.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.083
12.15 Use the following equation to determine landfill NMOC mass
emission rate if the acceptance rate has not been consistent over the
life of the landfill.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.084
13.0 Method Performance. [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention. [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management. [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Same as Method 2, Appendix A, 40 CFR Part 60.
2. Emcon Associates, Methane Generation and Recovery from
Landfills. Ann Arbor Science, 1982.
3. The Johns Hopkins University, Brown Station Road Landfill Gas
Resource Assessment, Volume 1: Field Testing and Gas Recovery
Projections. Laurel, Maryland: October 1982.
4. Mandeville and Associates, Procedure Manual for Landfill
Gases Emission Testing.
5. Letter and attachments from Briggum, S., Waste Management of
North America, to Thorneloe, S., EPA. Response to July 28, 1988
request for additional information. August 18, 1988.
6. Letter and attachments from Briggum, S., Waste Management of
North America, to Wyatt, S., EPA. Response to December 7, 1988
request for additional information. January 16, 1989.
BILLING CODE 6560-50-C
[[Page 61814]]
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.085
[[Page 61815]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.086
[[Page 61816]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.087
[[Page 61817]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.088
[[Page 61818]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.089
BILLING CODE 6560-50-C
[[Page 61819]]
* * * * *
Method 3--Gas Analysis for the Determination of Dry Molecular
Weight
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling)
essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by
reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain
reliable results, persons using this method should also have a
thorough knowledge of Method 1.
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Analytes CAS No. Sensitivity
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oxygen (O2)....................... 7782-44-7 2,000 ppmv.
Nitrogen (N2)..................... 7727-37-9 N/A.
Carbon dioxide (CO2).............. 124-38-9 2,000 ppmv.
Carbon monoxide (CO).............. 630-08-0 N/A.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination
of CO2 and O2 concentrations and dry molecular
weight of a sample from an effluent gas stream of a fossil-fuel
combustion process or other process.
1.3 Other methods, as well as modifications to the procedure
described herein, are also applicable for all of the above
determinations. Examples of specific methods and modifications include:
(1) A multi-point grab sampling method using an Orsat analyzer to
analyze the individual grab sample obtained at each point; (2) a method
for measuring either CO2 or O2 and using
stoichiometric calculations to determine dry molecular weight; and (3)
assigning a value of 30.0 for dry molecular weight, in lieu of actual
measurements, for processes burning natural gas, coal, or oil. These
methods and modifications may be used, but are subject to the approval
of the Administrator. The method may also be applicable to other
processes where it has been determined that compounds other than
CO2, O2, carbon monoxide (CO), and nitrogen
(N2) are not present in concentrations sufficient to affect
the results.
1.4 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from a stack by one of the following
methods: (1) single-point, grab sampling; (2) single-point, integrated
sampling; or (3) multi-point, integrated sampling. The gas sample is
analyzed for percent CO2 and percent O2. For dry
molecular weight determination, either an Orsat or a Fyrite analyzer
may be used for the analysis.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Several compounds can interfere, to varying degrees, with the
results of Orsat or Fyrite analyses. Compounds that interfere with
CO2 concentration measurement include acid gases (e.g.,
sulfur dioxide, hydrogen chloride); compounds that interfere with
O2 concentration measurement include unsaturated
hydrocarbons (e.g., acetone, acetylene), nitrous oxide, and ammonia.
Ammonia reacts chemically with the O2 absorbing solution,
and when present in the effluent gas stream must be removed before
analysis.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials,
operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the
safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of
the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations
prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents.
5.2.1 A typical Orsat analyzer requires four reagents: a gas-
confining solution, CO2 absorbent, O2 absorbent,
and CO absorbent. These reagents may contain potassium hydroxide,
sodium hydroxide, cuprous chloride, cuprous sulfate, alkaline
pyrogallic acid, and/or chromous chloride. Follow manufacturer's
operating instructions and observe all warning labels for reagent use.
5.2.2 A typical Fyrite analyzer contains zinc chloride,
hydrochloric acid, and either potassium hydroxide or chromous chloride.
Follow manufacturer's operating instructions and observe all warning
labels for reagent use.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Note: As an alternative to the sampling apparatus and systems
described herein, other sampling systems (e.g., liquid displacement)
may be used, provided such systems are capable of obtaining a
representative sample and maintaining a constant sampling rate, and
are, otherwise, capable of yielding acceptable results. Use of such
systems is subject to the approval of the Administrator.
6.1 Grab Sampling (See Figure 3-1).
6.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel or borosilicate glass tubing equipped
with an in-stack or out-of-stack filter to remove particulate matter (a
plug of glass wool is satisfactory for this purpose). Any other
materials, resistant to temperature at sampling conditions and inert to
all components of the gas stream, may be used for the probe. Examples
of such materials may include aluminum, copper, quartz glass, and
Teflon.
6.1.2 Pump. A one-way squeeze bulb, or equivalent, to transport
the gas sample to the analyzer.
6.2 Integrated Sampling (Figure 3-2).
6.2.1 Probe. Same as in Section 6.1.1.
6.2.2 Condenser. An air-cooled or water-cooled condenser, or other
condenser no greater than 250 ml that will not remove O2,
CO2, CO, and N2, to remove excess moisture which
would interfere with the operation of the pump and flowmeter.
6.2.3 Valve. A needle valve, to adjust sample gas flow rate.
6.2.4 Pump. A leak-free, diaphragm-type pump, or equivalent, to
transport sample gas to the flexible bag. Install a small surge tank
between the pump and rate meter to eliminate the pulsation effect of
the diaphragm pump on the rate meter.
6.2.5 Rate Meter. A rotameter, or equivalent, capable of measuring
flow rate to 2 percent of the selected flow rate. A flow
rate range of 500 to 1000 ml/min is suggested.
6.2.6 Flexible Bag. Any leak-free plastic (e.g., Tedlar, Mylar,
Teflon) or plastic-coated aluminum (e.g., aluminized Mylar) bag, or
equivalent, having a capacity consistent with the selected flow rate
and duration of the test run. A capacity in the range of 55 to 90
liters (1.9 to 3.2 ft3) is suggested. To leak-check the bag,
connect it to a water manometer, and pressurize the bag to 5 to 10 cm
H2O (2 to 4 in. H2O). Allow to stand for 10
minutes. Any displacement in the water manometer indicates a leak. An
alternative leak-check method is to pressurize the bag to
[[Page 61820]]
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in.) H2O and allow to stand overnight. A
deflated bag indicates a leak.
6.2.7 Pressure Gauge. A water-filled U-tube manometer, or
equivalent, of about 30 cm (12 in.), for the flexible bag leak-check.
6.2.8 Vacuum Gauge. A mercury manometer, or equivalent, of at
least 760 mm (30 in.) Hg, for the sampling train leak-check.
6.3 Analysis. An Orsat or Fyrite type combustion gas analyzer.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Reagents. As specified by the Orsat or Fyrite-type combustion
analyzer manufacturer.
7.2 Standards. Two standard gas mixtures, traceable to National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) standards, to be used in
auditing the accuracy of the analyzer and the analyzer operator
technique:
7.2.1. Gas cylinder containing 2 to 4 percent O2 and 14
to 18 percent CO2.
7.2.2. Gas cylinder containing 2 to 4 percent CO2 and
about 15 percent O2.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Single Point, Grab Sampling Procedure.
8.1.1 The sampling point in the duct shall either be at the
centroid of the cross section or at a point no closer to the walls than
1.0 m (3.3 ft), unless otherwise specified by the Administrator.
8.1.2 Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 3-1, making sure all
connections ahead of the analyzer are tight. If an Orsat analyzer is
used, it is recommended that the analyzer be leak-checked by following
the procedure in Section 11.5; however, the leak-check is optional.
8.1.3 Place the probe in the stack, with the tip of the probe
positioned at the sampling point. Purge the sampling line long enough
to allow at least five exchanges. Draw a sample into the analyzer, and
immediately analyze it for percent CO2 and percent
O2 according to Section 11.2.
8.2 Single-Point, Integrated Sampling Procedure.
8.2.1 The sampling point in the duct shall be located as specified
in Section 8.1.1.
8.2.2 Leak-check (optional) the flexible bag as in Section 6.2.6.
Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 3-2. Just before sampling,
leak-check (optional) the train by placing a vacuum gauge at the
condenser inlet, pulling a vacuum of at least 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg),
plugging the outlet at the quick disconnect, and then turning off the
pump. The vacuum should remain stable for at least 0.5 minute. Evacuate
the flexible bag. Connect the probe, and place it in the stack, with
the tip of the probe positioned at the sampling point. Purge the
sampling line. Next, connect the bag, and make sure that all
connections are tight.
8.2.3 Sample Collection. Sample at a constant rate (10
percent). The sampling run should be simultaneous with, and for the
same total length of time as, the pollutant emission rate
determination. Collection of at least 28 liters (1.0 ft3) of
sample gas is recommended; however, smaller volumes may be collected,
if desired.
8.2.4 Obtain one integrated flue gas sample during each pollutant
emission rate determination. Within 8 hours after the sample is taken,
analyze it for percent CO2 and percent O2 using
either an Orsat analyzer or a Fyrite type combustion gas analyzer
according to Section 11.3.
Note: When using an Orsat analyzer, periodic Fyrite readings may
be taken to verify/confirm the results obtained from the Orsat.
8.3 Multi-Point, Integrated Sampling Procedure.
8.3.1 Unless otherwise specified in an applicable regulation, or
by the Administrator, a minimum of eight traverse points shall be used
for circular stacks having diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), a
minimum of nine shall be used for rectangular stacks having equivalent
diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), and a minimum of 12 traverse
points shall be used for all other cases. The traverse points shall be
located according to Method 1.
8.3.2 Follow the procedures outlined in Sections 8.2.2 through
8.2.4, except for the following: Traverse all sampling points, and
sample at each point for an equal length of time. Record sampling data
as shown in Figure 3-3.
9.0 Quality Control
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quality control
Section measure Effect
------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.2........................... Use of Fyrite to Ensures the accurate
confirm Orsat measurement of CO2
results. and O2.
10.1.......................... Periodic audit of Ensures that the
analyzer and analyzer is
operator operating properly
technique. and that the
operator performs
the sampling
procedure correctly
and accurately.
11.3.......................... Replicable Minimizes
analyses of experimental error.
integrated
samples.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Analyzer. The analyzer and analyzer operator's technique
should be audited periodically as follows: take a sample from a
manifold containing a known mixture of CO2 and
O2, and analyze according to the procedure in Section 11.3.
Repeat this procedure until the measured concentration of three
consecutive samples agrees with the stated value 0.5
percent. If necessary, take corrective action, as specified in the
analyzer users manual.
10.2 Rotameter. The rotameter need not be calibrated, but should
be cleaned and maintained according to the manufacturer's instruction.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Maintenance. The Orsat or Fyrite-type analyzer should be
maintained and operated according to the manufacturers specifications.
11.2 Grab Sample Analysis. Use either an Orsat analyzer or a
Fyrite-type combustion gas analyzer to measure O2 and
CO2 concentration for dry molecular weight determination,
using procedures as specified in the analyzer user's manual. If an
Orsat analyzer is used, it is recommended that the Orsat leak-check,
described in Section 11.5, be performed before this determination;
however, the check is optional. Calculate the dry molecular weight as
indicated in Section 12.0. Repeat the sampling, analysis, and
calculation procedures until the dry molecular weights of any three
grab samples differ from their mean by no more than 0.3 g/g-mole (0.3
lb/lb-mole). Average these three molecular weights, and report the
results to the nearest 0.1 g/g-mole (0.1 lb/lb-mole).
11.3 Integrated Sample Analysis. Use either an Orsat analyzer or a
Fyrite-type combustion gas analyzer to measure O2 and
CO2 concentration for dry molecular weight determination,
using procedures as specified in the analyzer user's manual. If an
Orsat analyzer is used, it is recommended that the Orsat leak-check,
described in Section 11.5, be performed before this determination;
however, the check is
[[Page 61821]]
optional. Calculate the dry molecular weight as indicated in Section
12.0. Repeat the analysis and calculation procedures until the
individual dry molecular weights for any three analyses differ from
their mean by no more than 0.3 g/g-mole (0.3 lb/lb-mole). Average these
three molecular weights, and report the results to the nearest 0.1 g/g-
mole (0.1 lb/lb-mole).
11.4 Standardization. A periodic check of the reagents and of
operator technique should be conducted at least once every three series
of test runs as outlined in Section 10.1.
11.5 Leak-Check Procedure for Orsat Analyzer. Moving an Orsat
analyzer frequently causes it to leak. Therefore, an Orsat analyzer
should be thoroughly leak-checked on site before the flue gas sample is
introduced into it. The procedure for leak-checking an Orsat analyzer
is as follows:
11.5.1 Bring the liquid level in each pipette up to the reference
mark on the capillary tubing, and then close the pipette stopcock.
11.5.2 Raise the leveling bulb sufficiently to bring the confining
liquid meniscus onto the graduated portion of the burette, and then
close the manifold stopcock.
11.5.3 Record the meniscus position.
11.5.4 Observe the meniscus in the burette and the liquid level in
the pipette for movement over the next 4 minutes.
11.5.5 For the Orsat analyzer to pass the leak-check, two
conditions must be met:
11.5.5.1 The liquid level in each pipette must not fall below the
bottom of the capillary tubing during this 4-minute interval.
11.5.5.2 The meniscus in the burette must not change by more than
0.2 ml during this 4-minute interval.
11.5.6 If the analyzer fails the leak-check procedure, check all
rubber connections and stopcocks to determine whether they might be the
cause of the leak. Disassemble, clean, and regrease any leaking
stopcocks. Replace leaking rubber connections. After the analyzer is
reassembled, repeat the leak-check procedure.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
12.1 Nomenclature.
Md = Dry molecular weight, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
%CO2 = Percent CO2 by volume, dry basis.
%O2 = Percent O2 by volume, dry basis.
%CO = Percent CO by volume, dry basis.
%N2 = Percent N2 by volume, dry basis.
0.280 = Molecular weight of N2 or CO, divided by 100.
0.320 = Molecular weight of O2 divided by 100.
0.440 = Molecular weight of CO2 divided by 100.
12.2 Nitrogen, Carbon Monoxide Concentration. Determine the
percentage of the gas that is N2 and CO by subtracting the
sum of the percent CO2 and percent O2 from 100
percent.
12.3 Dry Molecular Weight. Use Equation 3-1 to calculate the dry
molecular weight of the stack gas.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.090
Note: The above Equation 3-1 does not consider the effect on
calculated dry molecular weight of argon in the effluent gas. The
concentration of argon, with a molecular weight of 39.9, in ambient
air is about 0.9 percent. A negative error of approximately 0.4
percent is introduced. The tester may choose to include argon in the
analysis using procedures subject to approval of the Administrator.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Altshuller, A.P. Storage of Gases and Vapors in Plastic Bags.
International Journal of Air and Water Pollution. 6:75-81. 1963.
2. Conner, William D. and J.S. Nader. Air Sampling with Plastic
Bags. Journal of the American Industrial Hygiene Association.
25:291-297. 1964.
3. Burrell Manual for Gas Analysts, Seventh edition. Burrell
Corporation, 2223 Fifth Avenue, Pittsburgh, PA. 15219. 1951.
4. Mitchell, W.J. and M.R. Midgett. Field Reliability of the
Orsat Analyzer. Journal of Air Pollution Control Association.
26:491-495. May 1976.
5. Shigehara, R.T., R.M. Neulicht, and W.S. Smith. Validating
Orsat Analysis Data from Fossil Fuel-Fired Units. Stack Sampling
News. 4(2):21-26. August 1976.
[[Page 61822]]
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.091
[[Page 61823]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.092
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time Traverse point Q (liter/min) % Deviation a
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Average
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a % Dev.=[(Q-Qavg)/Qavg] x 100 (Must be >10%)
Figure 3-3. Sampling Rate Data
[[Page 61824]]
* * * * *
Method 3B--Gas Analysis for the Determination of Emission Rate
Correction Factor or Excess Air
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling)
essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by
reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain
reliable results, persons using this method should have a thorough
knowledge of at least the following additional test methods: Method
1 and 3.
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Analyte CAS No. Sensitivity
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oxygen (O2)....................... 7782-44-7 2,000 ppmv.
Carbon Dioxide (CO2).............. 124-38-9 2,000 ppmv.
Carbon Monoxide (CO).............. 630-08-0 N/A.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination
of O2, CO2, and CO concentrations in the effluent
from fossil-fuel combustion processes for use in excess air or emission
rate correction factor calculations. Where compounds other than
CO2, O2, CO, and nitrogen (N2) are
present in concentrations sufficient to affect the results, the
calculation procedures presented in this method must be modified,
subject to the approval of the Administrator.
1.3 Other methods, as well as modifications to the procedure
described herein, are also applicable for all of the above
determinations. Examples of specific methods and modifications include:
(1) A multi-point sampling method using an Orsat analyzer to analyze
individual grab samples obtained at each point, and (2) a method using
CO2 or O2 and stoichiometric calculations to
determine excess air. These methods and modifications may be used, but
are subject to the approval of the Administrator.
1.4 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from a stack by one of the following
methods: (1) Single-point, grab sampling; (2) single-point, integrated
sampling; or (3) multi-point, integrated sampling. The gas sample is
analyzed for percent CO2, percent O2, and, if
necessary, percent CO using an Orsat combustion gas analyzer.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Several compounds can interfere, to varying degrees, with the
results of Orsat analyses. Compounds that interfere with CO2
concentration measurement include acid gases (e.g., sulfur dioxide,
hydrogen chloride); compounds that interfere with O2
concentration measurement include unsaturated hydrocarbons (e.g.,
acetone, acetylene), nitrous oxide, and ammonia. Ammonia reacts
chemically with the O2 absorbing solution, and when present
in the effluent gas stream must be removed before analysis.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials,
operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the
safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of
the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations
prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. A typical Orsat analyzer requires four
reagents: a gas-confining solution, CO2 absorbent,
O2 absorbent, and CO absorbent. These reagents may contain
potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, cuprous chloride, cuprous
sulfate, alkaline pyrogallic acid, and/or chromous chloride. Follow
manufacturer's operating instructions and observe all warning labels
for reagent use.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Note: As an alternative to the sampling apparatus and systems
described herein, other sampling systems (e.g., liquid displacement)
may be used, provided such systems are capable of obtaining a
representative sample and maintaining a constant sampling rate, and
are, otherwise, capable of yielding acceptable results. Use of such
systems is subject to the approval of the Administrator.
6.1 Grab Sampling and Integrated Sampling. Same as in Sections 6.1
and 6.2, respectively for Method 3.
6.2 Analysis. An Orsat analyzer only. For low CO2 (less
than 4.0 percent) or high O2 (greater than 15.0 percent)
concentrations, the measuring burette of the Orsat must have at least
0.1 percent subdivisions. For Orsat maintenance and operation
procedures, follow the instructions recommended by the manufacturer,
unless otherwise specified herein.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Reagents. Same as in Method 3, Section 7.1.
7.2 Standards. Same as in Method 3, Section 7.2.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
Note: Each of the three procedures below shall be used only when
specified in an applicable subpart of the standards. The use of
these procedures for other purposes must have specific prior
approval of the Administrator. A Fyrite-type combustion gas analyzer
is not acceptable for excess air or emission rate correction factor
determinations, unless approved by the Administrator. If both
percent CO2 and percent O2 are measured, the
analytical results of any of the three procedures given below may
also be used for calculating the dry molecular weight (see Method
3).
8.1 Single-Point, Grab Sampling and Analytical Procedure.
8.1.1 The sampling point in the duct shall either be at the
centroid of the cross section or at a point no closer to the walls than
1.0 m (3.3 ft), unless otherwise specified by the Administrator.
8.1.2 Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 3-1 of Method 3,
making sure all connections ahead of the analyzer are tight. Leak-check
the Orsat analyzer according to the procedure described in Section 11.5
of Method 3. This leak-check is mandatory.
8.1.3 Place the probe in the stack, with the tip of the probe
positioned at the sampling point; purge the sampling line long enough
to allow at least five exchanges. Draw a sample into the analyzer. For
emission rate correction factor determinations, immediately analyze the
sample for percent CO2 or
[[Page 61825]]
percent O2, as outlined in Section 11.2. For excess air
determination, immediately analyze the sample for percent
CO2, O2, and CO, as outlined in Section 11.2, and
calculate excess air as outlined in Section 12.2.
8.1.4 After the analysis is completed, leak-check (mandatory) the
Orsat analyzer once again, as described in Section 11.5 of Method 3.
For the results of the analysis to be valid, the Orsat analyzer must
pass this leak-test before and after the analysis.
8.2 Single-Point, Integrated Sampling and Analytical Procedure.
8.2.1 The sampling point in the duct shall be located as specified
in Section 8.1.1.
8.2.2 Leak-check (mandatory) the flexible bag as in Section 6.2.6
of Method 3. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 3-2 of Method 3.
Just before sampling, leak-check (mandatory) the train by placing a
vacuum gauge at the condenser inlet, pulling a vacuum of at least 250
mm Hg (10 in. Hg), plugging the outlet at the quick disconnect, and
then turning off the pump. The vacuum should remain stable for at least
0.5 minute. Evacuate the flexible bag. Connect the probe, and place it
in the stack, with the tip of the probe positioned at the sampling
point; purge the sampling line. Next, connect the bag, and make sure
that all connections are tight.
8.2.3 Sample at a constant rate, or as specified by the
Administrator. The sampling run must be simultaneous with, and for the
same total length of time as, the pollutant emission rate
determination. Collect at least 28 liters (1.0 ft\3\) of sample gas.
Smaller volumes may be collected, subject to approval of the
Administrator.
8.2.4 Obtain one integrated flue gas sample during each pollutant
emission rate determination. For emission rate correction factor
determination, analyze the sample within 4 hours after it is taken for
percent CO2 or percent O2 (as outlined in Section
11.2).
8.3 Multi-Point, Integrated Sampling and Analytical Procedure.
8.3.1 Unless otherwise specified in an applicable regulation, or
by the Administrator, a minimum of eight traverse points shall be used
for circular stacks having diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), a
minimum of nine shall be used for rectangular stacks having equivalent
diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), and a minimum of 12 traverse
points shall be used for all other cases. The traverse points shall be
located according to Method 1.
8.3.2 Follow the procedures outlined in Sections 8.2.2 through
8.2.4, except for the following: Traverse all sampling points, and
sample at each point for an equal length of time. Record sampling data
as shown in Figure 3-3 of Method 3.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Data Validation Using Fuel Factor. Although in most instances,
only CO2 or O2 measurement is required, it is
recommended that both CO2 and O2 be measured to
provide a check on the quality of the data. The data validation
procedure of Section 12.3 is suggested.
Note: Since this method for validating the CO2 and
O2 analyses is based on combustion of organic and fossil
fuels and dilution of the gas stream with air, this method does not
apply to sources that (1) remove CO2 or O2
through processes other than combustion, (2) add O2
(e.g., oxygen enrichment) and N2 in proportions different
from that of air, (3) add CO2 (e.g., cement or lime
kilns), or (4) have no fuel factor, FO, values obtainable
(e.g., extremely variable waste mixtures). This method validates the
measured proportions of CO2 and O2 for fuel
type, but the method does not detect sample dilution resulting from
leaks during or after sample collection. The method is applicable
for samples collected downstream of most lime or limestone flue-gas
desulfurization units as the CO2 added or removed from
the gas stream is not significant in relation to the total
CO2 concentration. The CO2 concentrations from
other types of scrubbers using only water or basic slurry can be
significantly affected and would render the fuel factor check
minimally useful.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Analyzer. The analyzer and analyzer operator technique should
be audited periodically as follows: take a sample from a manifold
containing a known mixture of CO2 and O2, and
analyze according to the procedure in Section 11.3. Repeat this
procedure until the measured concentration of three consecutive samples
agrees with the stated value 0.5 percent. If necessary,
take corrective action, as specified in the analyzer users manual.
10.2 Rotameter. The rotameter need not be calibrated, but should
be cleaned and maintained according to the manufacturer's instruction.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Maintenance. The Orsat analyzer should be maintained
according to the manufacturers specifications.
11.2 Grab Sample Analysis. To ensure complete absorption of the
CO2, O2, or if applicable, CO, make repeated
passes through each absorbing solution until two consecutive readings
are the same. Several passes (three or four) should be made between
readings. (If constant readings cannot be obtained after three
consecutive readings, replace the absorbing solution.) Although in most
cases, only CO2 or O2 concentration is required,
it is recommended that both CO2 and O2 be
measured, and that the procedure in Section 12.3 be used to validate
the analytical data.
Note: Since this single-point, grab sampling and analytical
procedure is normally conducted in conjunction with a single-point,
grab sampling and analytical procedure for a pollutant, only one
analysis is ordinarily conducted. Therefore, great care must be
taken to obtain a valid sample and analysis.
11.3 Integrated Sample Analysis. The Orsat analyzer must be leak-
checked (see Section 11.5 of Method 3) before the analysis. If excess
air is desired, proceed as follows: (1) within 4 hours after the sample
is taken, analyze it (as in Sections 11.3.1 through 11.3.3) for percent
CO2, O2, and CO; (2) determine the percentage of
the gas that is N2 by subtracting the sum of the percent
CO2, percent O2, and percent CO from 100 percent;
and (3) calculate percent excess air, as outlined in Section 12.2.
11.3.1 To ensure complete absorption of the CO2,
O2, or if applicable, CO, follow the procedure described in
Section 11.2.
Note: Although in most instances only CO2 or
O2 is required, it is recommended that both
CO2 and O2 be measured, and that the
procedures in Section 12.3 be used to validate the analytical data.
11.3.2 Repeat the analysis until the following criteria are met:
11.3.2.1 For percent CO2, repeat the analytical
procedure until the results of any three analyses differ by no more
than (a) 0.3 percent by volume when CO2 is greater than 4.0
percent or (b) 0.2 percent by volume when CO2 is less than
or equal to 4.0 percent. Average three acceptable values of percent
CO2, and report the results to the nearest 0.2 percent.
11.3.2.2 For percent O2, repeat the analytical
procedure until the results of any three analyses differ by no more
than (a) 0.3 percent by volume when O2 is less than 15.0
percent or (b) 0.2 percent by volume when O2 is greater than
or equal to 15.0 percent. Average the three acceptable values of
percent O2, and report the results to the nearest 0.1
percent.
11.3.2.3 For percent CO, repeat the analytical procedure until the
results of any three analyses differ by no more than 0.3 percent.
Average the three acceptable values of percent CO, and
[[Page 61826]]
report the results to the nearest 0.1 percent.
11.3.3 After the analysis is completed, leak-check (mandatory) the
Orsat analyzer once again, as described in Section 11.5 of Method 3.
For the results of the analysis to be valid, the Orsat analyzer must
pass this leak-test before and after the analysis.
11.4 Standardization. A periodic check of the reagents and of
operator technique should be conducted at least once every three series
of test runs as indicated in Section 10.1.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
12.1 Nomenclature. Same as Section 12.1 of Method 3 with the
addition of the following:
%EA = Percent excess air.
0.264 = Ratio of O2 to N2 in air, v/v.
12.2 Percent Excess Air. Determine the percentage of the gas that
is N2 by subtracting the sum of the percent CO2,
percent CO, and percent O2 from 100 percent. Calculate the
percent excess air (if applicable) by substituting the appropriate
values of percent O2, CO, and N2 into Equation
3B-1.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.093
Note: The equation above assumes that ambient air is used as the
source of O2 and that the fuel does not contain
appreciable amounts of N2 (as do coke oven or blast
furnace gases). For those cases when appreciable amounts of
N2 are present (coal, oil, and natural gas do not contain
appreciable amounts of N2) or when oxygen enrichment is
used, alternative methods, subject to approval of the Administrator,
are required.
12.3 Data Validation When Both CO2 and O2
Are Measured.
12.3.1 Fuel Factor, Fo. Calculate the fuel factor (if
applicable) using Equation 3B-2:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.094
Where:
%O2 = Percent O2 by volume, dry basis.
%CO2 = Percent CO2 by volume, dry basis.
20.9 = Percent O2 by volume in ambient air.
If CO is present in quantities measurable by this method, adjust
the O2 and CO2 values using Equations 3B-3 and
3B-4 before performing the calculation for Fo:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.095
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.096
Where:
%CO = Percent CO by volume, dry basis.
12.3.2 Compare the calculated Fo factor with the
expected Fo values. Table 3B-1 in Section 17.0 may be used
in establishing acceptable ranges for the expected Fo if the
fuel being burned is known. When fuels are burned in combinations,
calculate the combined fuel Fd and Fc factors (as
defined in Method 19, Section 12.2) according to the procedure in
Method 19, Sections 12.2 and 12.3. Then calculate the Fo
factor according to Equation 3B-5.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.097
12.3.3 Calculated Fo values, beyond the acceptable
ranges shown in this table, should be investigated before accepting the
test results. For example, the strength of the solutions in the gas
analyzer and the analyzing technique should be checked by sampling and
analyzing a known concentration, such as air; the fuel factor should be
reviewed and verified. An acceptability range of 12 percent
is appropriate for the Fo factor of mixed fuels with
variable fuel ratios. The level of the emission rate relative to the
compliance level should be considered in determining if a retest is
appropriate; i.e., if the measured emissions are much lower or much
greater than the compliance limit, repetition of the test would not
significantly change the compliance status of the source and would be
unnecessarily time consuming and costly.
13.0 Method Performance. [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention. [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management. [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as Method 3, Section 16.0.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Table 3B-1.--Fo Factors for Selected Fuels
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fuel type Fo range
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Coal:
Anthracite and lignite.............................. 1.016-1.130
Bituminous.......................................... 1.083-1.230
Oil:
Distillate.......................................... 1.260-1.413
Residual............................................ 1.210-1.370
Gas:
Natural............................................. 1.600-1.836
Propane............................................. 1.434-1.586
Butane.............................................. 1.405-1.553
Wood.................................................... 1.000-1.120
Wood bark............................................... 1.003-1.130
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* * * * *
Method 4--Determination of Moisture Content in Stack Gases
Note: This method does not include all the specifications (e.g.,
equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essential to
its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference from
other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results,
persons using this method should have a thorough knowledge of at
least the following additional test methods: Method 1, Method 5, and
Method 6.
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Analyte CAS No. Sensitivity
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Water vapor (H2O)................. 7732-18-5 N/A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination
of the moisture content of stack gas.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
[[Page 61827]]
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A gas sample is extracted at a constant rate from the source;
moisture is removed from the sample stream and determined either
volumetrically or gravimetrically.
2.2 The method contains two possible procedures: a reference
method and an approximation method.
2.2.1 The reference method is used for accurate determinations of
moisture content (such as are needed to calculate emission data). The
approximation method, provides estimates of percent moisture to aid in
setting isokinetic sampling rates prior to a pollutant emission
measurement run. The approximation method described herein is only a
suggested approach; alternative means for approximating the moisture
content (e.g., drying tubes, wet bulb-dry bulb techniques, condensation
techniques, stoichiometric calculations, previous experience, etc.) are
also acceptable.
2.2.2 The reference method is often conducted simultaneously with
a pollutant emission measurement run. When it is, calculation of
percent isokinetic, pollutant emission rate, etc., for the run shall be
based upon the results of the reference method or its equivalent. These
calculations shall not be based upon the results of the approximation
method, unless the approximation method is shown, to the satisfaction
of the Administrator, to be capable of yielding results within one
percent H2O of the reference method.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 The moisture content of saturated gas streams or streams that
contain water droplets, as measured by the reference method, may be
positively biased. Therefore, when these conditions exist or are
suspected, a second determination of the moisture content shall be made
simultaneously with the reference method, as follows: Assume that the
gas stream is saturated. Attach a temperature sensor [capable of
measuring to 1 deg.C (2 deg.F)] to the reference method
probe. Measure the stack gas temperature at each traverse point (see
Section 8.1.1.1) during the reference method traverse, and calculate
the average stack gas temperature. Next, determine the moisture
percentage, either by: (1) Using a psychrometric chart and making
appropriate corrections if the stack pressure is different from that of
the chart, or (2) using saturation vapor pressure tables. In cases
where the psychrometric chart or the saturation vapor pressure tables
are not applicable (based on evaluation of the process), alternative
methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, shall be used.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials,
operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the
safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of
the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations
prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Reference Method. A schematic of the sampling train used in
this reference method is shown in Figure
4-1.
6.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel or glass tubing, sufficiently heated
to prevent water condensation, and equipped with a filter, either in-
stack (e.g., a plug of glass wool inserted into the end of the probe)
or heated out-of-stack (e.g., as described in Method 5), to remove
particulate matter. When stack conditions permit, other metals or
plastic tubing may be used for the probe, subject to the approval of
the Administrator.
6.1.2 Condenser. Same as Method 5, Section 6.1.1.8.
6.1.3 Cooling System. An ice bath container, crushed ice, and
water (or equivalent), to aid in condensing moisture.
6.1.4 Metering System. Same as in Method 5, Section 6.1.1.9,
except do not use sampling systems designed for flow rates higher than
0.0283 m\3\/min (1.0 cfm). Other metering systems, capable of
maintaining a constant sampling rate to within 10 percent and
determining sample gas volume to within 2 percent, may be used, subject
to the approval of the Administrator.
6.1.5 Barometer and Graduated Cylinder and/or Balance. Same as
Method 5, Sections 6.1.2 and 6.2.5, respectively.
6.2. Approximation Method. A schematic of the sampling train used
in this approximation method is shown in Figure 4-2.
6.2.1 Probe. Same as Section 6.1.1.
6.2.2 Condenser. Two midget impingers, each with 30-ml capacity,
or equivalent.
6.2.3 Cooling System. Ice bath container, crushed ice, and water,
to aid in condensing moisture in impingers.
6.2.4 Drying Tube. Tube packed with new or regenerated 6- to 16-
mesh indicating-type silica gel (or equivalent desiccant), to dry the
sample gas and to protect the meter and pump.
6.2.5 Valve. Needle valve, to regulate the sample gas flow rate.
6.2.6 Pump. Leak-free, diaphragm type, or equivalent, to pull the
gas sample through the train.
6.2.7 Volume Meter. Dry gas meter, sufficiently accurate to
measure the sample volume to within 2 percent, and calibrated over the
range of flow rates and conditions actually encountered during
sampling.
6.2.8 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equivalent, to measure the flow
range from 0 to 3 liters/min (0 to 0.11 cfm).
6.2.9 Graduated Cylinder. 25-ml.
6.2.10 Barometer. Same as Method 5, Section 6.1.2.
6.2.11 Vacuum Gauge. At least 760-mm (30-in.) Hg gauge, to be used
for the sampling leak check.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport, and Storage
8.1 Reference Method. The following procedure is intended for a
condenser system (such as the impinger system described in Section
6.1.1.8 of Method 5) incorporating volumetric analysis to measure the
condensed moisture, and silica gel and gravimetric analysis to measure
the moisture leaving the condenser.
8.1.1 Preliminary Determinations.
8.1.1.1 Unless otherwise specified by the Administrator, a minimum
of eight traverse points shall be used for circular stacks having
diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), a minimum of nine points shall be
used for rectangular stacks having equivalent diameters less than 0.61
m (24 in.), and a minimum of twelve traverse points shall be used in
all other cases. The traverse points shall be located according to
Method 1. The use of fewer points is subject to the approval of the
Administrator. Select a suitable probe and probe length such that all
traverse points can be sampled. Consider sampling from opposite sides
of the stack (four total sampling ports) for large stacks, to permit
use of shorter probe lengths. Mark the probe with heat resistant tape
or by some other method to denote the proper distance into the stack or
duct for each sampling point.
8.1.1.2 Select a total sampling time such that a minimum total gas
volume of 0.60 scm (21 scf) will be collected, at a rate no greater
than 0.021 m\3\/min (0.75 cfm). When both moisture content and
pollutant emission rate are to be determined, the moisture
determination shall be simultaneous with, and for the same total length
of time as, the pollutant emission rate run, unless otherwise specified
in an applicable subpart of the standards.
[[Page 61828]]
8.1.2 Preparation of Sampling Train.
8.1.2.1 Place known volumes of water in the first two impingers;
alternatively, transfer water into the first two impingers and record
the weight of each impinger (plus water) to the nearest 0.5 g. Weigh
and record the weight of the silica gel to the nearest 0.5 g, and
transfer the silica gel to the fourth impinger; alternatively, the
silica gel may first be transferred to the impinger, and the weight of
the silica gel plus impinger recorded.
8.1.2.2 Set up the sampling train as shown in Figure 4-1. Turn on
the probe heater and (if applicable) the filter heating system to
temperatures of approximately 120 deg.C (248 deg.F), to prevent water
condensation ahead of the condenser. Allow time for the temperatures to
stabilize. Place crushed ice and water in the ice bath container.
8.1.3 Leak Check Procedures. It is recommended, but not required,
that the volume metering system and sampling train be leak-checked as
follows:
8.1.3.1 Metering System. Same as Method 5, Section 8.4.1.
8.1.3.2 Sampling Train. Disconnect the probe from the first
impinger or (if applicable) from the filter holder. Plug the inlet to
the first impinger (or filter holder), and pull a 380 mm (15 in.) Hg
vacuum. A lower vacuum may be used, provided that it is not exceeded
during the test. A leakage rate in excess of 4 percent of the average
sampling rate or 0.00057 m\3\/min (0.020 cfm), whichever is less, is
unacceptable. Following the leak check, reconnect the probe to the
sampling train.
8.1.4 Sampling Train Operation. During the sampling run, maintain
a sampling rate within 10 percent of constant rate, or as specified by
the Administrator. For each run, record the data required on a data
sheet similar to that shown in Figure 4-3. Be sure to record the dry
gas meter reading at the beginning and end of each sampling time
increment and whenever sampling is halted. Take other appropriate
readings at each sample point at least once during each time increment.
Note: When Method 4 is used concurrently with an isokinetic
method (e.g., Method 5) the sampling rate should be maintained at
isokinetic conditions rather than 10 percent of constant rate.
8.1.4.1 To begin sampling, position the probe tip at the first
traverse point. Immediately start the pump, and adjust the flow to the
desired rate. Traverse the cross section, sampling at each traverse
point for an equal length of time. Add more ice and, if necessary, salt
to maintain a temperature of less than 20 deg.C (68 deg.F) at the
silica gel outlet.
8.1.4.2 After collecting the sample, disconnect the probe from the
first impinger (or from the filter holder), and conduct a leak check
(mandatory) of the sampling train as described in Section 8.1.3.2.
Record the leak rate. If the leakage rate exceeds the allowable rate,
either reject the test results or correct the sample volume as in
Section 12.3 of Method 5.
8.2 Approximation Method.
Note: The approximation method described below is presented only
as a suggested method (see Section 2.0).
8.2.1 Place exactly 5 ml water in each impinger. Leak check the
sampling train as follows: Temporarily insert a vacuum gauge at or near
the probe inlet. Then, plug the probe inlet and pull a vacuum of at
least 250 mm (10 in.) Hg. Note the time rate of change of the dry gas
meter dial; alternatively, a rotameter (0 to 40 ml/min) may be
temporarily attached to the dry gas meter outlet to determine the
leakage rate. A leak rate not in excess of 2 percent of the average
sampling rate is acceptable.
Note: Release the probe inlet plug slowly before turning off the
pump.
8.2.2 Connect the probe, insert it into the stack, and sample at a
constant rate of 2 liters/min (0.071 cfm). Continue sampling until the
dry gas meter registers about 30 liters (1.1 ft\3\) or until visible
liquid droplets are carried over from the first impinger to the second.
Record temperature, pressure, and dry gas meter readings as indicated
by Figure 4-4.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quality control
Section measure Effect
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Section 8.1.1.4............... Leak rate of the Ensures the accuracy
sampling system of the volume of gas
cannot exceed sampled. (Reference
four percent of Method)
the average
sampling rate or
0.00057 m\3\/min
(0.20 cfm).
Section 8.2.1................. Leak rate of the Ensures the accuracy
sampling system of the volume of gas
cannot exceed sampled.
two percent of (Approximation
the average Method)
sampling rate.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, Section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Note: Maintain a laboratory log of all calibrations.
10.1 Reference Method. Calibrate the metering system, temperature
sensors, and barometer according to Method 5, Sections 10.3, 10.5, and
10.6, respectively.
10.2 Approximation Method. Calibrate the metering system and the
barometer according to Method 6, Section 10.1 and Method 5, Section
10.6, respectively.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Reference Method. Measure the volume of the moisture
condensed in each of the impingers to the nearest ml. Alternatively, if
the impingers were weighed prior to sampling, weigh the impingers after
sampling and record the difference in weight to the nearest 0.5 g.
Determine the increase in weight of the silica gel (or silica gel plus
impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g. Record this information (see example
data sheet, Figure 4-5), and calculate the moisture content, as
described in Section 12.0.
11.2 Approximation Method. Combine the contents of the two
impingers, and measure the volume to the nearest 0.5 ml.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out the following calculations, retaining at least one extra
significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures
after final calculation.
12.1 Reference Method.
12.1.1 Nomenclature.
Bws = Proportion of water vapor, by volume, in the gas
stream.
Mw = Molecular weight of water, 18.0 g/g-mole (18.0 lb/lb-
mole).
Pm = Absolute pressure (for this method, same as barometric
pressure) at the dry gas meter, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
R = Ideal gas constant, 0.06236 (mm Hg)(m\3\)/(g-mole)( deg.K) for
metric units and 21.85 (in. Hg)(ft\3\)/(lb-mole)( deg.R) for English
units.
Tm = Absolute temperature at meter, deg.K ( deg.R).
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 deg.K (528
deg.R).
[[Page 61829]]
Vf = Final volume of condenser water, ml.
Vi = Initial volume, if any, of condenser water, ml.
Vm = Dry gas volume measured by dry gas meter, dcm (dcf).
Vm(std) = Dry gas volume measured by the dry gas meter,
corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
Vwc(std) = Volume of water vapor condensed, corrected to
standard conditions, scm (scf).
Vwsg(std) = Volume of water vapor collected in silica gel,
corrected to standard conditions, scm (scf).
Wf = Final weight of silica gel or silica gel plus impinger,
g.
Wi = Initial weight of silica gel or silica gel plus
impinger, g.
Y = Dry gas meter calibration factor.
Vm = Incremental dry gas volume measured by dry gas
meter at each traverse point, dcm (dcf).
w = Density of water, 0.9982 g/ml (0.002201 lb/ml).
12.1.2 Volume of Water Vapor Condensed.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.098
Where:
K1 = 0.001333 m\3\/ml for metric units,
= 0.04706 ft\3\/ml for English units.
12.1.3 Volume of Water Collected in Silica Gel.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.099
Where:
K2 = 1.0 g/g for metric units,
= 453.6 g/lb for English units.
K3 = 0.001335 m\3\/g for metric units,
= 0.04715 ft\3\/g for English units.
12.1.4 Sample Gas Volume.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.100
Where:
K4 = 0.3855 deg.K/mm Hg for metric units,
= 17.64 deg.R/in. Hg for English units.
Note: If the post-test leak rate (Section 8.1.4.2) exceeds the
allowable rate, correct the value of Vm in Equation 4-3, as
described in Section 12.3 of Method 5.
12.1.5 Moisture Content.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.101
12.1.6 Verification of Constant Sampling Rate. For each time
increment, determine the Vm. Calculate the average.
If the value for any time increment differs from the average by more
than 10 percent, reject the results, and repeat the run.
12.1.7 In saturated or moisture droplet-laden gas streams, two
calculations of the moisture content of the stack gas shall be made,
one using a value based upon the saturated conditions (see Section
4.1), and another based upon the results of the impinger analysis. The
lower of these two values of Bws shall be considered
correct.
12.2 Approximation Method. The approximation method presented is
designed to estimate the moisture in the stack gas; therefore, other
data, which are only necessary for accurate moisture determinations,
are not collected. The following equations adequately estimate the
moisture content for the purpose of determining isokinetic sampling
rate settings.
12.2.1 Nomenclature.
Bwm = Approximate proportion by volume of water vapor in the
gas stream leaving the second impinger, 0.025.
Bws = Water vapor in the gas stream, proportion by volume.
Mw = Molecular weight of water, 18.0 g/g-mole (18.0 lb/lb-
mole).
Pm = Absolute pressure (for this method, same as barometric
pressure) at the dry gas meter, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
R = Ideal gas constant, 0.06236 [(mm Hg)(m\3\)]/[(g-mole)(K)] for
metric units and 21.85 [(in. Hg)(ft\3\)]/[(lb-mole)( deg.R)] for
English units.
Tm = Absolute temperature at meter, deg.K ( deg.R).
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 deg.K (528
deg.R).
Vf = Final volume of impinger contents, ml.
Vi = Initial volume of impinger contents, ml.
Vm = Dry gas volume measured by dry gas meter, dcm (dcf).
Vm(std) = Dry gas volume measured by dry gas meter,
corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
Vwc(std) = Volume of water vapor condensed, corrected to
standard conditions, scm (scf).
Y = Dry gas meter calibration factor.
w = Density of water, 0.09982 g/ml (0.002201 lb/
ml).
12.2.2 Volume of Water Vapor Collected.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.102
Where:
K5 = 0.001333 m\3\/ml for metric units,
= 0.04706 ft\3\/ml for English units.
12.2.3 Sample Gas Volume.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.103
Where:
K6 = 0.3855 deg.K/mm Hg for metric units,
= 17.64 deg.R/in. Hg for English units.
12.2.4 Approximate Moisture Content.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.104
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
The procedure described in Method 5 for determining moisture
content is acceptable as a reference method.
17.0 References
1. Air Pollution Engineering Manual (Second Edition). Danielson,
J.A. (ed.). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards. Research Triangle Park, NC.
Publication No. AP-40. 1973.
2. Devorkin, Howard, et al. Air Pollution Source Testing Manual.
Air Pollution Control District, Los Angeles, CA. November 1963.
3. Methods for Determination of Velocity, Volume, Dust and Mist
Content of Gases. Western Precipitation Division of Joy
Manufacturing Co. Los Angeles, CA. Bulletin WP-50. 1968.
[[Page 61830]]
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.105
[[Page 61831]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.106
[[Page 61832]]
Plant-----------------------------------------------------------------
Location--------------------------------------------------------------
Operator--------------------------------------------------------------
Date------------------------------------------------------------------
Run No.---------------------------------------------------------------
Ambient temperature---------------------------------------------------
Barometric pressure---------------------------------------------------
Probe Length----------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
SCHEMATIC OF STACK CROSS SECTION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gas sample temperature Temperature
Pressure Meter at dry gas meter of gas
Sampling Stack differential reading gas -------------------------- leaving
time temperature across sample Vm condenser
Traverse Pt. No. (), deg.C ( orifice volume m\3\ Inlet Tmin Outlet or last
min deg.F) meter out impinger
D>H mm (ft\3\) deg.F) deg.C ( deg.C (
(in.) H2O deg.F) deg.F)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Average
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Location--------------------------------------------------------------
Test------------------------------------------------------------------
Date------------------------------------------------------------------
Operator--------------------------------------------------------------
Barometric pressure---------------------------------------------------
Comments:-------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 4-3. Moisture Determination--Reference Method
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gas Volume through Rate meter setting m3/ Meter temperature
Clock time meter, (Vm), m3 (ft3) min (ft3/min) deg.C ( deg.F)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 4-4. Example Moisture Determination Field Data Sheet--
Approximation Method
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Impinger volume, Silica gel weight,
ml g
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Final
Initial
Difference
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 4-5. Analytical Data--Reference Method
Method 5--Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions From
Stationary Sources
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and
analytical) essential to its performance. Some material is
incorporated by reference from other methods in this part.
Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method
should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following
additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3.
[[Page 61833]]
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination
of PM emissions from stationary sources.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and
collected on a glass fiber filter maintained at a temperature of 120
14 deg.C (248 25 deg.F) or such other
temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the standards or
approved by the Administrator for a particular application. The PM
mass, which includes any material that condenses at or above the
filtration temperature, is determined gravimetrically after the removal
of uncombined water.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials,
operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the
safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of
the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations
prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. The following items are required for sample
collection:
6.1.1 Sampling Train. A schematic of the sampling train used in
this method is shown in Figure 5-1 in Section 18.0. Complete
construction details are given in APTD-0581 (Reference 2 in Section
17.0); commercial models of this train are also available. For changes
from APTD-0581 and for allowable modifications of the train shown in
Figure 5-1, see the following subsections.
Note: The operating and maintenance procedures for the sampling
train are described in APTD-0576 (Reference 3 in Section 17.0).
Since correct usage is important in obtaining valid results, all
users should read APTD-0576 and adopt the operating and maintenance
procedures outlined in it, unless otherwise specified herein.
6.1.1.1 Probe Nozzle. Stainless steel (316) or glass with a sharp,
tapered leading edge. The angle of taper shall be 30 deg.,
and the taper shall be on the outside to preserve a constant internal
diameter. The probe nozzle shall be of the button-hook or elbow design,
unless otherwise specified by the Administrator. If made of stainless
steel, the nozzle shall be constructed from seamless tubing. Other
materials of construction may be used, subject to the approval of the
Administrator. A range of nozzle sizes suitable for isokinetic sampling
should be available. Typical nozzle sizes range from 0.32 to 1.27 cm
(\1/8\ to \1/2\ in) inside diameter (ID) in increments of 0.16 cm (\1/
16\ in). Larger nozzles sizes are also available if higher volume
sampling trains are used. Each nozzle shall be calibrated, according to
the procedures outlined in Section 10.1.
6.1.1.2 Probe Liner. Borosilicate or quartz glass tubing with a
heating system capable of maintaining a probe gas temperature during
sampling of 120 14 deg.C (248 25 deg.F), or
such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the
standards or as approved by the Administrator for a particular
application. Since the actual temperature at the outlet of the probe is
not usually monitored during sampling, probes constructed according to
APTD-0581 and utilizing the calibration curves of APTD-0576 (or
calibrated according to the procedure outlined in APTD-0576) will be
considered acceptable. Either borosilicate or quartz glass probe liners
may be used for stack temperatures up to about 480 deg.C (900 deg.F);
quartz glass liners shall be used for temperatures between 480 and 900
deg.C (900 and 1,650 deg.F). Both types of liners may be used at
higher temperatures than specified for short periods of time, subject
to the approval of the Administrator. The softening temperature for
borosilicate glass is 820 deg.C (1500 deg.F), and for quartz glass it
is 1500 deg.C (2700 deg.F). Whenever practical, every effort should
be made to use borosilicate or quartz glass probe liners.
Alternatively, metal liners (e.g., 316 stainless steel, Incoloy 825 or
other corrosion resistant metals) made of seamless tubing may be used,
subject to the approval of the Administrator.
6.1.1.3 Pitot Tube. Type S, as described in Section 6.1 of Method
2, or other device approved by the Administrator. The pitot tube shall
be attached to the probe (as shown in Figure 5-1) to allow constant
monitoring of the stack gas velocity. The impact (high pressure)
opening plane of the pitot tube shall be even with or above the nozzle
entry plane (see Method 2, Figure 2-7) during sampling. The Type S
pitot tube assembly shall have a known coefficient, determined as
outlined in Section 10.0 of Method 2.
6.1.1.4 Differential Pressure Gauge. Inclined manometer or
equivalent device (two), as described in Section 6.2 of Method 2. One
manometer shall be used for velocity head (p) readings, and
the other, for orifice differential pressure readings.
6.1.1.5 Filter Holder. Borosilicate glass, with a glass frit
filter support and a silicone rubber gasket. Other materials of
construction (e.g., stainless steel, Teflon, or Viton) may be used,
subject to the approval of the Administrator. The holder design shall
provide a positive seal against leakage from the outside or around the
filter. The holder shall be attached immediately at the outlet of the
probe (or cyclone, if used).
6.1.1.6 Filter Heating System. Any heating system capable of
maintaining a temperature around the filter holder of 120
14 deg.C (248 25 deg.F) during sampling, or
such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the
standards or approved by the Administrator for a particular
application.
6.1.1.7 Temperature Sensor. A temperature sensor capable of
measuring temperature to within 3 deg.C (5.4 deg.F) shall
be installed so that the sensing tip of the temperature sensor is in
direct contact with the sample gas, and the temperature around the
filter holder can be regulated and monitored during sampling.
6.1.1.8 Condenser. The following system shall be used to determine
the stack gas moisture content: Four impingers connected in series with
leak-free ground glass fittings or any similar leak-free
noncontaminating fittings. The first, third, and fourth impingers shall
be of the Greenburg-Smith design, modified by replacing the tip with a
1.3 cm (\1/2\ in.) ID glass tube extending to about 1.3 cm (\1/2\ in.)
from the bottom of the flask. The second impinger shall be of the
Greenburg-Smith design with the standard tip. Modifications (e.g.,
using flexible connections between the impingers, using materials other
than glass, or using flexible vacuum lines to connect the filter holder
to the condenser) may be used, subject to the approval of the
Administrator. The first and second impingers shall contain known
quantities of water (Section 8.3.1), the third shall be empty, and the
fourth shall contain a known weight of silica gel, or equivalent
desiccant. A temperature sensor, capable of measuring temperature to
within 1 deg.C (2 deg.F) shall be placed at the outlet of the fourth
impinger for monitoring purposes. Alternatively, any system that cools
the sample gas stream and allows
[[Page 61834]]
measurement of the water condensed and moisture leaving the condenser,
each to within 1 ml or 1 g may be used, subject to the approval of the
Administrator. An acceptable technique involves the measurement of
condensed water either gravimetrically or volumetrically and the
determination of the moisture leaving the condenser by: (1) monitoring
the temperature and pressure at the exit of the condenser and using
Dalton's law of partial pressures; or (2) passing the sample gas stream
through a tared silica gel (or equivalent desiccant) trap with exit
gases kept below 20 deg.C (68 deg.F) and determining the weight gain.
If means other than silica gel are used to determine the amount of
moisture leaving the condenser, it is recommended that silica gel (or
equivalent) still be used between the condenser system and pump to
prevent moisture condensation in the pump and metering devices and to
avoid the need to make corrections for moisture in the metered volume.
Note: If a determination of the PM collected in the impingers is
desired in addition to moisture content, the impinger system
described above shall be used, without modification. Individual
States or control agencies requiring this information shall be
contacted as to the sample recovery and analysis of the impinger
contents.
6.1.1.9 Metering System. Vacuum gauge, leak-free pump, temperature
sensors capable of measuring temperature to within 3 deg.C (5.4
deg.F), dry gas meter (DGM) capable of measuring volume to within 2
percent, and related equipment, as shown in Figure 5-1. Other metering
systems capable of maintaining sampling rates within 10 percent of
isokinetic and of determining sample volumes to within 2 percent may be
used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. When the metering
system is used in conjunction with a pitot tube, the system shall allow
periodic checks of isokinetic rates.
6.1.1.10 Sampling trains utilizing metering systems designed for
higher flow rates than that described in APTD-0581 or APTD-0576 may be
used provided that the specifications of this method are met.
6.1.2 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid, or other barometer capable of
measuring atmospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in.).
Note: The barometric pressure reading may be obtained from a
nearby National Weather Service station. In this case, the station
value (which is the absolute barometric pressure) shall be requested
and an adjustment for elevation differences between the weather
station and sampling point shall be made at a rate of minus 2.5 mm
Hg (0.1 in.) per 30 m (100 ft) elevation increase or plus 2.5 mm Hg
(0.1 in) per 30 m (100 ft) elevation decrease.
6.1.3 Gas Density Determination Equipment. Temperature sensor and
pressure gauge, as described in Sections 6.3 and 6.4 of Method 2, and
gas analyzer, if necessary, as described in Method 3. The temperature
sensor shall, preferably, be permanently attached to the pitot tube or
sampling probe in a fixed configuration, such that the tip of the
sensor extends beyond the leading edge of the probe sheath and does not
touch any metal. Alternatively, the sensor may be attached just prior
to use in the field. Note, however, that if the temperature sensor is
attached in the field, the sensor must be placed in an interference-
free arrangement with respect to the Type S pitot tube openings (see
Method 2, Figure 2-4). As a second alternative, if a difference of not
more than 1 percent in the average velocity measurement is to be
introduced, the temperature sensor need not be attached to the probe or
pitot tube. (This alternative is subject to the approval of the
Administrator.)
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items are required for sample
recovery:
6.2.1 Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brushes. Nylon bristle brushes
with stainless steel wire handles. The probe brush shall have
extensions (at least as long as the probe) constructed of stainless
steel, Nylon, Teflon, or similarly inert material. The brushes shall be
properly sized and shaped to brush out the probe liner and nozzle.
6.2.2 Wash Bottles. Two Glass wash bottles are recommended.
Alternatively, polyethylene wash bottles may be used. It is recommended
that acetone not be stored in polyethylene bottles for longer than a
month.
6.2.3 Glass Sample Storage Containers. Chemically resistant,
borosilicate glass bottles, for acetone washes, 500 ml or 1000 ml.
Screw cap liners shall either be rubber-backed Teflon or shall be
constructed so as to be leak-free and resistant to chemical attack by
acetone. (Narrow mouth glass bottles have been found to be less prone
to leakage.) Alternatively, polyethylene bottles may be used.
6.2.4 Petri Dishes. For filter samples; glass or polyethylene,
unless otherwise specified by the Administrator.
6.2.5 Graduated Cylinder and/or Balance. To measure condensed
water to within 1 ml or 0.5 g. Graduated cylinders shall have
subdivisions no greater than 2 ml.
6.2.6 Plastic Storage Containers. Air-tight containers to store
silica gel.
6.2.7 Funnel and Rubber Policeman. To aid in transfer of silica
gel to container; not necessary if silica gel is weighed in the field.
6.2.8 Funnel. Glass or polyethylene, to aid in sample recovery.
6.3 Sample Analysis. The following equipment is required for
sample analysis:
6.3.1 Glass Weighing Dishes.
6.3.2 Desiccator.
6.3.3 Analytical Balance. To measure to within 0.1 mg.
6.3.4 Balance. To measure to within 0.5 g.
6.3.5 Beakers. 250 ml.
6.3.6 Hygrometer. To measure the relative humidity of the
laboratory environment.
6.3.7 Temperature Sensor. To measure the temperature of the
laboratory environment.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents are required for
sample collection:
7.1.1 Filters. Glass fiber filters, without organic binder,
exhibiting at least 99.95 percent efficiency (0.05 percent penetration)
on 0.3 micron dioctyl phthalate smoke particles. The filter efficiency
test shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM Method D 2986-71, 78,
or 95a (incorporated by reference--see Sec. 60.17). Test data from the
supplier's quality control program are sufficient for this purpose. In
sources containing SO2 or SO3, the filter
material must be of a type that is unreactive to SO2 or
SO3. Reference 10 in Section 17.0 may be used to select the
appropriate filter.
7.1.2 Silica Gel. Indicating type, 6 to 16 mesh. If previously
used, dry at 175 deg.C (350 deg.F) for 2 hours. New silica gel may be
used as received. Alternatively, other types of desiccants (equivalent
or better) may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
7.1.3 Water. When analysis of the material caught in the impingers
is required, deionized distilled water (to conform to ASTM D 1193-77 or
91 Type 3 (incorporated by reference--see Sec. 60.17)) shall be used.
Run blanks prior to field use to eliminate a high blank on test
samples.
7.1.4 Crushed Ice.
7.1.5 Stopcock Grease. Acetone-insoluble, heat-stable silicone
grease. This is not necessary if screw-on connectors with Teflon
sleeves, or similar, are used. Alternatively, other types of stopcock
grease may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
7.2 Sample Recovery. Acetone, reagent grade, 0.001
percent residue, in glass bottles, is required. Acetone from metal
containers generally has a high
[[Page 61835]]
residue blank and should not be used. Sometimes, suppliers transfer
acetone to glass bottles from metal containers; thus, acetone blanks
shall be run prior to field use and only acetone with low blank values
(0.001 percent) shall be used. In no case shall a blank
value of greater than 0.001 percent of the weight of acetone used be
subtracted from the sample weight.
7.3 Sample Analysis. The following reagents are required for
sample analysis:
7.3.1 Acetone. Same as in Section 7.2.
7.3.2 Desiccant. Anhydrous calcium sulfate, indicating type.
Alternatively, other types of desiccants may be used, subject to the
approval of the Administrator.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Pretest Preparation. It is suggested that sampling equipment
be maintained according to the procedures described in APTD-0576.
8.1.1 Place 200 to 300 g of silica gel in each of several air-
tight containers. Weigh each container, including silica gel, to the
nearest 0.5 g, and record this weight. As an alternative, the silica
gel need not be preweighed, but may be weighed directly in its impinger
or sampling holder just prior to train assembly.
8.1.2 Check filters visually against light for irregularities,
flaws, or pinhole leaks. Label filters of the proper diameter on the
back side near the edge using numbering machine ink. As an alternative,
label the shipping containers (glass or polyethylene petri dishes), and
keep each filter in its identified container at all times except during
sampling.
8.1.3 Desiccate the filters at 20 5.6 deg.C (68
10 deg.F) and ambient pressure for at least 24 hours.
Weigh each filter (or filter and shipping container) at intervals of at
least 6 hours to a constant weight (i.e., 0.5 mg change from
previous weighing). Record results to the nearest 0.1 mg. During each
weighing, the period for which the filter is exposed to the laboratory
atmosphere shall be less than 2 minutes. Alternatively (unless
otherwise specified by the Administrator), the filters may be oven
dried at 105 deg.C (220 deg.F) for 2 to 3 hours, desiccated for 2
hours, and weighed. Procedures other than those described, which
account for relative humidity effects, may be used, subject to the
approval of the Administrator.
8.2 Preliminary Determinations.
8.2.1 Select the sampling site and the minimum number of sampling
points according to Method 1 or as specified by the Administrator.
Determine the stack pressure, temperature, and the range of velocity
heads using Method 2; it is recommended that a leak check of the pitot
lines (see Method 2, Section 8.1) be performed. Determine the moisture
content using Approximation Method 4 or its alternatives for the
purpose of making isokinetic sampling rate settings. Determine the
stack gas dry molecular weight, as described in Method 2, Section 8.6;
if integrated Method 3 sampling is used for molecular weight
determination, the integrated bag sample shall be taken simultaneously
with, and for the same total length of time as, the particulate sample
run.
8.2.2 Select a nozzle size based on the range of velocity heads,
such that it is not necessary to change the nozzle size in order to
maintain isokinetic sampling rates. During the run, do not change the
nozzle size. Ensure that the proper differential pressure gauge is
chosen for the range of velocity heads encountered (see Section 8.3 of
Method 2).
8.2.3 Select a suitable probe liner and probe length such that all
traverse points can be sampled. For large stacks, consider sampling
from opposite sides of the stack to reduce the required probe length.
8.2.4 Select a total sampling time greater than or equal to the
minimum total sampling time specified in the test procedures for the
specific industry such that (l) the sampling time per point is not less
than 2 minutes (or some greater time interval as specified by the
Administrator), and (2) the sample volume taken (corrected to standard
conditions) will exceed the required minimum total gas sample volume.
The latter is based on an approximate average sampling rate.
8.2.5 The sampling time at each point shall be the same. It is
recommended that the number of minutes sampled at each point be an
integer or an integer plus one-half minute, in order to avoid
timekeeping errors.
8.2.6 In some circumstances (e.g., batch cycles) it may be
necessary to sample for shorter times at the traverse points and to
obtain smaller gas sample volumes. In these cases, the Administrator's
approval must first be obtained.
8.3 Preparation of Sampling Train.
8.3.1 During preparation and assembly of the sampling train, keep
all openings where contamination can occur covered until just prior to
assembly or until sampling is about to begin. Place 100 ml of water in
each of the first two impingers, leave the third impinger empty, and
transfer approximately 200 to 300 g of preweighed silica gel from its
container to the fourth impinger. More silica gel may be used, but care
should be taken to ensure that it is not entrained and carried out from
the impinger during sampling. Place the container in a clean place for
later use in the sample recovery. Alternatively, the weight of the
silica gel plus impinger may be determined to the nearest 0.5 g and
recorded.
8.3.2 Using a tweezer or clean disposable surgical gloves, place a
labeled (identified) and weighed filter in the filter holder. Be sure
that the filter is properly centered and the gasket properly placed so
as to prevent the sample gas stream from circumventing the filter.
Check the filter for tears after assembly is completed.
8.3.3 When glass probe liners are used, install the selected
nozzle using a Viton A O-ring when stack temperatures are less than 260
deg.C (500 deg.F) or a heat-resistant string gasket when temperatures
are higher. See APTD-0576 for details. Other connecting systems using
either 316 stainless steel or Teflon ferrules may be used. When metal
liners are used, install the nozzle as discussed above or by a leak-
free direct mechanical connection. Mark the probe with heat resistant
tape or by some other method to denote the proper distance into the
stack or duct for each sampling point.
8.3.4 Set up the train as shown in Figure 5-1, using (if
necessary) a very light coat of silicone grease on all ground glass
joints, greasing only the outer portion (see APTD-0576) to avoid the
possibility of contamination by the silicone grease. Subject to the
approval of the Administrator, a glass cyclone may be used between the
probe and filter holder when the total particulate catch is expected to
exceed 100 mg or when water droplets are present in the stack gas.
8.3.5 Place crushed ice around the impingers.
8.4 Leak-Check Procedures.
8.4.1 Leak Check of Metering System Shown in Figure 5-1. That
portion of the sampling train from the pump to the orifice meter should
be leak-checked prior to initial use and after each shipment. Leakage
after the pump will result in less volume being recorded than is
actually sampled. The following procedure is suggested (see Figure 5-
2): Close the main valve on the meter box. Insert a one-hole rubber
stopper with rubber tubing attached into the orifice exhaust pipe.
Disconnect and vent the
[[Page 61836]]
low side of the orifice manometer. Close off the low side orifice tap.
Pressurize the system to 13 to 18 cm (5 to 7 in.) water column by
blowing into the rubber tubing. Pinch off the tubing, and observe the
manometer for one minute. A loss of pressure on the manometer indicates
a leak in the meter box; leaks, if present, must be corrected.
8.4.2 Pretest Leak Check. A pretest leak check of the sampling
train is recommended, but not required. If the pretest leak check is
conducted, the following procedure should be used.
8.4.2.1 After the sampling train has been assembled, turn on and
set the filter and probe heating systems to the desired operating
temperatures. Allow time for the temperatures to stabilize. If a Viton
A O-ring or other leak-free connection is used in assembling the probe
nozzle to the probe liner, leak-check the train at the sampling site by
plugging the nozzle and pulling a 380 mm (15 in.) Hg vacuum.
Note: A lower vacuum may be used, provided that it is not
exceeded during the test.
8.4.2.2 If a heat-resistant string is used, do not connect the
probe to the train during the leak check. Instead, leak-check the train
by first plugging the inlet to the filter holder (cyclone, if
applicable) and pulling a 380 mm (15 in.) Hg vacuum (see Note in
Section 8.4.2.1). Then connect the probe to the train, and leak-check
at approximately 25 mm (1 in.) Hg vacuum; alternatively, the probe may
be leak-checked with the rest of the sampling train, in one step, at
380 mm (15 in.) Hg vacuum. Leakage rates in excess of 4 percent of the
average sampling rate or 0.00057 m\3\/min (0.020 cfm), whichever is
less, are unacceptable.
8.4.2.3 The following leak-check instructions for the sampling
train described in APTD-0576 and APTD-0581 may be helpful. Start the
pump with the bypass valve fully open and the coarse adjust valve
completely closed. Partially open the coarse adjust valve, and slowly
close the bypass valve until the desired vacuum is reached. Do not
reverse the direction of the bypass valve, as this will cause water to
back up into the filter holder. If the desired vacuum is exceeded,
either leak-check at this higher vacuum, or end the leak check and
start over.
8.4.2.4 When the leak check is completed, first slowly remove the
plug from the inlet to the probe, filter holder, or cyclone (if
applicable), and immediately turn off the vacuum pump. This prevents
the water in the impingers from being forced backward into the filter
holder and the silica gel from being entrained backward into the third
impinger.
8.4.3 Leak Checks During Sample Run. If, during the sampling run,
a component (e.g., filter assembly or impinger) change becomes
necessary, a leak check shall be conducted immediately before the
change is made. The leak check shall be done according to the procedure
outlined in Section 8.4.2 above, except that it shall be done at a
vacuum equal to or greater than the maximum value recorded up to that
point in the test. If the leakage rate is found to be no greater than
0.00057 m3/min (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of the average
sampling rate (whichever is less), the results are acceptable, and no
correction will need to be applied to the total volume of dry gas
metered; if, however, a higher leakage rate is obtained, either record
the leakage rate and plan to correct the sample volume as shown in
Section 12.3 of this method, or void the sample run.
Note: Immediately after component changes, leak checks are
optional. If such leak checks are done, the procedure outlined in
Section 8.4.2 above should be used.
8.4.4 Post-Test Leak Check. A leak check of the sampling train is
mandatory at the conclusion of each sampling run. The leak check shall
be performed in accordance with the procedures outlined in Section
8.4.2, except that it shall be conducted at a vacuum equal to or
greater than the maximum value reached during the sampling run. If the
leakage rate is found to be no greater than 0.00057 m3 min
(0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of the average sampling rate (whichever is
less), the results are acceptable, and no correction need be applied to
the total volume of dry gas metered. If, however, a higher leakage rate
is obtained, either record the leakage rate and correct the sample
volume as shown in Section 12.3 of this method, or void the sampling
run.
8.5 Sampling Train Operation. During the sampling run, maintain an
isokinetic sampling rate (within 10 percent of true isokinetic unless
otherwise specified by the Administrator) and a temperature around the
filter of 120 14 deg.C (248 25 deg.F), or
such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the
standards or approved by the Administrator.
8.5.1 For each run, record the data required on a data sheet such
as the one shown in Figure 5-3. Be sure to record the initial DGM
reading. Record the DGM readings at the beginning and end of each
sampling time increment, when changes in flow rates are made, before
and after each leak check, and when sampling is halted. Take other
readings indicated by Figure 5-3 at least once at each sample point
during each time increment and additional readings when significant
changes (20 percent variation in velocity head readings) necessitate
additional adjustments in flow rate. Level and zero the manometer.
Because the manometer level and zero may drift due to vibrations and
temperature changes, make periodic checks during the traverse.
8.5.2 Clean the portholes prior to the test run to minimize the
chance of collecting deposited material. To begin sampling, verify that
the filter and probe heating systems are up to temperature, remove the
nozzle cap, verify that the pitot tube and probe are properly
positioned. Position the nozzle at the first traverse point with the
tip pointing directly into the gas stream. Immediately start the pump,
and adjust the flow to isokinetic conditions. Nomographs are available
which aid in the rapid adjustment of the isokinetic sampling rate
without excessive computations. These nomographs are designed for use
when the Type S pitot tube coefficient (Cp) is 0.85
0.02, and the stack gas equivalent density [dry molecular
weight (Md)] is equal to 29 4. APTD-0576
details the procedure for using the nomographs. If Cp and
Md are outside the above stated ranges, do not use the
nomographs unless appropriate steps (see Reference 7 in Section 17.0)
are taken to compensate for the deviations.
8.5.3 When the stack is under significant negative pressure (i.e.,
height of impinger stem), take care to close the coarse adjust valve
before inserting the probe into the stack to prevent water from backing
into the filter holder. If necessary, the pump may be turned on with
the coarse adjust valve closed.
8.5.4 When the probe is in position, block off the openings around
the probe and porthole to prevent unrepresentative dilution of the gas
stream.
8.5.5 Traverse the stack cross-section, as required by Method 1 or
as specified by the Administrator, being careful not to bump the probe
nozzle into the stack walls when sampling near the walls or when
removing or inserting the probe through the portholes; this minimizes
the chance of extracting deposited material.
8.5.6 During the test run, make periodic adjustments to keep the
temperature around the filter holder at the proper level; add more ice
and, if necessary, salt to maintain a temperature of less than 20
deg.C (68 deg.F) at the condenser/silica gel outlet. Also,
[[Page 61837]]
periodically check the level and zero of the manometer.
8.5.7 If the pressure drop across the filter becomes too high,
making isokinetic sampling difficult to maintain, the filter may be
replaced in the midst of the sample run. It is recommended that another
complete filter assembly be used rather than attempting to change the
filter itself. Before a new filter assembly is installed, conduct a
leak check (see Section 8.4.3). The total PM weight shall include the
summation of the filter assembly catches.
8.5.8 A single train shall be used for the entire sample run,
except in cases where simultaneous sampling is required in two or more
separate ducts or at two or more different locations within the same
duct, or in cases where equipment failure necessitates a change of
trains. In all other situations, the use of two or more trains will be
subject to the approval of the Administrator.
Note: When two or more trains are used, separate analyses of the
front-half and (if applicable) impinger catches from each train
shall be performed, unless identical nozzle sizes were used on all
trains, in which case, the front-half catches from the individual
trains may be combined (as may the impinger catches) and one
analysis of front-half catch and one analysis of impinger catch may
be performed. Consult with the Administrator for details concerning
the calculation of results when two or more trains are used.
8.5.9 At the end of the sample run, close the coarse adjust valve,
remove the probe and nozzle from the stack, turn off the pump, record
the final DGM meter reading, and conduct a post-test leak check, as
outlined in Section 8.4.4. Also, leak-check the pitot lines as
described in Method 2, Section 8.1. The lines must pass this leak
check, in order to validate the velocity head data.
8.6 Calculation of Percent Isokinetic. Calculate percent
isokinetic (see Calculations, Section 12.11) to determine whether the
run was valid or another test run should be made. If there was
difficulty in maintaining isokinetic rates because of source
conditions, consult with the Administrator for possible variance on the
isokinetic rates.
8.7 Sample Recovery.
8.7.1 Proper cleanup procedure begins as soon as the probe is
removed from the stack at the end of the sampling period. Allow the
probe to cool.
8.7.2 When the probe can be safely handled, wipe off all external
PM near the tip of the probe nozzle, and place a cap over it to prevent
losing or gaining PM. Do not cap off the probe tip tightly while the
sampling train is cooling down. This would create a vacuum in the
filter holder, thereby drawing water from the impingers into the filter
holder.
8.7.3 Before moving the sample train to the cleanup site, remove
the probe from the sample train, wipe off the silicone grease, and cap
the open outlet of the probe. Be careful not to lose any condensate
that might be present. Wipe off the silicone grease from the filter
inlet where the probe was fastened, and cap it. Remove the umbilical
cord from the last impinger, and cap the impinger. If a flexible line
is used between the first impinger or condenser and the filter holder,
disconnect the line at the filter holder, and let any condensed water
or liquid drain into the impingers or condenser. After wiping off the
silicone grease, cap off the filter holder outlet and impinger inlet.
Either ground-glass stoppers, plastic caps, or serum caps may be used
to close these openings.
8.7.4 Transfer the probe and filter-impinger assembly to the
cleanup area. This area should be clean and protected from the wind so
that the chances of contaminating or losing the sample will be
minimized.
8.7.5 Save a portion of the acetone used for cleanup as a blank.
Take 200 ml of this acetone directly from the wash bottle being used,
and place it in a glass sample container labeled ``acetone blank.''
8.7.6 Inspect the train prior to and during disassembly, and note
any abnormal conditions. Treat the samples as follows:
8.7.6.1 Container No. 1. Carefully remove the filter from the
filter holder, and place it in its identified petri dish container. Use
a pair of tweezers and/or clean disposable surgical gloves to handle
the filter. If it is necessary to fold the filter, do so such that the
PM cake is inside the fold. Using a dry Nylon bristle brush and/or a
sharp-edged blade, carefully transfer to the petri dish any PM and/or
filter fibers that adhere to the filter holder gasket. Seal the
container.
8.7.6.2 Container No. 2. Taking care to see that dust on the
outside of the probe or other exterior surfaces does not get into the
sample, quantitatively recover PM or any condensate from the probe
nozzle, probe fitting, probe liner, and front half of the filter holder
by washing these components with acetone and placing the wash in a
glass container. Deionized distilled water may be used instead of
acetone when approved by the Administrator and shall be used when
specified by the Administrator. In these cases, save a water blank, and
follow the Administrator's directions on analysis. Perform the acetone
rinse as follows:
8.7.6.2.1 Carefully remove the probe nozzle. Clean the inside
surface by rinsing with acetone from a wash bottle and brushing with a
Nylon bristle brush. Brush until the acetone rinse shows no visible
particles, after which make a final rinse of the inside surface with
acetone.
8.7.6.2.2 Brush and rinse the inside parts of the fitting with
acetone in a similar way until no visible particles remain.
8.7.6.2.3 Rinse the probe liner with acetone by tilting and
rotating the probe while squirting acetone into its upper end so that
all inside surfaces will be wetted with acetone. Let the acetone drain
from the lower end into the sample container. A funnel (glass or
polyethylene) may be used to aid in transferring liquid washes to the
container. Follow the acetone rinse with a probe brush. Hold the probe
in an inclined position, squirt acetone into the upper end as the probe
brush is being pushed with a twisting action through the probe; hold a
sample container underneath the lower end of the probe, and catch any
acetone and particulate matter that is brushed from the probe. Run the
brush through the probe three times or more until no visible PM is
carried out with the acetone or until none remains in the probe liner
on visual inspection. With stainless steel or other metal probes, run
the brush through in the above prescribed manner at least six times
since metal probes have small crevices in which particulate matter can
be entrapped. Rinse the brush with acetone, and quantitatively collect
these washings in the sample container. After the brushing, make a
final acetone rinse of the probe.
8.7.6.2.4 It is recommended that two people clean the probe to
minimize sample losses. Between sampling runs, keep brushes clean and
protected from contamination.
8.7.6.2.5 After ensuring that all joints have been wiped clean of
silicone grease, clean the inside of the front half of the filter
holder by rubbing the surfaces with a Nylon bristle brush and rinsing
with acetone. Rinse each surface three times or more if needed to
remove visible particulate. Make a final rinse of the brush and filter
holder. Carefully rinse out the glass cyclone, also (if applicable).
After all acetone washings and particulate matter have been collected
in the sample container, tighten the lid on the sample container so
that acetone will not leak out when it is shipped to the laboratory.
Mark the height of the fluid level to allow determination of whether
leakage
[[Page 61838]]
occurred during transport. Label the container to identify clearly its
contents.
8.7.6.3 Container No. 3. Note the color of the indicating silica
gel to determine whether it has been completely spent, and make a
notation of its condition. Transfer the silica gel from the fourth
impinger to its original container, and seal. A funnel may make it
easier to pour the silica gel without spilling. A rubber policeman may
be used as an aid in removing the silica gel from the impinger. It is
not necessary to remove the small amount of dust particles that may
adhere to the impinger wall and are difficult to remove. Since the gain
in weight is to be used for moisture calculations, do not use any water
or other liquids to transfer the silica gel. If a balance is available
in the field, follow the procedure for Container No. 3 in Section
11.2.3.
8.7.6.4 Impinger Water. Treat the impingers as follows: Make a
notation of any color or film in the liquid catch. Measure the liquid
that is in the first three impingers to within 1 ml by using a
graduated cylinder or by weighing it to within 0.5 g by using a
balance. Record the volume or weight of liquid present. This
information is required to calculate the moisture content of the
effluent gas. Discard the liquid after measuring and recording the
volume or weight, unless analysis of the impinger catch is required
(see NOTE, Section 6.1.1.8). If a different type of condenser is used,
measure the amount of moisture condensed either volumetrically or
gravimetrically.
8.8 Sample Transport. Whenever possible, containers should be
shipped in such a way that they remain upright at all times.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quality control
Section measure Effect
------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.4, 10.1-10.6................ Sampling Ensures accurate
equipment leak measurement of stack
check and gas flow rate,
calibration. sample volume.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. The following procedures are
suggested to check the volume metering system calibration values at the
field test site prior to sample collection. These procedures are
optional.
9.2.1 Meter Orifice Check. Using the calibration data obtained
during the calibration procedure described in Section 10.3, determine
the H@ for the metering system orifice. The H@ is the
orifice pressure differential in units of in. H2O that
correlates to 0.75 cfm of air at 528 deg.R and 29.92 in. Hg. The
H@ is calculated as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.107
Where:
H = Average pressure differential across the orifice meter,
in. H2O.
Tm = Absolute average DGM temperature, deg.R.
Pbar = Barometric pressure, in. Hg.
= Total sampling time, min.
Y = DGM calibration factor, dimensionless.
Vm = Volume of gas sample as measured by DGM, dcf.
0.0319 = (0.0567 in. Hg/ deg.R) (0.75 cfm)\2\
9.2.1.1 Before beginning the field test (a set of three runs
usually constitutes a field test), operate the metering system (i.e.,
pump, volume meter, and orifice) at the H@ pressure
differential for 10 minutes. Record the volume collected, the DGM
temperature, and the barometric pressure. Calculate a DGM calibration
check value, Yc, as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.108
where:
Yc = DGM calibration check value, dimensionless.
10 = Run time, min.
9.2.1.2 Compare the Yc value with the dry gas meter
calibration factor Y to determine that: 0.97Y Yc 1.03Y. If
the Yc value is not within this range, the volume metering
system should be investigated before beginning the test.
9.2.2 Calibrated Critical Orifice. A critical orifice, calibrated
against a wet test meter or spirometer and designed to be inserted at
the inlet of the sampling meter box, may be used as a check by
following the procedure of Section 16.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Note: Maintain a laboratory log of all calibrations.
10.1 Probe Nozzle. Probe nozzles shall be calibrated before their
initial use in the field. Using a micrometer, measure the ID of the
nozzle to the nearest 0.025 mm (0.001 in.). Make three separate
measurements using different diameters each time, and obtain the
average of the measurements. The difference between the high and low
numbers shall not exceed 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). When nozzles become
nicked, dented, or corroded, they shall be reshaped, sharpened, and
recalibrated before use. Each nozzle shall be permanently and uniquely
identified.
10.2 Pitot Tube Assembly. The Type S pitot tube assembly shall be
calibrated according to the procedure outlined in Section 10.1 of
Method 2.
10.3 Metering System.
10.3.1 Calibration Prior to Use. Before its initial use in the
field, the metering system shall be calibrated as follows: Connect the
metering system inlet to the outlet of a wet test meter that is
accurate to within 1 percent. Refer to Figure 5-4. The wet test meter
should have a capacity of 30 liters/rev (1 ft3/rev). A
spirometer of 400 liters (14 ft3) or more capacity, or
equivalent, may be used for this calibration, although a wet test meter
is usually more practical. The wet test meter should be periodically
calibrated with a spirometer or a liquid displacement meter to ensure
the accuracy of the wet test meter. Spirometers or wet test meters of
other sizes may be used, provided that the specified accuracies of the
procedure are maintained. Run the metering system pump for about 15
minutes with the orifice manometer indicating a median reading as
expected in field use to allow the pump to warm up and to permit the
interior surface of the wet test meter to be thoroughly wetted. Then,
at each of a minimum of three orifice manometer settings, pass an exact
quantity of gas through the wet test meter and note the gas volume
indicated by the DGM. Also note the barometric pressure and the
temperatures of the wet test meter, the inlet of the DGM, and the
outlet of the DGM. Select the highest and lowest orifice settings to
bracket the expected field operating range of the orifice. Use a
minimum volume of 0.14 m3 (5 ft3) at all orifice
settings. Record all the data on a form similar to Figure 5-5 and
calculate Y, the DGM calibration factor, and H@,
the orifice calibration factor, at each orifice setting as shown on
Figure 5-5. Allowable tolerances for
[[Page 61839]]
individual Y and H@ values are given in Figure 5-5.
Use the average of the Y values in the calculations in Section 12.0.
10.3.1.1 Before calibrating the metering system, it is suggested
that a leak check be conducted. For metering systems having diaphragm
pumps, the normal leak-check procedure will not detect leakages within
the pump. For these cases the following leak-check procedure is
suggested: make a 10-minute calibration run at 0.00057 m3/
min (0.020 cfm). At the end of the run, take the difference of the
measured wet test meter and DGM volumes. Divide the difference by 10 to
get the leak rate. The leak rate should not exceed 0.00057
m3/min (0.020 cfm).
10.3.2 Calibration After Use. After each field use, the
calibration of the metering system shall be checked by performing three
calibration runs at a single, intermediate orifice setting (based on
the previous field test), with the vacuum set at the maximum value
reached during the test series. To adjust the vacuum, insert a valve
between the wet test meter and the inlet of the metering system.
Calculate the average value of the DGM calibration factor. If the value
has changed by more than 5 percent, recalibrate the meter over the full
range of orifice settings, as detailed in Section 10.3.1.
Note: Alternative procedures (e.g., rechecking the orifice meter
coefficient) may be used, subject to the approval of the
Administrator.
10.3.3 Acceptable Variation in Calibration. If the DGM coefficient
values obtained before and after a test series differ by more than 5
percent, the test series shall either be voided, or calculations for
the test series shall be performed using whichever meter coefficient
value (i.e., before or after) gives the lower value of total sample
volume.
10.4 Probe Heater Calibration. Use a heat source to generate air
heated to selected temperatures that approximate those expected to
occur in the sources to be sampled. Pass this air through the probe at
a typical sample flow rate while measuring the probe inlet and outlet
temperatures at various probe heater settings. For each air temperature
generated, construct a graph of probe heating system setting versus
probe outlet temperature. The procedure outlined in APTD-0576 can also
be used. Probes constructed according to APTD-0581 need not be
calibrated if the calibration curves in APTD-0576 are used. Also,
probes with outlet temperature monitoring capabilities do not require
calibration.
Note: The probe heating system shall be calibrated before its
initial use in the field.
10.5 Temperature Sensors. Use the procedure in Section 10.3 of
Method 2 to calibrate in-stack temperature sensors. Dial thermometers,
such as are used for the DGM and condenser outlet, shall be calibrated
against mercury-in-glass thermometers.
10.6 Barometer. Calibrate against a mercury barometer.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Record the data required on a sheet such as the one shown in
Figure 5-6.
11.2 Handle each sample container as follows:
11.2.1 Container No. 1. Leave the contents in the shipping
container or transfer the filter and any loose PM from the sample
container to a tared glass weighing dish. Desiccate for 24 hours in a
desiccator containing anhydrous calcium sulfate. Weigh to a constant
weight, and report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg. For the purposes
of this section, the term ``constant weight'' means a difference of no
more than 0.5 mg or 1 percent of total weight less tare weight,
whichever is greater, between two consecutive weighings, with no less
than 6 hours of desiccation time between weighings. Alternatively, the
sample may be oven dried at 104 deg.C (220 deg.F) for 2 to 3 hours,
cooled in the desiccator, and weighed to a constant weight, unless
otherwise specified by the Administrator. The sample may be oven dried
at 104 deg.C (220 deg.F) for 2 to 3 hours. Once the sample has
cooled, weigh the sample, and use this weight as a final weight.
11.2.2 Container No. 2. Note the level of liquid in the container,
and confirm on the analysis sheet whether leakage occurred during
transport. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void
the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the
Administrator, to correct the final results. Measure the liquid in this
container either volumetrically to 1 ml or gravimetrically
to 0.5 g. Transfer the contents to a tared 250 ml beaker,
and evaporate to dryness at ambient temperature and pressure. Desiccate
for 24 hours, and weigh to a constant weight. Report the results to the
nearest 0.1 mg.
11.2.3 Container No. 3. Weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel
plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g using a balance. This step may be
conducted in the field.
11.2.4 Acetone Blank Container. Measure the acetone in this
container either volumetrically or gravimetrically. Transfer the
acetone to a tared 250 ml beaker, and evaporate to dryness at ambient
temperature and pressure. Desiccate for 24 hours, and weigh to a
constant weight. Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.
Note: The contents of Container No. 2 as well as the acetone
blank container may be evaporated at temperatures higher than
ambient. If evaporation is done at an elevated temperature, the
temperature must be below the boiling point of the solvent; also, to
prevent ``bumping,'' the evaporation process must be closely
supervised, and the contents of the beaker must be swirled
occasionally to maintain an even temperature. Use extreme care, as
acetone is highly flammable and has a low flash point.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant
figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after the
final calculation. Other forms of the equations may be used, provided
that they give equivalent results.
12.1 Nomenclature.
An = Cross-sectional area of nozzle, m2
(ft2).
Bws = Water vapor in the gas stream, proportion by volume.
Ca = Acetone blank residue concentration, mg/mg.
cs = Concentration of particulate matter in stack gas, dry
basis, corrected to standard conditions, g/dscm (gr/dscf).
I = Percent of isokinetic sampling.
L1 = Individual leakage rate observed during the leak-check
conducted prior to the first component change, m3/min
(ft3/min)
La = Maximum acceptable leakage rate for either a pretest
leak-check or for a leak-check following a component change; equal to
0.00057 m3/min (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of the average
sampling rate, whichever is less.
Li = Individual leakage rate observed during the leak-check
conducted prior to the ``i\th\'' component change (i = 1, 2, 3 . . .
n), m3/min (cfm).
Lp = Leakage rate observed during the post-test leak-check,
m3/min (cfm).
ma = Mass of residue of acetone after evaporation, mg.
mn = Total amount of particulate matter collected, mg.
Mw = Molecular weight of water, 18.0 g/g-mole (18.0 lb/lb-
mole).
Pbar = Barometric pressure at the sampling site, mm Hg (in.
Hg).
Ps = Absolute stack gas pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
R = Ideal gas constant, 0.06236 ((mm Hg)(m \3\))/((K)(g-mole)) {21.85
((in. Hg) (ft \3\))/(( deg.R) (lb-mole))}.
[[Page 61840]]
Tm = Absolute average DGM temperature (see Figure 5-3), K
( deg.R).
Ts = Absolute average stack gas temperature (see Figure 5-
3), K ( deg.R).
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 K (528 deg.R).
Va = Volume of acetone blank, ml.
Vaw = Volume of acetone used in wash, ml.
V1c = Total volume of liquid collected in impingers and
silica gel (see Figure 5-6), ml.
Vm = Volume of gas sample as measured by dry gas meter, dcm
(dcf).
Vm(std) = Volume of gas sample measured by the dry gas
meter, corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
Vw(std) = Volume of water vapor in the gas sample, corrected
to standard conditions, scm (scf).
Vs = Stack gas velocity, calculated by Method 2, Equation 2-
7, using data obtained from Method 5, m/sec (ft/sec).
Wa = Weight of residue in acetone wash, mg.
Y = Dry gas meter calibration factor.
H = Average pressure differential across the orifice meter
(see Figure 5-4), mm H2O (in. H2O).
a = Density of acetone, mg/ml (see label on
bottle).
w = Density of water, 0.9982 g/ml.(0.002201 lb/ml).
= Total sampling time, min.
1 = Sampling time interval, from the beginning of
a run until the first component change, min.
i = Sampling time interval, between two successive
component changes, beginning with the interval between the first and
second changes, min.
p = Sampling time interval, from the final (n
\th\) component change until the end of the sampling run, min.
13.6 = Specific gravity of mercury.
60 = Sec/min.
100 = Conversion to percent.
12.2 Average Dry Gas Meter Temperature and Average Orifice
Pressure Drop. See data sheet (Figure 5-3).
12.3 Dry Gas Volume. Correct the sample volume measured by the dry
gas meter to standard conditions (20 deg.C, 760 mm Hg or 68 deg.F,
29.92 in. Hg) by using Equation 5-1.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.109
Where:
K1 = 0.3858 deg.K/mm Hg for metric units, = 17.64 deg.R/
in. Hg for English units.
Note: Equation 5-1 can be used as written unless the leakage
rate observed during any of the mandatory leak checks (i.e., the
post-test leak check or leak checks conducted prior to component
changes) exceeds La. If Lp or Li
exceeds La, Equation 5-1 must be modified as follows:
(a) Case I. No component changes made during sampling run. In this
case, replace Vm in Equation 5-1 with the expression:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.110
(b) Case II. One or more component changes made during the sampling
run. In this case, replace Vm in Equation 5-1 by the
expression:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.111
and substitute only for those leakage rates (Li or
Lp) which exceed La.
12.4 Volume of Water Vapor Condensed.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.112
Where:
K2 = 0.001333 m \3\/ml for metric units, = 0.04706 ft \3\/ml
for English units.
12.5 Moisture Content.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.113
Note: In saturated or water droplet-laden gas streams, two
calculations of the moisture content of the stack gas shall be made,
one from the impinger analysis (Equation 5-3), and a second from the
assumption of saturated conditions. The lower of the two values of
Bws shall be considered correct. The procedure for
determining the moisture content based upon the assumption of
saturated conditions is given in Section 4.0 of Method 4. For the
purposes of this method, the average stack gas temperature from
Figure 5-3 may be used to make this determination, provided that the
accuracy of the in-stack temperature sensor is 1 deg.C
(2 deg.F).
12.6 Acetone Blank Concentration.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.114
12.7 Acetone Wash Blank.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.115
12.8 Total Particulate Weight. Determine the total particulate
matter
[[Page 61841]]
catch from the sum of the weights obtained from Containers 1 and 2 less
the acetone blank (see Figure 5-6).
Note: In no case shall a blank value of greater than 0.001
percent of the weight of acetone used be subtracted from the sample
weight. Refer to Section 8.5.8 to assist in calculation of results
involving two or more filter assemblies or two or more sampling
trains.
12.9 Particulate Concentration.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.116
Where:
K3 = 0.001 g/mg for metric units.
= 0.0154 gr/mg for English units.
12.10 Conversion Factors:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
From To Multiply by
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ft\3\............................... m\3\ 0.02832
gr.................................. mg 64.80004
gr/ft\3\............................ mg/m\3\ 2288.4
mg.................................. g 0.001
gr.................................. lb 1.429 x 10-\4\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
12.11 Isokinetic Variation.
12.11.1 Calculation from Raw Data.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.117
Where:
K4 = 0.003454 ((mm Hg)(m\3\))/((ml)( deg.K)) for metric
units,
= 0.002669 ((in. Hg)(ft\3\))/((ml)( deg.R)) for English units.
12.11.2 Calculation from Intermediate Values.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.118
Where:
K5 = 4.320 for metric units,
= 0.09450 for English units.
12.11.3 Acceptable Results. If 90 percent I
110 percent, the results are acceptable. If the PM results
are low in comparison to the standard, and ``I'' is over 110 percent or
less than 90 percent, the Administrator may opt to accept the results.
Reference 4 in Section 17.0 may be used to make acceptability
judgments. If ``I'' is judged to be unacceptable, reject the results,
and repeat the sampling run.
12.12 Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric Flow Rate. Calculate the
average stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate, if needed, using
data obtained in this method and the equations in Sections 12.3 and
12.4 of Method 2.
13.0 Method Performance. [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention. [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management. [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 Dry Gas Meter as a Calibration Standard. A DGM may be used as
a calibration standard for volume measurements in place of the wet test
meter specified in Section 10.3, provided that it is calibrated
initially and recalibrated periodically as follows:
16.1.1 Standard Dry Gas Meter Calibration.
16.1.1.1. The DGM to be calibrated and used as a secondary
reference meter should be of high quality and have an appropriately
sized capacity (e.g., 3 liters/rev (0.1 ft\3\/rev)). A spirometer (400
liters (14 ft\3\) or more capacity), or equivalent, may be used for
this calibration, although a wet test meter is usually more practical.
The wet test meter should have a capacity of 30 liters/rev (1 ft\3\/
rev) and capable of measuring volume to within 1.0 percent. Wet test
meters should be checked against a spirometer or a liquid displacement
meter to ensure the accuracy of the wet test meter. Spirometers or wet
test meters of other sizes may be used, provided that the specified
accuracies of the procedure are maintained.
16.1.1.2 Set up the components as shown in Figure 5-7. A
spirometer, or equivalent, may be used in place of the wet test meter
in the system. Run the pump for at least 5 minutes at a flow rate of
about 10 liters/min (0.35 cfm) to condition the interior surface of the
wet test meter. The pressure drop indicated by the manometer at the
inlet side of the DGM should be minimized (no greater than 100 mm
H2O (4 in. H2O) at a flow rate of 30 liters/min
(1 cfm)). This can be accomplished by using large diameter tubing
connections and straight pipe fittings.
16.1.1.3 Collect the data as shown in the example data sheet (see
Figure 5-8). Make triplicate runs at each of the flow rates and at no
less than five different flow rates. The range of flow rates should be
between 10 and 34 liters/min (0.35 and 1.2 cfm) or over the expected
operating range.
16.1.1.4 Calculate flow rate, Q, for each run using the wet test
meter volume, VW, and the run time, . Calculate
the DGM coefficient, Yds, for each run. These calculations
are as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.119
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.120
Where:
K1 = 0.3858 deg.C/mm Hg for metric units=17.64 deg.F/in.
Hg for English units.
VW = Wet test meter volume, liter (ft\3\).
Vds = Dry gas meter volume, liter (ft\3\).
Tds = Average dry gas meter temperature, deg.C ( deg.F).
Tadj = 273 deg.C for metric units = 460 deg.F for English
units.
TW = Average wet test meter temperature, deg.C ( deg.F)
[[Page 61842]]
Pbar = Barometric pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
p = Dry gas meter inlet differential pressure, mm
H2O (in. H2O).
= Run time, min.
16.1.1.5 Compare the three Yds values at each of the
flow rates and determine the maximum and minimum values. The difference
between the maximum and minimum values at each flow rate should be no
greater than 0.030. Extra sets of triplicate runs may be made in order
to complete this requirement. In addition, the meter coefficients
should be between 0.95 and 1.05. If these specifications cannot be met
in three sets of successive triplicate runs, the meter is not suitable
as a calibration standard and should not be used as such. If these
specifications are met, average the three Yds values at each
flow rate resulting in no less than five average meter coefficients,
Yds.
16.1.1.6 Prepare a curve of meter coefficient, Yds,
versus flow rate, Q, for the DGM. This curve shall be used as a
reference when the meter is used to calibrate other DGMs and to
determine whether recalibration is required.
16.1.2 Standard Dry Gas Meter Recalibration.
16.1.2.1 Recalibrate the standard DGM against a wet test meter or
spirometer annually or after every 200 hours of operation, whichever
comes first. This requirement is valid provided the standard DGM is
kept in a laboratory and, if transported, cared for as any other
laboratory instrument. Abuse to the standard meter may cause a change
in the calibration and will require more frequent recalibrations.
16.1.2.2 As an alternative to full recalibration, a two-point
calibration check may be made. Follow the same procedure and equipment
arrangement as for a full recalibration, but run the meter at only two
flow rates [suggested rates are 14 and 30 liters/min (0.5 and 1.0
cfm)]. Calculate the meter coefficients for these two points, and
compare the values with the meter calibration curve. If the two
coefficients are within 1.5 percent of the calibration curve values at
the same flow rates, the meter need not be recalibrated until the next
date for a recalibration check.
16.2 Critical Orifices As Calibration Standards. Critical orifices
may be used as calibration standards in place of the wet test meter
specified in Section 16.1, provided that they are selected, calibrated,
and used as follows:
16.2.1 Selection of Critical Orifices.
16.2.1.1 The procedure that follows describes the use of
hypodermic needles or stainless steel needle tubings which have been
found suitable for use as critical orifices. Other materials and
critical orifice designs may be used provided the orifices act as true
critical orifices (i.e., a critical vacuum can be obtained, as
described in Section 16.2.2.2.3). Select five critical orifices that
are appropriately sized to cover the range of flow rates between 10 and
34 liters/min (0.35 and 1.2 cfm) or the expected operating range. Two
of the critical orifices should bracket the expected operating range. A
minimum of three critical orifices will be needed to calibrate a Method
5 DGM; the other two critical orifices can serve as spares and provide
better selection for bracketing the range of operating flow rates. The
needle sizes and tubing lengths shown in Table 5-1 in Section 18.0 give
the approximate flow rates.
16.2.1.2 These needles can be adapted to a Method 5 type sampling
train as follows: Insert a serum bottle stopper, 13 by 20 mm sleeve
type, into a \1/2\-inch Swagelok (or equivalent) quick connect. Insert
the needle into the stopper as shown in Figure 5-9.
16.2.2 Critical Orifice Calibration. The procedure described in
this section uses the Method 5 meter box configuration with a DGM as
described in Section 6.1.1.9 to calibrate the critical orifices. Other
schemes may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
16.2.2.1 Calibration of Meter Box. The critical orifices must be
calibrated in the same configuration as they will be used (i.e., there
should be no connections to the inlet of the orifice).
16.2.2.1.1 Before calibrating the meter box, leak check the system
as follows: Fully open the coarse adjust valve, and completely close
the by-pass valve. Plug the inlet. Then turn on the pump, and determine
whether there is any leakage. The leakage rate shall be zero (i.e., no
detectable movement of the DGM dial shall be seen for 1 minute).
16.2.2.1.2 Check also for leakages in that portion of the sampling
train between the pump and the orifice meter. See Section 8.4.1 for the
procedure; make any corrections, if necessary. If leakage is detected,
check for cracked gaskets, loose fittings, worn O-rings, etc., and make
the necessary repairs.
16.2.2.1.3 After determining that the meter box is leakless,
calibrate the meter box according to the procedure given in Section
10.3. Make sure that the wet test meter meets the requirements stated
in Section 16.1.1.1. Check the water level in the wet test meter.
Record the DGM calibration factor, Y.
16.2.2.2 Calibration of Critical Orifices. Set up the apparatus as
shown in Figure 5-10.
16.2.2.2.1 Allow a warm-up time of 15 minutes. This step is
important to equilibrate the temperature conditions through the DGM.
16.2.2.2.2 Leak check the system as in Section 16.2.2.1.1. The
leakage rate shall be zero.
16.2.2.2.3 Before calibrating the critical orifice, determine its
suitability and the appropriate operating vacuum as follows: Turn on
the pump, fully open the coarse adjust valve, and adjust the by-pass
valve to give a vacuum reading corresponding to about half of
atmospheric pressure. Observe the meter box orifice manometer reading,
H. Slowly increase the vacuum reading until a stable reading
is obtained on the meter box orifice manometer. Record the critical
vacuum for each orifice. Orifices that do not reach a critical value
shall not be used.
16.2.2.2.4 Obtain the barometric pressure using a barometer as
described in Section 6.1.2. Record the barometric pressure,
Pbar, in mm Hg (in. Hg).
16.2.2.2.5 Conduct duplicate runs at a vacuum of 25 to 50 mm Hg (1
to 2 in. Hg) above the critical vacuum. The runs shall be at least 5
minutes each. The DGM volume readings shall be in increments of
complete revolutions of the DGM. As a guideline, the times should not
differ by more than 3.0 seconds (this includes allowance for changes in
the DGM temperatures) to achieve 0.5 percent in K' (see
Eq. 5-11). Record the information listed in Figure 5-11.
16.2.2.2.6 Calculate K' using Equation 5-11.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.121
Where:
K' = Critical orifice coefficient,
[m \3\)( deg.K)\1/2\]/
[[Page 61843]]
[(mm Hg)(min)] {[(ft \3\)( deg.R)\1/2\)] [(in. Hg)(min)].
Tamb = Absolute ambient temperature, deg.K ( deg.R).
Calculate the arithmetic mean of the K' values. The individual K'
values should not differ by more than 0.5 percent from the
mean value.
16.2.3 Using the Critical Orifices as Calibration Standards.
16.2.3.1 Record the barometric pressure.
16.2.3.2 Calibrate the metering system according to the procedure
outlined in Section 16.2.2. Record the information listed in Figure 5-
12.
16.2.3.3 Calculate the standard volumes of air passed through the
DGM and the critical orifices, and calculate the DGM calibration
factor, Y, using the equations below:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.122
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.123
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.124
Where:
Vcr(std) = Volume of gas sample passed through the critical
orifice, corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
K1 = 0.3858 K/mm Hg for metric units
= 17.64 deg.R/in. Hg for English units.
16.2.3.4 Average the DGM calibration values for each of the flow
rates. The calibration factor, Y, at each of the flow rates should not
differ by more than 2 percent from the average.
16.2.3.5 To determine the need for recalibrating the critical
orifices, compare the DGM Y factors obtained from two adjacent orifices
each time a DGM is calibrated; for example, when checking orifice 13/
2.5, use orifices 12/10.2 and 13/5.1. If any critical orifice yields a
DGM Y factor differing by more than 2 percent from the others,
recalibrate the critical orifice according to Section 16.2.2.
17.0 References.
1. Addendum to Specifications for Incinerator Testing at Federal
Facilities. PHS, NCAPC. December 6, 1967.
2. Martin, Robert M. Construction Details of Isokinetic Source-
Sampling Equipment. Environmental Protection Agency. Research
Triangle Park, NC. APTD-0581. April 1971.
3. Rom, Jerome J. Maintenance, Calibration, and Operation of
Isokinetic Source Sampling Equipment. Environmental Protection
Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. APTD-0576. March 1972.
4. Smith, W.S., R.T. Shigehara, and W.F. Todd. A Method of
Interpreting Stack Sampling Data. Paper Presented at the 63rd Annual
Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association, St. Louis, MO.
June 14-19, 1970.
5. Smith, W.S., et al. Stack Gas Sampling Improved and
Simplified With New Equipment. APCA Paper No. 67-119. 1967.
6. Specifications for Incinerator Testing at Federal Facilities.
PHS, NCAPC. 1967.
7. Shigehara, R.T. Adjustment in the EPA Nomograph for Different
Pitot Tube Coefficients and Dry Molecular Weights. Stack Sampling
News 2:4-11. October 1974.
8. Vollaro, R.F. A Survey of Commercially Available
Instrumentation for the Measurement of Low-Range Gas Velocities.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch.
Research Triangle Park, NC. November 1976 (unpublished paper).
9. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Part 26. Gaseous Fuels; Coal
and Coke; Atmospheric Analysis. American Society for Testing and
Materials. Philadelphia, PA. 1974. pp. 617-622.
10. Felix, L.G., G.I. Clinard, G.E. Lacy, and J.D. McCain.
Inertial Cascade Impactor Substrate Media for Flue Gas Sampling.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC
27711. Publication No. EPA-600/7-77-060. June 1977. 83 pp.
11. Westlin, P.R. and R.T. Shigehara. Procedure for Calibrating
and Using Dry Gas Volume Meters as Calibration Standards. Source
Evaluation Society Newsletter. 3(1):17-30. February 1978.
12. Lodge, J.P., Jr., J.B. Pate, B.E. Ammons, and G.A. Swanson.
The Use of Hypodermic Needles as Critical Orifices in Air Sampling.
J. Air Pollution Control Association. 16:197-200. 1966.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flow rate Flow rate
Gauge/cm liters/min. Gauge/cm liters/min.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12/7.6.......................................................... 32.56 14/2.5 19.54
12/10.2......................................................... 30.02 14/5.1 17.27
13/2.5.......................................................... 25.77 14/7.6 16.14
13/5.1.......................................................... 23.50 15/3.2 14.16
13/7.6.......................................................... 22.37 15/7.6 11.61
13/10.2......................................................... 20.67 15/10.2 10.48
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 61844]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.125
[[Page 61845]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.126
[[Page 61846]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.127
[[Page 61847]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.128
[[Page 61848]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.129
[[Page 61849]]
Plant-----------------------------------------------------------------
Date------------------------------------------------------------------
Run No.---------------------------------------------------------------
Filter No.------------------------------------------------------------
Amount liquid lost during transport-----------------------------------
Acetone blank volume, m1----------------------------------------------
Acetone blank concentration, mg/mg (Equation 5-4)---------------------
Acetone wash blank, mg (Equation 5-5)---------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weight of particulate collected, mg
Container number --------------------------------------------------------------------------
Final weight Tare weight Weight gain
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total:
Less acetone blank...........
Weight of particulate matter.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Volume of liquid water collected
---------------------------------------
Impinger volume, Silica gel weight,
ml g
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Final
Initial
Liquid collected
Total volume collected.... .................. g* ml
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Convert weight of water to volume by dividing total weight increase by
density of water (1 g/ml).
Figure 5-6. Analytical Data Sheet
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.147
[[Page 61850]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.130
[[Page 61851]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.131
[[Page 61852]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.132
[[Page 61853]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.133
[[Page 61854]]
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Date------------------------------------------------------------------
Train ID--------------------------------------------------------------
DGM cal. factor-------------------------------------------------------
Critical orifice ID---------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Run No.
Dry gas meter -------------------------
1 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Final reading................ m3 (ft3)....... ........... ...........
Initial reading.............. m3 (ft3)....... ........... ...........
Difference, Vm............... m 3 (ft 3)..... ........... ...........
Inlet/Outlet................. ............... ........... ...........
Temperatures:............ deg.C ( deg.F) / /
Initial.................. deg.C ( deg.F) / /
Final.................... min/sec........ / /
Av. Temeperature, t m.... min............ ........... ...........
Time, ............. ............... ........... ...........
Orifice man. rdg., H mm (in.) H 2... ........... ...........
Bar. pressure, P bar......... mm (in.) Hg.... ........... ...........
Ambient temperature, tamb.... mm (in.) Hg.... ........... ...........
Pump vacuum.................. ............... ........... ...........
K' factor.................... ............... ........... ...........
Average.................. ............... ........... ...........
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 5-11. Data sheet of determining K' factor.
Date------------------------------------------------------------------
Train ID--------------------------------------------------------------
Critical orifice ID---------------------------------------------------
Critical orifice K' factor--------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Run No.
Dry gas meter -------------------------
1 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Final reading................ m\3\ (ft\3\)... ........... ...........
Initial reading.............. m\3\ (ft\3\)... ........... ...........
Difference, Vm............... m\3\ (ft\3\)... ........... ...........
Inlet/outlet temperatures.... deg.C ( deg.F) / /
Initial.................. deg.C ( deg.F) / /
Final.................... deg.C ( deg.F) ........... ...........
Avg. Temperature, tm..... min/sec........ / /
Time, ............. min............ ........... ...........
Orifice man. rdg., H min............ ........... ...........
Bar. pressure, Pbar.......... mm (in.) H2O... ........... ...........
Ambient temperature, tamb.... mm (in.) Hg.... ........... ...........
Pump vacuum.................. deg.C ( deg.F) ........... ...........
Vm(std)...................... mm (in.) Hg.... ........... ...........
Vcr(std)..................... m\3\ (ft\3\)... ........... ...........
DGM cal. factor, Y........... m\3\ (ft\3\)... ........... ...........
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 5-12. Data Sheet for Determining DGM Y Factor
Method 5A--Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions From the
Asphalt Processing and Asphalt Roofing Industry
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and
analytical) essential to its performance. Some material is
incorporated by reference from other methods in this part.
Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method
should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following
additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, and Method 5.
1.0 Scope and Applications
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination
of PM emissions from asphalt roofing industry process saturators,
blowing stills, and other sources as specified in the regulations.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and
collected on a glass fiber filter maintained at a temperature of 42
10 deg.C (108 18 deg.F). The PM mass, which
includes any material that condenses at or above the filtration
temperature, is determined gravimetrically after the removal of
uncombined water.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials,
operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the
safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of
the user of this test
[[Page 61855]]
method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to
determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to
performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5, Section 6.1, with the
following exceptions and additions:
6.1.1 Probe Liner. Same as Method 5, Section 6.1.1.2, with the
note that at high stack gas temperatures greater than 250 deg.C (480
deg.F), water-cooled probes may be required to control the probe exit
temperature to 42 10 deg.C (108 18 deg.F).
6.1.2 Precollector Cyclone. Borosilicate glass following the
construction details shown in Air Pollution Technical Document (APTD)-
0581, ``Construction Details of Isokinetic Source-Sampling Equipment''
(Reference 2 in Method 5, Section 17.0).
Note: The cyclone shall be used when the stack gas moisture is
greater than 10 percent, and shall not be used otherwise.
6.1.3 Filter Heating System. Any heating (or cooling) system
capable of maintaining a sample gas temperature at the exit end of the
filter holder during sampling at 42 10 deg.C (108
18 deg.F).
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items are required for sample
recovery:
6.2.1 Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brushes, Graduated Cylinder
and/or Balance, Plastic Storage Containers, and Funnel and Rubber
Policeman. Same as in Method 5, Sections 6.2.1, 6.2.5, 6.2.6, and
6.2.7, respectively.
6.2.2 Wash Bottles. Glass.
6.2.3 Sample Storage Containers. Chemically resistant 500-ml or
1,000-ml borosilicate glass bottles, with rubber-backed Teflon screw
cap liners or caps that are constructed so as to be leak-free, and
resistant to chemical attack by 1,1,1-trichloroethane (TCE). (Narrow-
mouth glass bottles have been found to be less prone to leakage.)
6.2.4 Petri Dishes. Glass, unless otherwise specified by the
Administrator.
6.2.5 Funnel. Glass.
6.3 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 5, Section 6.3, with the
following additions:
6.3.1 Beakers. Glass, 250-ml and 500-ml.
6.3.2 Separatory Funnel. 100-ml or greater.
7.0. Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents are required for
sample collection:
7.1.1 Filters, Silica Gel, Water, and Crushed Ice. Same as in
Method 5, Sections 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, and 7.1.4, respectively.
7.1.2 Stopcock Grease. TCE-insoluble, heat-stable grease (if
needed). This is not necessary if screw-on connectors with Teflon
sleeves, or similar, are used.
7.2 Sample Recovery. Reagent grade TCE, 0.001 percent
residue and stored in glass bottles. Run TCE blanks before field use,
and use only TCE with low blank values (0.001 percent). In
no case shall a blank value of greater than 0.001 percent of the weight
of TCE used be subtracted from the sample weight.
7.3 Analysis. Two reagents are required for the analysis:
7.3.1 TCE. Same as in Section 7.2.
7.3.2 Desiccant. Same as in Method 5, Section 7.3.2.
8.0. Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1. Pretest Preparation. Unless otherwise specified, maintain and
calibrate all components according to the procedure described in APTD-
0576, ``Maintenance, Calibration, and Operation of Isokinetic Source-
Sampling Equipment'' (Reference 3 in Method 5, Section 17.0).
8.1.1 Prepare probe liners and sampling nozzles as needed for use.
Thoroughly clean each component with soap and water followed by a
minimum of three TCE rinses. Use the probe and nozzle brushes during at
least one of the TCE rinses (refer to Section 8.7 for rinsing
techniques). Cap or seal the open ends of the probe liners and nozzles
to prevent contamination during shipping.
8.1.2 Prepare silica gel portions and glass filters as specified
in Method 5, Section 8.1.
8.2 Preliminary Determinations. Select the sampling site, probe
nozzle, and probe length as specified in Method 5, Section 8.2. Select
a total sampling time greater than or equal to the minimum total
sampling time specified in the ``Test Methods and Procedures'' section
of the applicable subpart of the regulations. Follow the guidelines
outlined in Method 5, Section 8.2 for sampling time per point and total
sample volume collected.
8.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. Prepare the sampling train as
specified in Method 5, Section 8.3, with the addition of the
precollector cyclone, if used, between the probe and filter holder. The
temperature of the precollector cyclone, if used, should be maintained
in the same range as that of the filter, i.e., 42 10
deg.C (108 18 deg.F). Use no stopcock grease on ground
glass joints unless grease is insoluble in TCE.
8.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Same as Method 5, Section 8.4.
8.5 Sampling Train Operation. Operate the sampling train as
described in Method 5, Section 8.5, except maintain the temperature of
the gas exiting the filter holder at 42 10 deg.C (108
18 deg.F).
8.6 Calculation of Percent Isokinetic. Same as Method 5, Section
8.6.
8.7 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, Section 8.7.1 through
8.7.6.1, with the addition of the following:
8.7.1 Container No. 2 (Probe to Filter Holder).
8.7.1.1 Taking care to see that material on the outside of the
probe or other exterior surfaces does not get into the sample,
quantitatively recover PM or any condensate from the probe nozzle,
probe fitting, probe liner, precollector cyclone and collector flask
(if used), and front half of the filter holder by washing these
components with TCE and placing the wash in a glass container.
Carefully measure the total amount of TCE used in the rinses. Perform
the TCE rinses as described in Method 5, Section 8.7.6.2, using TCE
instead of acetone.
8.7.1.2 Brush and rinse the inside of the cyclone, cyclone
collection flask, and the front half of the filter holder. Brush and
rinse each surface three times or more, if necessary, to remove visible
PM.
8.7.2 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). Same as in Method 5, Section
8.7.6.3.
8.7.3 Impinger Water. Same as Method 5, Section 8.7.6.4.
8.8 Blank. Save a portion of the TCE used for cleanup as a blank.
Take 200 ml of this TCE directly from the wash bottle being used, and
place it in a glass sample container labeled ``TCE Blank.''
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quality control
Section measure Effect
------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.4, 10.0..................... Sampling Ensures accurate
equipment leak measurement of stack
check and gas flow rate,
calibration. sample volume.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 61856]]
9.2 A quality control (QC) check of the volume metering system at
the field site is suggested before collecting the sample. Use the
procedure outlined in Method 5, Section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Method 5, Section 10.0.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 Analysis. Record the data required on a sheet such as the one
shown in Figure 5A-1. Handle each sample container as follows:
11.1.1 Container No. 1 (Filter). Transfer the filter from the
sample container to a tared glass weighing dish, and desiccate for 24
hours in a desiccator containing anhydrous calcium sulfate. Rinse
Container No. 1 with a measured amount of TCE, and analyze this rinse
with the contents of Container No. 2. Weigh the filter to a constant
weight. For the purpose of this analysis, the term ``constant weight''
means a difference of no more than 10 percent of the net filter weight
or 2 mg (whichever is greater) between two consecutive weighings made
24 hours apart. Report the ``final weight'' to the nearest 0.1 mg as
the average of these two values.
11.1.2 Container No. 2 (Probe to Filter Holder).
11.1.2.1 Before adding the rinse from Container No. 1 to Container
No. 2, note the level of liquid in Container No. 2, and confirm on the
analysis sheet whether leakage occurred during transport. If noticeable
leakage occurred, either void the sample or take steps, subject to the
approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results.
11.1.2.2 Add the rinse from Container No. 1 to Container No. 2 and
measure the liquid in this container either volumetrically to
1 ml or gravimetrically to 0.5 g. Check to see
whether there is any appreciable quantity of condensed water present in
the TCE rinse (look for a boundary layer or phase separation). If the
volume of condensed water appears larger than 5 ml, separate the oil-
TCE fraction from the water fraction using a separatory funnel. Measure
the volume of the water phase to the nearest ml; adjust the stack gas
moisture content, if necessary (see Sections 12.3 and 12.4). Next,
extract the water phase with several 25-ml portions of TCE until, by
visual observation, the TCE does not remove any additional organic
material. Transfer the remaining water fraction to a tared beaker and
evaporate to dryness at 93 deg.C (200 deg.F), desiccate for 24 hours,
and weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg.
11.1.2.3 Treat the total TCE fraction (including TCE from the
filter container rinse and water phase extractions) as follows:
Transfer the TCE and oil to a tared beaker, and evaporate at ambient
temperature and pressure. The evaporation of TCE from the solution may
take several days. Do not desiccate the sample until the solution
reaches an apparent constant volume or until the odor of TCE is not
detected. When it appears that the TCE has evaporated, desiccate the
sample, and weigh it at 24-hour intervals to obtain a ``constant
weight'' (as defined for Container No. 1 above). The ``total weight''
for Container No. 2 is the sum of the evaporated PM weight of the TCE-
oil and water phase fractions. Report the results to the nearest 0.1
mg.
11.1.3 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). This step may be conducted in
the field. Weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to
the nearest 0.5 g using a balance.
11.1.4 ``TCE Blank'' Container. Measure TCE in this container
either volumetrically or gravimetrically. Transfer the TCE to a tared
250-ml beaker, and evaporate to dryness at ambient temperature and
pressure. Desiccate for 24 hours, and weigh to a constant weight.
Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.
Note: In order to facilitate the evaporation of TCE liquid
samples, these samples may be dried in a controlled temperature oven
at temperatures up to 38 deg.C (100 deg.F) until the liquid is
evaporated.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant
figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after the
final calculation. Other forms of the equations may be used as long as
they give equivalent results.
12.1 Nomenclature. Same as Method 5, Section 12.1, with the
following additions:
Ct = TCE blank residue concentration, mg/g.
mt = Mass of residue of TCE blank after evaporation, mg.
Vpc = Volume of water collected in precollector, ml.
Vt = Volume of TCE blank, ml.
Vtw = Volume of TCE used in wash, ml.
Wt = Weight of residue in TCE wash, mg.
t = Density of TCE (see label on bottle), g/ml.
12.2 Dry Gas Meter Temperature, Orifice Pressure Drop, and Dry Gas
Volume. Same as Method 5, Sections 12.2 and 12.3, except use data
obtained in performing this test.
12.3 Volume of Water Vapor.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.134
Where:
K2 = 0.001333 m\3\/ml for metric units.
= 0.04706 ft\3\/ml for English units.
12.4 Moisture Content.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.135
Note: In saturated or water droplet-laden gas streams, two
calculations of the moisture content of the stack gas shall be made,
one from the impinger and precollector analysis (Equations 5A-1 and
5A-2) and a second from the assumption of saturated conditions. The
lower of the two values of moisture content shall be considered
correct. The procedure for determining the moisture content based
upon assumption of saturated conditions is given in Section 4.0 of
Method 4. For the purpose of this method, the average stack gas
temperature from Figure 5-3 of Method 5 may be used to make this
determination, provided that the accuracy of the in-stack
temperature sensor is within 1 deg.C (2 deg.F).
12.5 TCE Blank Concentration.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.136
Note: In no case shall a blank value of greater than 0.001
percent of the weight of TCE used be subtracted from the sample
weight.
12.6 TCE Wash Blank.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.137
12.7 Total PM Weight. Determine the total PM catch from the sum of
the weights obtained from Containers 1 and 2, less the TCE blank.
12.8 PM Concentration.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.138
Where:
K3 = 0.001 g/mg for metric units
= 0.0154 gr/mg for English units
12.9 Isokinetic Variation. Same as in Method 5, Section 12.11.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as Method 5, Section 17.0.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
[[Page 61857]]
Plant-----------------------------------------------------------------
Date------------------------------------------------------------------
Run No.---------------------------------------------------------------
Filter No.------------------------------------------------------------
Amount liquid lost during transport-----------------------------------
Acetone blank volume, m1----------------------------------------------
Acetone blank concentration, mg/mg (Equation 5-4)---------------------
Acetone wash blank, mg (Equation 5-5)---------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weight of particulate collected, mg
Container number --------------------------------------------------------------------------
Final weight Tare weight Weight gain
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total:
Less acetone blank...........
Weight of particulate matter.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Volume of liquid water collected
---------------------------------------
Impinger volume, Silica gel weight,
ml g
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Final
Initial
Liquid collected
Total volume collected.... .................. g* ml
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Convert weight of water to volume by dividing total weight increase by
density of water (1 g/ml).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.139
Method 5B--Determination of Nonsulfuric Acid Particulate Matter
Emissions From Stationary Sources
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and
analytical) essential to its performance. Some material is
incorporated by reference from other methods in this part.
Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method
should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following
additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, Method 5.
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. Nonsulfuric acid particulate matter. No CAS number
assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is determining applicable for the
determination of nonsulfuric acid particulate matter from stationary
sources, only where specified by an applicable subpart of the
regulations or where approved by the Administrator for a particular
application.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and
collected on a glass fiber filter maintained at a temperature of 160
14 deg.C (320 25 deg.F). The collected
sample is then heated in an oven at 160 deg.C (320 deg.F) for 6 hours
to volatilize any condensed sulfuric acid that may have been collected,
and the nonsulfuric acid particulate mass is determined
gravimetrically.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials,
operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the
safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of
the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations
prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as Method 5, Section 6.0, with the following addition and
exceptions:
6.1 Sample Collection. The probe liner heating system and filter
heating system must be capable of maintaining a sample gas temperature
of 160 14 deg.C (320 25 deg.F).
6.2 Sample Preparation. An oven is required for drying the sample.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as Method 5, Section 7.0.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport.
Same as Method 5, with the exception of the following:
8.1 Initial Filter Tare. Oven dry the filter at 160 5
deg.C (320 10 deg.F) for 2 to 3 hours, cool in a
desiccator for 2 hours, and weigh. Desiccate to constant weight to
obtain the initial tare weight. Use the applicable specifications and
techniques of Section 8.1.3 of Method 5 for this determination.
8.2 Probe and Filter Temperatures. Maintain the probe outlet and
filter temperatures at 160 14 deg.C (320 25
deg.F).
9.0 Quality Control
Same as Method 5, Section 9.0.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Method 5, Section 10.0.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Same as Method 5, Section 11.0, except replace Section
11.2.2 With the following:
11.1 Container No. 2. Note the level of liquid in the container,
and confirm on the analysis sheet whether leakage occurred during
transport. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void
the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the
Administrator, to correct the final results. Measure the liquid in this
container either volumetrically to 1 ml or gravimetrically
to 0.5 g. Transfer the
[[Page 61858]]
contents to a tared 250 ml beaker, and evaporate to dryness at ambient
temperature and pressure. Then oven dry the probe and filter samples at
a temperature of 160 5 deg.C (320 10 deg.F)
for 6 hours. Cool in a desiccator for 2 hours, and weigh to constant
weight. Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Same as in Method 5, Section 12.0.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as Method 5, Section 17.0.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data. [Reserved]
* * * * *
Method 5D--Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions from
Positive Pressure Fabric Filters
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and
analytical) essential to its performance. Some material is
incorporated by reference from other methods in this part.
Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method
should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following
additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, Method 5,
Method 17.
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability.
1.2.1 This method is applicable for the determination of PM
emissions from positive pressure fabric filters. Emissions are
determined in terms of concentration (mg/m3 or gr/
ft3) and emission rate (kg/hr or lb/hr).
1.2.2 The General Provisions of 40 CFR part 60, Sec. 60.8(e),
require that the owner or operator of an affected facility shall
provide performance testing facilities. Such performance testing
facilities include sampling ports, safe sampling platforms, safe access
to sampling sites, and utilities for testing. It is intended that
affected facilities also provide sampling locations that meet the
specification for adequate stack length and minimal flow disturbances
as described in Method 1. Provisions for testing are often overlooked
factors in designing fabric filters or are extremely costly. The
purpose of this procedure is to identify appropriate alternative
locations and procedures for sampling the emissions from positive
pressure fabric filters. The requirements that the affected facility
owner or operator provide adequate access to performance testing
facilities remain in effect.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source
and collected on a glass fiber filter maintained at a temperature at or
above the exhaust gas temperature up to a nominal 120 deg.C (248
25 deg.F). The particulate mass, which includes any
material that condenses at or above the filtration temperature, is
determined gravimetrically after the removal of uncombined water.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials,
operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the
safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of
the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to
determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to
performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as Section 6.0 of either Method 5 or Method 17.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as Section 7.0 of either Method 5 or Method 17.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
Same Section 8.0 of either Method 5 or Method 17, except replace
Section 8.2.1 of Method 5 with the following:
8.1 Determination of Measurement Site. The configuration of
positive pressure fabric filter structures frequently are not amenable
to emission testing according to the requirements of Method 1.
Following are several alternatives for determining measurement sites
for positive pressure fabric filters.
8.1.1 Stacks Meeting Method 1 Criteria. Use a measurement site as
specified in Method 1, Section 11.1.
8.1.2 Short Stacks Not Meeting Method 1 Criteria. Use stack
extensions and the procedures in Method 1. Alternatively, use flow
straightening vanes of the ``egg-crate'' type (see Figure 5D-1). Locate
the measurement site downstream of the straightening vanes at a
distance equal to or greater than two times the average equivalent
diameter of the vane openings and at least one-half of the overall
stack diameter upstream of the stack outlet.
8.1.3 Roof Monitor or Monovent. (See Figure 5D-2). For a positive
pressure fabric filter equipped with a peaked roof monitor, ridge vent,
or other type of monovent, use a measurement site at the base of the
monovent. Examples of such locations are shown in Figure 5D-2. The
measurement site must be upstream of any exhaust point (e.g., louvered
vent).
8.1.4 Compartment Housing. Sample immediately downstream of the
filter bags directly above the tops of the bags as shown in the
examples in Figure 5D-2. Depending on the housing design, use sampling
ports in the housing walls or locate the sampling equipment within the
compartment housing.
8.2 Determination of Number and Location of Traverse Points.
Locate the traverse points according to Method 1, Section 11.3. Because
a performance test consists of at least three test runs and because of
the varied configurations of positive pressure fabric filters, there
are several schemes by which the number of traverse points can be
determined and the three test runs can be conducted.
8.2.1 Single Stacks Meeting Method 1 Criteria. Select the number
of traverse points according to Method 1. Sample all traverse points
for each test run.
8.2.2 Other Single Measurement Sites. For a roof monitor or
monovent, single compartment housing, or other stack not meeting Method
1 criteria, use at least 24 traverse points. For example, for a
rectangular measurement site, such as a monovent, use a balanced 5 x 5
traverse point matrix. Sample all traverse points for each test run.
8.2.3 Multiple Measurement Sites. Sampling from two or more stacks
or measurement sites may be combined for a test run, provided the
following guidelines are met:
8.2.3.1 All measurement sites up to 12 must be sampled. For more
than 12 measurement sites, conduct sampling on at least 12 sites or 50
percent of the sites, whichever is greater. The measurement sites
sampled should be evenly, or nearly evenly, distributed among the
available sites; if not, all sites are to be sampled.
8.2.3.2 The same number of measurement sites must be sampled for
each test run.
8.2.3.3 The minimum number of traverse points per test run is 24.
An exception to the 24-point minimum would be a test combining the
sampling from two stacks meeting Method 1 criteria for acceptable stack
length, and
[[Page 61859]]
Method 1 specifies fewer than 12 points per site.
8.2.3.4 As long as the 24 traverse points per test run criterion
is met, the number of traverse points per measurement site may be
reduced to eight.
8.2.3.5 Alternatively, conduct a test run for each measurement
site individually using the criteria in Section 8.2.1 or 8.2.2 to
determine the number of traverse points. Each test run shall count
toward the total of three required for a performance test. If more than
three measurement sites are sampled, the number of traverse points per
measurement site may be reduced to eight as long as at least 72
traverse points are sampled for all the tests.
8.2.3.6 The following examples demonstrate the procedures for
sampling multiple measurement sites.
8.2.3.6.1 Example 1: A source with nine circular measurement sites
of equal areas may be tested as follows: For each test run, traverse
three measurement sites using four points per diameter (eight points
per measurement site). In this manner, test run number 1 will include
sampling from sites 1,2, and 3; run 2 will include samples from sites
4, 5, and 6; and run 3 will include sites 7, 8, and 9. Each test area
may consist of a separate test of each measurement site using eight
points. Use the results from all nine tests in determining the emission
average.
8.2.3.6.2 Example 2: A source with 30 rectangular measurement
sites of equal areas may be tested as follows: For each of the three
test runs, traverse five measurement sites using a 3 x 3 matrix of
traverse points for each site. In order to distribute the sampling
evenly over all the available measurement sites while sampling only 50
percent of the sites, number the sites consecutively from 1 to 30 and
sample all the even numbered (or odd numbered) sites. Alternatively,
conduct a separate test of each of 15 measurement sites using Section
8.2.1 or 8.2.2 to determine the number and location of traverse points,
as appropriate.
8.2.3.6.3 Example 3: A source with two measurement sites of equal
areas may be tested as follows: For each test of three test runs,
traverse both measurement sites, using Section 8.2.3 in determining the
number of traverse points. Alternatively, conduct two full emission
test runs for each measurement site using the criteria in Section 8.2.1
or 8.2.2 to determine the number of traverse points.
8.2.3.7 Other test schemes, such as random determination of
traverse points for a large number of measurement sites, may be used
with prior approval from the Administrator.
8.3 Velocity Determination.
8.3.1 The velocities of exhaust gases from positive pressure
baghouses are often too low to measure accurately with the type S pitot
tube specified in Method 2 (i.e., velocity head 1.3 mm H2O
(0.05 in. H2O)). For these conditions, measure the gas flow
rate at the fabric filter inlet following the procedures outlined in
Method 2. Calculate the average gas velocity at the measurement site as
shown in Section 12.2 and use this average velocity in determining and
maintaining isokinetic sampling rates.
8.3.2 Velocity determinations to determine and maintain isokinetic
rates at measurement sites with gas velocities within the range
measurable with the type S pitot tube (i.e., velocity head greater than
1.3 mm H2O (0.05 in. H2O)) shall be conducted
according to the procedures outlined in Method 2.
8.4 Sampling. Follow the procedures specified in Sections 8.1
through 8.6 of Method 5 or Sections 8.1 through 8.25 in Method 17 with
the exceptions as noted above.
8.5 Sample Recovery. Follow the procedures specified in Section
8.7 of Method 5 or Section 8.2 of Method 17.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quality control
Section measure Effect
------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.0, 10.0..................... Sampling Ensures accurate
equipment leak measurement of stack
check and gas flow rate,
calibration. sample volume.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, Section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Section 10.0 of either Method 5 or Method 17.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Same as Section 11.0 of either Method 5 or Method 17.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Same as Section 12.0 of either Method 5 or Method 17 with the
following exceptions:
12.1 Nomenclature.
Ao = Measurement site(s) total cross-sectional area, m\2\
(ft\2\).
C or Cavg = Average concentration of PM for all n runs, mg/
scm (gr/scf).
Qi = Inlet gas volume flow rate, m\3\/sec (ft\3\/sec).
mi = Mass collected for run i of n, mg (gr).
To = Average temperature of gas at measurement site, deg.K
( deg.R).
Ti = Average temperature of gas at inlet, deg.K ( deg.R).
Voli = Sample volume collected for run i of n, scm (scf).
v = Average gas velocity at the measurement site(s), m/s (ft/s)
Qo = Total baghouse exhaust volumetric flow rate, m\3\/sec
(ft\3\/sec).
Qd = Dilution air flow rate, m\3\/sec (ft\3\/sec).
Tamb = Ambient Temperature, ( deg.K).
12.2 Average Gas Velocity. When following Section 8.3.1, calculate
the average gas velocity at the measurement site as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.140
12.3 Volumetric Flow Rate. Total volumetric flow rate may be
determined as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.141
12.4 Dilution Air Flow Rate.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.142
12.5 Average PM Concentration. For multiple measurement sites,
calculate the average PM concentration as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.143
13.0 Method Performance. [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention. [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management. [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as Method 5, Section 17.0.
[[Page 61860]]
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.144
[[Page 61861]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.145
[[Page 61862]]
Method 5E--Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions From the
Wool Fiberglass Insulation Manufacturing Industry
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and
analytical) essential to its performance. Some material is
incorporated by reference from other methods in this part.
Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method
should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following
additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, and Method 5.
1.0 Scope and Applications
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination
of PM emissions from wool fiberglass insulation manufacturing sources.
2.0 Summary of Method
Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and
is collected either on a glass fiber filter maintained at a temperature
in the range of 120 14 deg.C (248 25 deg.F)
and in impingers in solutions of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide (NaOH). The
filtered particulate mass, which includes any material that condenses
at or above the filtration temperature, is determined gravimetrically
after the removal of uncombined water. The condensed PM collected in
the impinger solutions is determined as total organic carbon (TOC)
using a nondispersive infrared type of analyzer. The sum of the
filtered PM mass and the condensed PM is reported as the total PM mass.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials,
operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the
safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of
the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations
prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following reagents are hazardous.
Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in
preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with
copious amounts of water at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under
shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burn as thermal burn.
5.2.1 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl). Highly toxic. Vapors are highly
irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs, causing severe damage. May
cause bronchitis, pneumonia, or edema of lungs. Exposure to
concentrations of 0.13 to 0.2 percent in air can be lethal in minutes.
Will react with metals, producing hydrogen.
5.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes severe damage to eye tissues
and to skin. Inhalation causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs.
Reacts exothermically with limited amounts of water.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5, Section 6.1, with the
exception of the following:
6.1.1 Probe Liner. Same as described in Section 6.1.1.2 of Method
5 except use only borosilicate or quartz glass liners.
6.1.2 Filter Holder. Same as described in Section 6.1.1.5 of
Method 5 with the addition of a leak-tight connection in the rear half
of the filter holder designed for insertion of a temperature sensor
used for measuring the sample gas exit temperature.
6.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, Section 6.2, except three
wash bottles are needed instead of two and only glass storage bottles
and funnels may be used.
6.3 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 5, Section 6.3, with the
additional equipment for TOC analysis as described below:
6.3.1 Sample Blender or Homogenizer. Waring type or ultrasonic.
6.3.2 Magnetic Stirrer.
6.3.3 Hypodermic Syringe. 0- to 100-l capacity.
6.3.4 Total Organic Carbon Analyzer. Rosemount Model 2100A
analyzer or equivalent and a recorder.
6.3.5 Beaker. 30-ml.
6.3.6 Water Bath. Temperature controlled.
6.3.7 Volumetric Flasks. 1000-ml and 500-ml.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended that all reagents
conform to the specifications established by the Committee on
Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society, where such
specifications are available; otherwise, use the best available grade.
7.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5, Section 7.1, with the
addition of 0.1 N NaOH (Dissolve 4 g of NaOH in water and dilute to 1
liter).
7.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, Section 7.2, with the
addition of the following:
7.2.1 Water. Deionized distilled to conform to ASTM Specification
D 1193-77 or 91 Type 3 (incorporated by reference--see Sec. 60.17). The
potassium permanganate (KMnO4) test for oxidizable organic
matter may be omitted when high concentrations of organic matter are
not expected to be present.
7.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide. Same as described in Section 7.1.
7.3 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 5, Section 7.3, with the
addition of the following:
7.3.1 Carbon Dioxide-Free Water. Distilled or deionized water that
has been freshly boiled for 15 minutes and cooled to room temperature
while preventing exposure to ambient air by using a cover vented with
an Ascarite tube.
7.3.2 Hydrochloric Acid. HCl, concentrated, with a dropper.
7.3.3 Organic Carbon Stock Solution. Dissolve 2.1254 g of dried
potassium biphthalate (HOOCC6H4COOK) in
CO2-free water, and dilute to 1 liter in a volumetric flask.
This solution contains 1000 mg/L organic carbon.
7.3.4 Inorganic Carbon Stock Solution. Dissolve 4.404 g anhydrous
sodium carbonate (Na2CO3.) in about 500 ml of
CO2-free water in a 1-liter volumetric flask. Add 3.497 g
anhydrous sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3) to the flask, and
dilute to 1 liter with CO2 -free water. This solution
contains 1000 mg/L inorganic carbon.
7.3.5 Oxygen Gas. CO2 -free.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Pretest Preparation and Preliminary Determinations. Same as
Method 5, Sections 8.1 and 8.2, respectively.
8.2 Preparation of Sampling Train. Same as Method 5, Section 8.3,
except that 0.1 N NaOH is used in place of water in the impingers. The
volumes of the solutions are the same as in Method 5.
8.3 Leak-Check Procedures, Sampling Train Operation, Calculation
of Percent Isokinetic. Same as Method 5, Sections 8.4 through 8.6,
respectively.
8.4 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, Sections 8.7.1 through
8.7.4, with the addition of the following:
8.4.1 Save portions of the water, acetone, and 0.1 N NaOH used for
cleanup as blanks. Take 200 ml of each liquid directly from the wash
bottles being used, and place in glass sample containers labeled
``water blank,'' ``acetone blank,'' and ``NaOH blank,'' respectively.
[[Page 61863]]
8.4.2 Inspect the train prior to and during disassembly, and note
any abnormal conditions. Treat the samples as follows:
8.4.2.1 Container No. 1. Same as Method 5, Section 8.7.6.1.
8.4.2.2 Container No. 2. Use water to rinse the sample nozzle,
probe, and front half of the filter holder three times in the manner
described in Section 8.7.6.2 of Method 5 except that no brushing is
done. Put all the water wash in one container, seal, and label.
8.4.2.3 Container No. 3. Rinse and brush the sample nozzle, probe,
and front half of the filter holder with acetone as described for
Container No. 2 in Section 8.7.6.2 of Method 5.
8.4.2.4 Container No. 4. Place the contents of the silica gel
impinger in its original container as described for Container No. 3 in
Section 8.7.6.3 of Method 5.
8.4.2.5 Container No. 5. Measure the liquid in the first three
impingers and record the volume or weight as described for the Impinger
Water in Section 8.7.6.4 of Method 5. Do not discard this liquid, but
place it in a sample container using a glass funnel to aid in the
transfer from the impingers or graduated cylinder (if used) to the
sample container. Rinse each impinger thoroughly with 0.1 N NaOH three
times, as well as the graduated cylinder (if used) and the funnel, and
put these rinsings in the same sample container. Seal the container and
label to clearly identify its contents.
8.5 Sample Transport. Whenever possible, containers should be
shipped in such a way that they remain upright at all times.
9.0 Quality Control.
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quality control
Section measure Effect
------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.3, 10.0..................... Sampling Ensures accurate
equipment leak- measurement of stack
check and gas flow rate,
calibration. sample volume.
10.1.2, 11.2.5.3.............. Repetitive Ensures precise
analyses. measurement of total
carbon and inorganic
carbon concentration
of samples, blank,
and standards.
10.1.4........................ TOC analyzer Ensures linearity of
calibration. analyzer response to
standards.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, Section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Method 5, Section 10.0, with the addition of the following
procedures for calibrating the total organic carbon analyzer:
10.1 Preparation of Organic Carbon Standard Curve.
10.1.1 Add 10 ml, 20 ml, 30 ml, 40 ml, and 50 ml of the organic
carbon stock solution to a series of five 1000-ml volumetric flasks.
Add 30 ml, 40 ml, and 50 ml of the same solution to a series of three
500-ml volumetric flasks. Dilute the contents of each flask to the mark
using CO2-free water. These flasks contain 10, 20, 30, 40,
50, 60, 80, and 100 mg/L organic carbon, respectively.
10.1.2 Use a hypodermic syringe to withdraw a 20- to 50-l
aliquot from the 10 mg/L standard solution and inject it into the total
carbon port of the analyzer. Measure the peak height. Repeat the
injections until three consecutive peaks are obtained within 10 percent
of their arithmetic mean. Repeat this procedure for the remaining
organic carbon standard solutions.
10.1.3 Calculate the corrected peak height for each standard by
deducting the blank correction (see Section 11.2.5.3) as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.146
Where:
A = Peak height of standard or sample, mm or other appropriate unit.
B = Peak height of blank, mm or other appropriate unit.
10.1.4 Prepare a linear regression plot of the arithmetic mean of
the three consecutive peak heights obtained for each standard solution
against the concentration of that solution. Calculate the calibration
factor as the inverse of the slope of this curve. If the product of the
arithmetic mean peak height for any standard solution and the
calibration factor differs from the actual concentration by more than 5
percent, remake and reanalyze that standard.
10.2 Preparation of Inorganic Carbon Standard Curve. Repeat the
procedures outlined in Sections 10.1.1 through 10.1.4, substituting the
inorganic carbon stock solution for the organic carbon stock solution,
and the inorganic carbon port of the analyzer for the total carbon
port.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Record the data required on a sheet such as the one shown in
Figure 5-6 of Method 5.
11.2 Handle each sample container as follows:
11.2.1 Container No. 1. Same as Method 5, Section 11.2.1, except
that the filters must be dried at 20 6 deg.C (68
10 deg.F) and ambient pressure.
11.2.2 Containers No. 2 and No. 3. Same as Method 5, Section
11.2.2, except that evaporation of the samples must be at 20
6 deg.C (68 10 deg.F) and ambient pressure.
11.2.3 Container No. 4. Same as Method 5, Section 11.2.3.
11.2.4 ``Water Blank'' and ``Acetone Blank'' Containers. Determine
the water and acetone blank values following the procedures for the
``Acetone Blank'' container in Section 11.2.4 of Method 5. Evaporate
the samples at ambient temperature (20 6 deg.C (68
10 deg.F)) and pressure.
11.2.5 Container No. 5. For the determination of total organic
carbon, perform two analyses on successive identical samples, i.e.,
total carbon and inorganic carbon. The desired quantity is the
difference between the two values obtained. Both analyses are based on
conversion of sample carbon into carbon dioxide for measurement by a
nondispersive infrared analyzer. Results of analyses register as peaks
on a strip chart recorder.
11.2.5.1 The principal differences between the operating
parameters for the two channels involve the combustion tube packing
material and temperature. In the total carbon channel, a high
temperature (950 deg.C (1740 deg.F)) furnace heats a Hastelloy
combustion tube packed with cobalt oxide-impregnated asbestos fiber.
The oxygen in the carrier gas, the elevated temperature, and the
catalytic effect of the packing result in oxidation of both organic and
inorganic carbonaceous material to CO2, and steam. In the
[[Page 61864]]
inorganic carbon channel, a low temperature (150 deg.C (300 deg.F))
furnace heats a glass tube containing quartz chips wetted with 85
percent phosphoric acid. The acid liberates CO2 and steam
from inorganic carbonates. The operating temperature is below that
required to oxidize organic matter. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions for assembly, testing, calibration, and operation of the
analyzer.
11.2.5.2 As samples collected in 0.1 N NaOH often contain a high
measure of inorganic carbon that inhibits repeatable determinations of
TOC, sample pretreatment is necessary. Measure and record the liquid
volume of each sample (or impinger contents). If the sample contains
solids or immiscible liquid matter, homogenize the sample with a
blender or ultrasonics until satisfactory repeatability is obtained.
Transfer a representative portion of 10 to 15 ml to a 30-ml beaker, and
acidify with about 2 drops of concentrated HCl to a pH of 2 or less.
Warm the acidified sample at 50 deg.C (120 deg.F) in a water bath for
15 minutes.
11.2.5.3 While stirring the sample with a magnetic stirrer, use a
hypodermic syringe to withdraw a 20-to 50-1 aliquot from the
beaker. Analyze the sample for total carbon and calculate its corrected
mean peak height according to the procedures outlined in Sections
10.1.2 and 10.1.3. Similarly analyze an aliquot of the sample for
inorganic carbon. Repeat the analyses for all the samples and for the
0.1 N NaOH blank.
11.2.5.4 Ascertain the total carbon and inorganic carbon
concentrations (CTC and CIC, respectively) of
each sample and blank by comparing the corrected mean peak heights for
each sample and blank to the appropriate standard curve.
Note: If samples must be diluted for analysis, apply an
appropriate dilution factor.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Same as Method 5, Section 12.0, with the addition of the following:
12.1 Nomenclature.
Cc = Concentration of condensed particulate matter in stack
gas, gas dry basis, corrected to standard conditions, g/dscm (gr/dscf).
CIC = Concentration of condensed TOC in the liquid sample,
from Section 11.2.5, mg/L.
Ct = Total particulate concentration, dry basis, corrected
to standard conditions, g/dscm (gr/dscf).
CTC = Concentration of condensed TOC in the liquid sample,
from Section 11.2.5, mg/L.
CTOC = Concentration of condensed TOC in the liquid sample,
mg/L.
mTOC = Mass of condensed TOC collected in the impingers, mg.
Vm(std) = Volume of gas sample measured by the dry gas
meter, corrected to standard conditions, from Section 12.3 of Method 5,
dscm (dscf).
Vs = Total volume of liquid sample, ml.
12.2 Concentration of Condensed TOC in Liquid Sample.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.148
12.3 Mass of Condensed TOC Collected.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.149
Where:
0.001 = Liters per milliliter.
12.4 Concentration of Condensed Particulate Material.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.150
Where:
K4 = 0.001 g/mg for metric units.
= 0.0154 gr/mg for English units.
12.5 Total Particulate Concentration.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.151
13.0 Method Performance. [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention. [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management. [Reserved]
16.0 References.
Same as Section 17.0 of Method 5, with the addition of the
following:
1. American Public Health Association, American Water Works
Association, Water Pollution Control Federation. Standard Methods
for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. Fifteenth Edition.
Washington, D.C. 1980.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data. [Reserved]
Method 5F--Determination of Nonsulfate Particulate Matter Emissions
From Stationary Sources
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and
analytical) essential to its performance. Some material is
incorporated by reference from other methods in this part.
Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method
should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following
additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, and Method 5.
1.0 Scope and Applications
1.1 Analyte. Nonsulfate particulate matter (PM). No CAS number
assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination
of nonsulfate PM emissions from stationary sources. Use of this method
must be specified by an applicable subpart of the standards, or
approved by the Administrator for a particular application.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and
collected on a filter maintained at a temperature in the range 160
14 deg.C (320 25 deg.F). The collected
sample is extracted with water. A portion of the extract is analyzed
for sulfate content by ion chromatography. The remainder is neutralized
with ammonium hydroxide (NH4OH), dried, and weighed. The
weight of sulfate in the sample is calculated as ammonium sulfate
((NH4)2SO4), and is subtracted from
the total particulate weight; the result is reported as nonsulfate
particulate matter.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials,
operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the
safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of
the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations
prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection and Recovery. Same as Method 5, Sections 6.1
and 6.2, respectively.
6.2 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 5, Section 6.3, with the
addition of the following:
6.2.1 Erlenmeyer Flasks. 125-ml, with ground glass joints.
6.2.2 Air Condenser. With ground glass joint compatible with the
Erlenmeyer flasks.
6.2.3 Beakers. 600-ml.
6.2.4 Volumetric Flasks. 1-liter, 500-ml (one for each sample),
200-ml, and 50-ml (one for each sample and standard).
6.2.5 Pipet. 5-ml (one for each sample and standard).
6.2.6 Ion Chromatograph. The ion chromatograph should have at
least the following components.
6.2.6.1 Columns. An anion separation column or other column
[[Page 61865]]
capable of resolving the sulfate ion from other species present and a
standard anion suppressor column. Suppressor columns are produced as
proprietary items; however, one can be produced in the laboratory using
the resin available from BioRad Company, 32nd and Griffin Streets,
Richmond, California. Other systems which do not use suppressor columns
may also be used.
6.2.6.2 Pump. Capable of maintaining a steady flow as required by
the system.
6.2.6.3 Flow Gauges. Capable of measuring the specified system
flow rate.
6.2.6.4 Conductivity Detector.
6.2.6.5 Recorder. Compatible with the output voltage range of the
detector.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended that all reagents
conform to the specifications established by the Committee on
Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society, where such
specifications are available; otherwise, use the best available grade.
7.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5, Section 7.1.
7.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, Section 7.2, with the
addition of the following:
7.2.1 Water. Deionized distilled, to conform to ASTM D 1193-77 or
91 Type 3 (incorporated by reference--see Sec. 60.17). The potassium
permanganate (KMnO4) test for oxidizable organic matter may
be omitted when high concentrations of organic matter are not expected
to be present.
7.3 Analysis. Same as Method 5, Section 7.3, with the addition of
the following:
7.3.1 Water. Same as in Section 7.2.1.
7.3.2 Stock Standard Solution, 1 mg
(NH4)2SO4/ml. Dry an adequate amount
of primary standard grade ammonium sulfate
((NH4)2SO4) at 105 to 110 deg.C (220
to 230 deg.F) for a minimum of 2 hours before preparing the standard
solution. Then dissolve exactly 1.000 g of dried
(NH4)2SO4 in water in a 1-liter
volumetric flask, and dilute to 1 liter. Mix well.
7.3.3 Working Standard Solution, 25 g
(NH4)2SO4/ml. Pipet 5 ml of the stock
standard solution into a 200-ml volumetric flask. Dilute to 200 ml with
water.
7.3.4 Eluent Solution. Weigh 1.018 g of sodium carbonate
(Na2CO3) and 1.008 g of sodium bicarbonate
(NaHCO3), and dissolve in 4 liters of water. This solution
is 0.0024 M Na2CO3/0.003 M NaHCO3.
Other eluents appropriate to the column type and capable of resolving
sulfate ion from other species present may be used.
7.3.5 Ammonium Hydroxide. Concentrated, 14.8 M.
7.3.6 Phenolphthalein Indicator. 3,3-Bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)-1-(3H)-
isobenzo-furanone. Dissolve 0.05 g in 50 ml of ethanol and 50 ml of
water.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
Same as Method 5, Section 8.0, with the exception of the following:
8.1 Sampling Train Operation. Same as Method 5, Section 8.5,
except that the probe outlet and filter temperatures shall be
maintained at 160 14 deg.C (320 25 deg.F).
8.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, Section 8.7, except that
the recovery solvent shall be water instead of acetone, and a clean
filter from the same lot as those used during testing shall be saved
for analysis as a blank.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quality control
Section measure Effect
------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.3, 10.0..................... Sampling Ensures accurate
equipment leak measurement of stack
check and gas flow rate,
calibration. sample volume.
10.1.2, 11.2.5.3.............. Repetitive Ensures precise
analyses. measurement of total
carbon and inorganic
carbon concentration
of samples, blank,
and standards.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, Section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Method 5, Section 10.0, with the addition of the following:
10.1 Determination of Ion Chromatograph Calibration Factor S.
Prepare a series of five standards by adding 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, and
10.0 ml of working standard solution (25 g/ml) to a series of
five 50-ml volumetric flasks. (The standard masses will equal 25, 50,
100, 150, and 250 g.) Dilute each flask to the mark with
water, and mix well. Analyze each standard according to the
chromatograph manufacturer's instructions. Take peak height
measurements with symmetrical peaks; in all other cases, calculate peak
areas. Prepare or calculate a linear regression plot of the standard
masses in g (x-axis) versus their responses (y-axis). From
this line, or equation, determine the slope and calculate its
reciprocal which is the calibration factor, S. If any point deviates
from the line by more than 7 percent of the concentration at that
point, remake and reanalyze that standard. This deviation can be
determined by multiplying S times the response for each standard. The
resultant concentrations must not differ by more than 7 percent from
each known standard mass (i.e., 25, 50, 100, 150, and 250 g).
10.2 Conductivity Detector. Calibrate according to manufacturer's
specifications prior to initial use.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Sample Extraction.
11.1.1 Note on the analytical data sheet, the level of the liquid
in the container, and whether any sample was lost during shipment. If a
noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void the sample or
use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct
the final results.
11.1.2 Cut the filter into small pieces, and place it in a 125-ml
Erlenmeyer flask with a ground glass joint equipped with an air
condenser. Rinse the shipping container with water, and pour the rinse
into the flask. Add additional water to the flask until it contains
about 75 ml, and place the flask on a hot plate. Gently reflux the
contents for 6 to 8 hours. Cool the solution, and transfer it to a 500-
ml volumetric flask. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask with water, and
transfer the rinsings to the volumetric flask including the pieces of
filter.
11.1.3 Transfer the probe rinse to the same 500-ml volumetric
flask with the filter sample. Rinse the sample bottle with water, and
add the rinsings to the volumetric flask. Dilute the contents of the
flask to the mark with water.
11.1.4 Allow the contents of the flask to settle until all solid
material is at the bottom of the flask. If necessary, remove and
centrifuge a portion of the sample.
11.1.5 Repeat the procedures outlined in Sections 11.1.1 through
11.1.4 for each sample and for the filter blank.
11.2 Sulfate (SO4) Analysis.
[[Page 61866]]
11.2.1 Prepare a standard calibration curve according to the
procedures outlined in Section 10.1.
11.2.2 Pipet 5 ml of the sample into a 50-ml volumetric flask, and
dilute to 50 ml with water. (Alternatively, eluent solution may be used
instead of water in all sample, standard, and blank dilutions.) Analyze
the set of standards followed by the set of samples, including the
filter blank, using the same injection volume used for the standards.
11.2.3 Repeat the analyses of the standards and the samples, with
the standard set being done last. The two peak height or peak area
responses for each sample must agree within 5 percent of their
arithmetic mean for the analysis to be valid. Perform this analysis
sequence on the same day. Dilute any sample and the blank with equal
volumes of water if the concentration exceeds that of the highest
standard.
11.2.4 Document each sample chromatogram by listing the following
analytical parameters: injection point, injection volume, sulfate
retention time, flow rate, detector sensitivity setting, and recorder
chart speed.
11.3 Sample Residue.
11.3.1 Transfer the remaining contents of the volumetric flask to
a tared 600-ml beaker or similar container. Rinse the volumetric flask
with water, and add the rinsings to the tared beaker. Make certain that
all particulate matter is transferred to the beaker. Evaporate the
water in an oven at 105 deg.C (220 deg.F) until only about 100 ml of
water remains. Remove the beakers from the oven, and allow them to
cool.
11.3.2 After the beakers have cooled, add five drops of
phenolphthalein indicator, and then add concentrated ammonium hydroxide
until the solution turns pink. Return the samples to the oven at 105
deg.C (220 deg.F), and evaporate the samples to dryness. Cool the
samples in a desiccator, and weigh the samples to constant weight.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Same as Method 5, Section 12.0, with the addition of the following:
12.1 Nomenclature.
CW = Water blank residue concentration, mg/ml.
F = Dilution factor (required only if sample dilution was needed to
reduce the concentration into the range of calibration).
HS = Arithmetic mean response of duplicate sample analyses,
mm for height or mm2 for area.
Hb = Arithmetic mean response of duplicate filter blank
analyses, mm for height or mm2 for area.
mb = Mass of beaker used to dry sample, mg.
mf = Mass of sample filter, mg.
mn = Mass of nonsulfate particulate matter in the sample as
collected, mg.
ms = Mass of ammonium sulfate in the sample as collected,
mg.
mt = Mass of beaker, filter, and dried sample, mg.
mw = Mass of residue after evaporation of water blank, mg.
S = Calibration factor, g/mm.
Vb = Volume of water blank, ml.
VS = Volume of sample collected, 500 ml.
12.2 Water Blank Concentration.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.152
12.3 Mass of Ammonium Sulfate.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.153
Where:
100 = Aliquot factor, 495 ml/5 ml
1000 = Constant, g/mg
12.4 Mass of Nonsulfate Particulate Matter.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.154
13.0 Method Performance. [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention. [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management. [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 The following procedure may be used as an alternative to the
procedure in Section 11.0
16.1.1 Apparatus. Same as for Method 6, Sections 6.3.3 to 6.3.6
with the following additions.
16.1.1.1 Beakers. 250-ml, one for each sample, and 600-ml.
16.1.1.2 Oven. Capable of maintaining temperatures of 75
5 deg.C (167 9 deg.F) and 105
5 deg.C (221 9 deg.F).
16.1.1.3 Buchner Funnel.
16.1.1.4 Glass Columns. 25-mm x 305-mm (1-in. x 12-in.) with
Teflon stopcock.
16.1.1.5 Volumetric Flasks. 50-ml and 500-ml, one set for each
sample, and 100-ml, 200-ml, and 1000-ml.
16.1.1.6 Pipettes. Two 20-ml and one 200-ml, one set for each
sample, and 5-ml.
16.1.1.7 Filter Flasks. 500-ml.
16.1.1.8 Polyethylene Bottle. 500-ml, one for each sample.
16.1.2 Reagents. Same as Method 6, Sections 7.3.2 to 7.3.5 with
the following additions:
16.1.2.1 Water, Ammonium Hydroxide, and Phenolphthalein. Same as
Sections 7.2.1, 7.3.5, and 7.3.6 of this method, respectively.
16.1.2.2 Filter. Glass fiber to fit Buchner funnel.
16.1.2.3 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl), 1 m. Add 8.3 ml of concentrated
HCl (12 M) to 50 ml of water in a 100-ml volumetric flask. Dilute to
100 ml with water.
16.1.2.4 Glass Wool.
16.1.2.5 Ion Exchange Resin. Strong cation exchange resin,
hydrogen form, analytical grade.
16.1.2.6 pH Paper. Range of 1 to 7.
16.1.3 Analysis.
16.1.3.1 Ion Exchange Column Preparation. Slurry the resin with 1
M HCl in a 250-ml beaker, and allow to stand overnight. Place 2.5 cm (1
in.) of glass wool in the bottom of the glass column. Rinse the
slurried resin twice with water. Resuspend the resin in water, and pour
sufficient resin into the column to make a bed 5.1 cm (2 in.) deep. Do
not allow air bubbles to become entrapped in the resin or glass wool to
avoid channeling, which may produce erratic results. If necessary, stir
the resin with a glass rod to remove air bubbles, after the column has
been prepared, never let the liquid level fall below the top of the
upper glass wool plug. Place a 2.5-cm (1-in.) plug of glass wool on top
of the resin. Rinse the column with water until the eluate gives a pH
of 5 or greater as measured with pH paper.
16.1.3.2 Sample Extraction. Followup the procedure given in
Section 11.1.3 except do not dilute the sample to 500 ml.
16.1.3.3 Sample Residue.
16.1.3.3.1 Place at least one clean glass filter for each sample
in a Buchner funnel, and rinse the filters with water. Remove the
filters from the funnel, and dry them in an oven at 105
5 deg. C (221 9 deg.F); then cool in a desiccator. Weigh
each filter to constant weight according to the procedure in Method 5,
Section 11.0. Record the weight of each filter to the nearest 0.1 mg.
[[Page 61867]]
16.1.3.3.2 Assemble the vacuum filter apparatus, and place one of
the clean, tared glass fiber filters in the Buchner funnel. Decant the
liquid portion of the extracted sample (Section 16.1.3.2) through the
tared glass fiber filter into a clean, dry, 500-ml filter flask. Rinse
all the particulate matter remaining in the volumetric flask onto the
glass fiber filter with water. Rinse the particulate matter with
additional water. Transfer the filtrate to a 500-ml volumetric flask,
and dilute to 500 ml with water. Dry the filter overnight at 105
5 deg. C (221 9 deg.F), cool in a desiccator,
and weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg.
16.1.3.3.3 Dry a 250-ml beaker at 75 5 deg. C (167
9 deg. F), and cool in a desiccator; then weigh to
constant weight to the nearest 0.1 mg. Pipette 200 ml of the filtrate
that was saved into a tared 250-ml beaker; add five drops of
phenolphthalein indicator and sufficient concentrated ammonium
hydroxide to turn the solution pink. Carefully evaporate the contents
of the beaker to dryness at 75 5 deg. C (167
9 deg. F). Check for dryness every 30 minutes. Do not continue to bake
the sample once it has dried. Cool the sample in a desiccator, and
weigh to constant weight to the nearest 0.1 mg.
16.1.3.4 Sulfate Analysis. Adjust the flow rate through the ion
exchange column to 3 ml/min. Pipette a 20-ml aliquot of the filtrate
onto the top of the ion exchange column, and collect the eluate in a
50-ml volumetric flask. Rinse the column with two 15-ml portions of
water. Stop collection of the eluate when the volume in the flask
reaches 50-ml. Pipette a 20-ml aliquot of the eluate into a 250-ml
Erlenmeyer flask, add 80 ml of 100 percent isopropanol and two to four
drops of thorin indicator, and titrate to a pink end point using 0.0100
N barium perchlorate. Repeat and average the titration volumes. Run a
blank with each series of samples. Replicate titrations must agree
within 1 percent or 0.2 ml, whichever is larger. Perform the ion
exchange and titration procedures on duplicate portions of the
filtrate. Results should agree within 5 percent. Regenerate or replace
the ion exchange resin after 20 sample aliquots have been analyzed or
if the end point of the titration becomes unclear.
Note: Protect the 0.0100 N barium perchlorate solution from
evaporation at all times.
16.1.3.5 Blank Determination. Begin with a sample of water of the
same volume as the samples being processed and carry it through the
analysis steps described in Sections 16.1.3.3 and 16.1.3.4. A blank
value larger than 5 mg should not be subtracted from the final
particulate matter mass. Causes for large blank values should be
investigated and any problems resolved before proceeding with further
analyses.
16.1.4 Calibration. Calibrate the barium perchlorate solutions as
in Method 6, Section 10.5.
16.1.5 Calculations.
16.1.5.1 Nomenclature. Same as Section 12.1 with the following
additions:
ma = Mass of clean analytical filter, mg.
md = Mass of dissolved particulate matter, mg.
me = Mass of beaker and dissolved particulate matter after
evaporation of filtrate, mg.
mp = Mass of insoluble particulate matter, mg.
mr = Mass of analytical filter, sample filter, and insoluble
particulate matter, mg.
mbk = Mass of nonsulfate particulate matter in blank sample,
mg.
mn = Mass of nonsulfate particulate matter, mg.
ms = Mass of Ammonium sulfate, mg.
N = Normality of Ba(ClO4) titrant, meq/ml.
Va = Volume of aliquot taken for titration, 20 ml.
Vc = Volume of titrant used for titration blank, ml.
Vd = Volume of filtrate evaporated, 200 ml.
Ve = Volume of eluate collected, 50 ml.
Vf = Volume of extracted sample, 500 ml.
Vi = Volume of filtrate added to ion exchange column, 20 ml.
Vt = Volume of Ba(C104)2 titrant, ml.
W = Equivalent weight of ammonium sulfate, 66.07 mg/meq.
16.1.5.2 Mass of Insoluble Particulate Matter.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.155
16.1.5.3 Mass of Dissolved Particulate Matter.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.156
16.1.5.4 Mass of Ammonium Sulfate.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.157
16.1.5.5 Mass of Nonsulfate Particulate Matter.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.158
17.0 References
Same as Method 5, Section 17.0, with the addition of the following:
1. Mulik, J.D. and E. Sawicki. Ion Chromatographic Analysis of
Environmental Pollutants. Ann Arbor, Ann Arbor Science Publishers,
Inc. Vol. 2, 1979.
2. Sawicki, E., J.D. Mulik, and E. Wittgenstein. Ion
Chromatographic Analysis of Environmental Pollutants. Ann Arbor, Ann
Arbor Science Publishers, Inc. Vol. 1. 1978.
3. Siemer, D.D. Separation of Chloride and Bromide from Complex
Matrices Prior to Ion Chromatographic Determination. Analytical
Chemistry 52(12): 1874-1877. October 1980.
4. Small, H., T.S. Stevens, and W.C. Bauman. Novel Ion Exchange
Chromatographic Method Using Conductimetric Determination.
Analytical Chemistry. 47(11):1801. 1975.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data. [Reserved]
Method 5G--Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions From Wood
Heaters (Dilution Tunnel Sampling Location)
Note: This method does not include all of the specifications
(e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and
analytical) essential to its performance. Some material is
incorporated by reference from other methods in this part.
Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method
should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following
additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, Method 4,
Method 5, Method 5H, and Method 28.
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination
of PM emissions from wood heaters.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this
method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant
sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 The exhaust from a wood heater is collected with a total
collection hood, and is combined with ambient dilution air. Particulate
matter is withdrawn proportionally from a single point in a sampling
tunnel, and is collected on two glass fiber filters in series. The
filters are maintained at a temperature of no greater than 32 deg.C
(90 deg.F). The particulate mass is determined gravimetrically after
the removal of uncombined water.
2.2 There are three sampling train approaches described in this
method: (1) One dual-filter dry sampling train operated at about 0.015
m\3\/min (0.5 cfm), (2) One dual-filter plus impingers sampling train
operated at about 0.015 m\3\/min (0.5 cfm), and (3) two dual-filter dry
sampling trains operated simultaneously at any flow rate. Options
[[Page 61868]]
(2) and (3) are referenced in Section 16.0 of this method. The dual-
filter dry sampling train equipment and operation, option (1), are
described in detail in this method.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials,
operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the
safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of
the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations
prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. The following items are required for sample
collection:
6.1.1 Sampling Train. The sampling train configuration is shown in
Figure 5G-1 and consists of the following components:
6.1.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel (e.g., 316 or grade more corrosion
resistant) or glass about 9.5 mm (\3/8\ in.) I.D., 0.6 m (24 in.) in
length. If made of stainless steel, the probe shall be constructed from
seamless tubing.
6.1.1.2 Pitot Tube. Type S, as described in Section 6.1 of Method
2. The Type S pitot tube assembly shall have a known coefficient,
determined as outlined in Method 2, Section 10. Alternatively, a
standard pitot may be used as described in Method 2, Section 6.1.2.
6.1.1.3 Differential Pressure Gauge. Inclined manometer or
equivalent device, as described in Method 2, Section 6.2. One manometer
shall be used for velocity head (p) readings and another
(optional) for orifice differential pressure readings (H).
6.1.1.4 Filter Holders. Two each made of borosilicate glass,
stainless steel, or Teflon, with a glass frit or stainless steel filter
support and a silicone rubber, Teflon, or Viton gasket. The holder
design shall provide a positive seal against leakage from the outside
or around the filters. The filter holders shall be placed in series
with the backup filter holder located 25 to 100 mm (1 to 4 in.)
downstream from the primary filter holder. The filter holder shall be
capable of holding a filter with a 100 mm (4 in.) diameter, except as
noted in Section 16.
6.1.1.5 Filter Temperature Monitoring System. A temperature sensor
capable of measuring temperature to within 3 deg.C
( 5 deg.F). The sensor shall be installed at the exit side
of the front filter holder so that the sensing tip of the temperature
sensor is in direct contact with the sample gas or in a thermowell as
shown in Figure 5G-1. The temperature sensor shall comply with the
calibration specifications in Method 2, Section 10.3. Alternatively,
the sensing tip of the temperature sensor may be installed at the inlet
side of the front filter holder.
6.1.1.6 Dryer. Any system capable of removing water from the
sample gas to less than 1.5 percent moisture (volume percent) prior to
the metering system. The system shall include a temperature sensor for
demonstrating that sample gas temperature exiting the dryer is less
than 20 deg.C (68 deg.F).
6.1.1.7 Metering System. Same as Method 5, Section 6.1.1.9.
6.1.2 Barometer. Same as Method 5, Section 6.1.2.
6.1.3 Dilution Tunnel Gas Temperature Measurement. A temperature
sensor capable of measuring temperature to within 3 deg.C
( 5 deg.F).
6.1.4 Dilution Tunnel. The dilution tunnel apparatus is shown in
Figure 5G-2 and consists of the following components:
6.1.4.1 Hood. Constructed of steel with a minimum diameter of 0.3
m (1 ft) on the large end and a standard 0.15 to 0.3 m (0.5 to 1 ft)
coupling capable of connecting to standard 0.15 to 0.3 m (0.5 to 1 ft)
stove pipe on the small end.
6.1.4.2 90 deg. Elbows. Steel 90 deg. elbows, 0.15 to 0.3 m (0.5
to 1 ft) in diameter for connecting mixing duct, straight duct and
optional damper assembly. There shall be at least two 90 deg. elbows
upstream of the sampling section (see Figure 5G-2).
6.1.4.3 Straight Duct. Steel, 0.15 to 0.3 m (0.5 to 1 ft) in
diameter to provide the ducting for the dilution apparatus upstream of
the sampling section. Steel duct, 0.15 m (0.5 ft) in diameter shall be
used for the sampling section. In the sampling section, at least 1.2 m
(4 ft) downstream of the elbow, shall be two holes (velocity traverse
ports) at 90 deg. to each other of sufficient size to allow entry of
the pitot for traverse measurements. At least 1.2 m (4 ft) downstream
of the velocity traverse ports, shall be one hole (sampling port) of
sufficient size to allow entry of the sampling probe. Ducts of larger
diameter may be used for the sampling section, provided the
specifications for minimum gas velocity and the dilution rate range
shown in Section 8 are maintained. The length of duct from the hood
inlet to the sampling ports shall not exceed 9.1 m (30 ft).
6.1.4.4 Mixing Baffles. Steel semicircles (two) attached at
90 deg. to the duct axis on opposite sides of the duct midway between
the two elbows upstream of sampling section. The space between the
baffles shall be about 0.3 m (1 ft).
6.1.4.5 Blower. Squirrel cage or other fan capable of extracting
gas from the dilution tunnel of sufficient flow to maintain the
velocity and dilution rate specifications in Section 8 and exhausting
the gas to the atmosphere.
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items are required for sample
recovery: probe brushes, wash bottles, sample storage containers, petri
dishes, and funnel. Same as Method 5, Sections 6.2.1 through 6.2.4, and
6.2.8, respectively.
6.3 Sample Analysis. The following items are required for sample
analysis: glass weighing dishes, desiccator, analytical balance,
beakers (250-ml or smaller), hygrometer, and temperature sensor. Same
as Method 5, Sections 6.3.1 through 6.3.3 and 6.3.5 through 6.3.7,
respectively.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents are required for
sample collection:
7.1.1 Filters. Glass fiber filters with a minimum diameter of 100
mm (4 in.), without organic binder, exhibiting at least 99.95 percent
efficiency (0.05 percent penetration) on 0.3-micron dioctyl phthalate
smoke particles. Gelman A/E 61631 has been found acceptable for this
purpose.
7.1.2 Stopcock Grease. Same as Method 5, Section 7.1.5. 7.2 Sample
Recovery. Acetone-reagent grade, same as Method 5, Section 7.2.
7.3 Sample Analysis. Two reagents are required for the sample
analysis:
7.3.1 Acetone. Same as in Section 7.2.
7.3.2 Desiccant. Anhydrous calcium sulfate, calcium chloride, or
silica gel, indicating type.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport, and Storage
8.1 Dilution Tunnel Assembly and Cleaning. A schematic of a
dilution tunnel is shown in Figure 5G-2. The dilution tunnel dimensions
and other features are described in Section 6.1.4. Assemble the
dilution tunnel, sealing joints and seams to prevent air leakage. Clean
the dilution tunnel with an appropriately sized wire chimney brush
before each certification test.
8.2 Draft Determination. Prepare the wood heater as in Method 28,
Section 6.2.1. Locate the dilution tunnel hood centrally over the wood
heater stack
[[Page 61869]]
exhaust. Operate the dilution tunnel blower at the flow rate to be used
during the test run. Measure the draft imposed on the wood heater by
the dilution tunnel (i.e., the difference in draft measured with and
without the dilution tunnel operating) as described in Method 28,
Section 6.2.3. Adjust the distance between the top of the wood heater
stack exhaust and the dilution tunnel hood so that the dilution tunnel
induced draft is less than 1.25 Pa (0.005 in. H2O). Have no
fire in the wood heater, close the wood heater doors, and open fully
the air supply controls during this check and adjustment.
8.3 Pretest Ignition. Same as Method 28, Section 8.7.
8.4 Smoke Capture. During the pretest ignition period, operate the
dilution tunnel and visually monitor the wood heater stack exhaust.
Operate the wood heater with the doors closed and determine that 100
percent of the exhaust gas is collected by the dilution tunnel hood. If
less than 100 percent of the wood heater exhaust gas is collected,
adjust the distance between the wood heater stack and the dilution
tunnel hood until no visible exhaust gas is escaping. Stop the pretest
ignition period, and repeat the draft determination procedure described
in Section 8.2.
8.5 Velocity Measurements. During the pretest ignition period,
conduct a velocity traverse to identify the point of average velocity.
This single point shall be used for measuring velocity during the test
run.
8.5.1 Velocity Traverse. Measure the diameter of the duct at the
velocity traverse port location through both ports. Calculate the duct
area using the average of the two diameters. A pretest leak-check of
pitot lines as in Method 2, Section 8.1, is recommended. Place the
calibrated pitot tube at the centroid of the stack in either of the
velocity traverse ports. Adjust the damper or similar device on the
blower inlet until the velocity indicated by the pitot is approximately
220 m/min (720 ft/min). Continue to read the p and temperature
until the velocity has remained constant (less than 5 percent change)
for 1 minute. Once a constant velocity is obtained at the centroid of
the duct, perform a velocity traverse as outlined in Method 2, Section
8.3 using four points per traverse as outlined in Method 1. Measure the
p and tunnel temperature at each traverse point and record the
readings. Calculate the total gas flow rate using calculations
contained in Method 2, Section 12. Verify that the flow rate is 4
0.40 dscm/min (140 14 dscf/min); if not,
readjust the damper, and repeat the velocity traverse. The moisture may
be assumed to be 4 percent (100 percent relative humidity at 85
deg.F). Direct moisture measurements (e.g., according to Method 4) are
also permissible.
Note: If burn rates exceed 3 kg/hr (6.6 lb/hr), dilution tunnel
duct flow rates greater than 4 dscm/min (140 dscfm) and sampling
section duct diameters larger than 150 mm (6 in.) are allowed. If
larger ducts or flow rates are used, the sampling section velocity
shall be at least 220 m/min (720 fpm). In order to ensure measurable
particulate mass catch, it is recommended that the ratio of the
average mass flow rate in the dilution tunnel to the average fuel
burn rate be less than 150:1 if larger duct sizes or flow rates are
used.
8.5.2 Testing Velocity Measurements. After obtaining velocity
traverse results that meet the flow rate requirements, choose a point
of average velocity and place the pitot and temperature sensor at that
location in the duct. Alternatively, locate the pitot and the
temperature sensor at the duct centroid and calculate a velocity
correction factor for the centroidal position. Mount the pitot to
ensure no movement during the test run and seal the port holes to
prevent any air leakage. Align the pitot opening to be parallel with
the duct axis at the measurement point. Check that this condition is
maintained during the test run (about 30-minute intervals). Monitor the
temperature and velocity during the pretest ignition period to ensure
that the proper flow rate is maintained. Make adjustments to the
dilution tunnel flow rate as necessary.
8.6 Pretest Preparation. Same as Method 5, Section 8.1.
8.7 Preparation of Sampling Train. During preparation and assembly
of the sampling train, keep all openings where contamination can occur
covered until just prior to assembly or until sampling is about to
begin.
Using a tweezer or clean disposable surgical gloves, place one
labeled (identified) and weighed filter in each of the filter holders.
Be sure that each filter is properly centered and that the gasket is
properly placed so as to prevent the sample gas stream from
circumventing the filter. Check each filter for tears after assembly is
completed.
Mark the probe with heat resistant tape or by some other method to
denote the proper distance into the stack or duct. Set up the train as
shown in Figure 5G-1.
8.8 Leak-Check Procedures.
8.8.1 Leak-Check of Metering System Shown in Figure 5G-1. That
portion of the sampling train from the pump to the orifice meter shall
be leak-checked prior to initial use and after each certification or
audit test. Leakage after the pump will result in less volume being
recorded than is actually sampled. Use the procedure described in
Method 5, Section 8.4.1. Similar leak-checks shall be conducted for
other types of metering systems (i.e., without orifice meters).
8.8.2 Pretest Leak-Check. A pretest leak-check of the sampling
train is recommended, but not required. If the pretest leak check is
conducted, the procedures outlined in Method 5, Section 8.4.2 should be
used. A vacuum of 130 mm Hg (5 in. Hg) may be used instead of 380 mm Hg
(15 in. Hg).
8.8.3 Post-Test Leak-Check. A leak-check of the sampling train is
mandatory at the conclusion of each test run. The leak-check shall be
performed in accordance with the procedures outlined in Method 5,
Section 8.4.2. A vacuum of 130 mm Hg (5 in. Hg) or the highest vacuum
measured during the test run, whichever is greater, may be used instead
of 380 mm Hg (15 in. Hg).
8.9 Preliminary Determinations. Determine the pressure,
temperature and the average velocity of the tunnel gases as in Section
8.5. Moisture content of diluted tunnel gases is assumed to be 4
percent for making flow rate calculations; the moisture content may be
measured directly as in Method 4.
8.10 Sampling Train Operation. Position the probe inlet at the
stack centroid, and block off the openings around the probe and
porthole to prevent unrepresentative dilution of the gas stream. Be
careful not to bump the probe into the stack wall when removing or
inserting the probe through the porthole; this minimizes the chance of
extracting deposited material.
8.10.1 Begin sampling at the start of the test run as defined in
Method 28, Section 8.8.1. During the test run, maintain a sample flow
rate proportional to the dilution tunnel flow rate (within 10 percent
of the initial proportionality ratio) and a filter holder temperature
of no greater than 32 deg.C (90 deg.F). The initial sample flow rate
shall be approximately 0.015 m\3\/min (0.5 cfm).
8.10.2 For each test run, record the data required on a data sheet
such as the one shown in Figure 5G-3. Be sure to record the initial dry
gas meter reading. Record the dry gas meter readings at the beginning
and end of each sampling time increment and when sampling is halted.
Take other readings as indicated on Figure 5G-3 at least once each 10
minutes during the test run. Since the manometer level and zero may
drift because of vibrations and temperature changes, make periodic
checks during the test run.
8.10.3 For the purposes of proportional sampling rate
[[Page 61870]]
determinations, data from calibrated flow rate devices, such as glass
rotameters, may be used in lieu of incremental dry gas meter readings.
Proportional rate calculation procedures must be revised, but
acceptability limits remain the same.
8.10.4 During the test run, make periodic adjustments to keep the
temperature between (or upstream of) the filters at the proper level.
Do not change sampling trains during the test run.
8.10.5 At the end of the test run (see Method 28, Section 6.4.6),
turn off the coarse adjust valve, remove the probe from the stack, turn
off the pump, record the final dry gas meter reading, and conduct a
post-test leak-check, as outlined in Section 8.8.2. Also, leak-check
the pitot lines as described in Method 2, Section 8.1; the lines must
pass this leak-check in order to validate the velocity head data.
8.11 Calculation of Proportional Sampling Rate. Calculate percent
proportionality (see Section 12.7) to determine whether the run was
valid or another test run should be made.
8.12 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, Section 8.7, with the
exception of the following:
8.12.1 An acetone blank volume of about 50-ml or more may be used.
8.12.2 Treat the samples as follows:
8.12.2.1 Container Nos. 1 and 1A. Treat the two filters according
to the procedures outlined in Method 5, Section 8.7.6.1. The filters
may be stored either in a single container or in separate containers.
Use the sum of the filter tare weights to determine the sample mass
collected.
8.12.2.3 Container No. 2.
8.12.2.3.1 Taking care to see that dust on the outside of the
probe or other exterior surfaces does not get into the sample,
quantitatively recover particulate matter or any condensate from the
probe and filter holders by washing and brushing these components with
acetone and placing the wash in a labeled glass container. At least
three cycles of brushing and rinsing are required.
8.12.2.3.2 Between sampling runs, keep brushes clean and protected
from contamination.
8.12.2.3.3 After all acetone washings and particulate matter have
been collected in the sample containers, tighten the lids on the sample
containers so that the acetone will not leak out when transferred to
the laboratory weighing area. Mark the height of the fluid levels to
determine whether leakage occurs during transport. Label the containers
clearly to identify contents.
8.13 Sample Transport. Whenever possible, containers should be
shipped in such a way that they remain upright at all times.
Note: Requirements for capping and transport of sample
containers are not applicable if sample recovery and analysis occur
in the same room.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quality control
Section measure Effect
------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.8, 10.1-10.4................ Sampling Ensures accurate
equipment leak measurement of stack
check and gas flow rate,
calibration. sample volume.
10.5.......................... Analytical Ensure accurate and
balance precise measurement
calibration. of collected
particulate.
16.2.5........................ Simultaneous, Ensure precision of
dual-train measured particulate
sample concentration.
collection.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, Section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Note: Maintain a laboratory record of all calibrations.
10.1 Pitot Tube. The Type S pitot tube assembly shall be
calibrated according to the procedure outlined in Method 2, Section
10.1, prior to the first certification test and checked semiannually,
thereafter. A standard pitot need not be calibrated but shall be
inspected and cleaned, if necessary, prior to each certification test.
10.2 Volume Metering System.
10.2.1 Initial and Periodic Calibration. Before its initial use
and at least semiannually thereafter, calibrate the volume metering
system as described in Method 5, Section 10.3.1, except that the wet
test meter with a capacity of 3.0 liters/rev (0.1 ft\3\/rev) may be
used. Other liquid displacement systems accurate to within
1 percent, may be used as calibration standards.
Note: Procedures and equipment specified in Method 5, Section
16.0, for alternative calibration standards, including calibrated
dry gas meters and critical orifices, are allowed for calibrating
the dry gas meter in the sampling train. A dry gas meter used as a
calibration standard shall be recalibrated at least once annually.
10.2.2 Calibration After Use. After each certification or audit
test (four or more test runs conducted on a wood heater at the four
burn rates specified in Method 28), check calibration of the metering
system by performing three calibration runs at a single, intermediate
flow rate as described in Method 5, Section 10.3.2.
Note: Procedures and equipment specified in Method 5, Section
16.0, for alternative calibration standards are allowed for the
post-test dry gas meter calibration check.
10.2.3 Acceptable Variation in Calibration. If the dry gas meter
coefficient values obtained before and after a certification test
differ by more than 5 percent, the certification test shall either be
voided and repeated, or calculations for the certification test shall
be performed using whichever meter coefficient value (i.e., before or
after) gives the lower value of total sample volume.
10.3 Temperature Sensors. Use the procedure in Method 2, Section
10.3, to calibrate temperature sensors before the first certification
or audit test and at least semiannually, thereafter.
10.4 Barometer. Calibrate against a mercury barometer before the
first certification test and at least semiannually, thereafter. If a
mercury barometer is used, no calibration is necessary. Follow the
manufacturer's instructions for operation.
10.5 Analytical Balance. Perform a multipoint calibration (at
least five points spanning the operational range) of the analytical
balance before the first certification test and semiannually,
thereafter. Before each certification test, audit the balance by
weighing at least one calibration weight (class F) that corresponds to
50 to 150 percent of the weight of one filter. If the scale cannot
reproduce the value of the calibration weight to within 0.1 mg, conduct
the multipoint calibration before use.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Record the data required on a sheet such as the one shown in
Figure 5G-4. Use the same analytical balance for determining tare
weights and final sample weights.
11.2 Handle each sample container as follows:
[[Page 61871]]
11.2.1 Container Nos. 1 and 1A. Treat the two filters according to
the procedures outlined in Method 5, Section 11.2.1.
11.2.2 Container No. 2. Same as Method 5, Section 11.2.2, except
that the beaker may be smaller than 250 ml.
11.2.3 Acetone Blank Container. Same as Method 5, Section 11.2.4,
except that the beaker may be smaller than 250 ml.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant
figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after the
final calculation. Other forms of the equations may be used as long as
they give equivalent results.
12.1 Nomenclature.
Bws = Water vapor in the gas stream, proportion by volume
(assumed to be 0.04).
cs = Concentration of particulate matter in stack gas, dry
basis, corrected to standard conditions, g/dscm (gr/dscf).
E = Particulate emission rate, g/hr (lb/hr).
Eadj = Adjusted particulate emission rate, g/hr (lb/hr).
La = Maximum acceptable leakage rate for either a pretest or
post-test leak-check, equal to 0.00057 m\3\/min (0.020 cfm) or 4
percent of the average sampling rate, whichever is less.
Lp = Leakage rate observed during the post-test leak-check,
m\3\/min (cfm).
ma = Mass of residue of acetone blank after evaporation, mg.
maw = Mass of residue from acetone wash after evaporation,
mg.
mn = Total amount of particulate matter collected, mg.
Mw = Molecular weight of water, 18.0 g/g-mole (18.0 lb/lb-
mole).
Pbar = Barometric pressure at the sampling site, mm Hg (in.
Hg).
PR = Percent of proportional sampling rate.
Ps = Absolute gas pressure in dilution tunnel, mm Hg (in.
Hg).
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
Qsd = Average gas flow rate in dilution tunnel, calculated
as in Method 2, Equation 2-8, dscm/hr (dscf/hr).
Tm = Absolute average dry gas meter temperature (see Figure
5G-3), deg.K ( deg.R).
Tmi = Absolute average dry gas meter temperature during each
10-minute interval, i, of the test run, deg.K ( deg.R).
Ts = Absolute average gas temperature in the dilution tunnel
(see Figure 5G-3), deg.K ( deg.R).
Tsi = Absolute average gas temperature in the dilution
tunnel during each 10 minute interval, i, of the test run, deg.K
( deg.R).
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 deg.K (528
deg.R).
Va = Volume of acetone blank, ml.
Vaw = Volume of acetone used in wash, ml.
Vm = Volume of gas sample as measured by dry gas meter, dcm
(dcf).
Vmi = Volume of gas sample as measured by dry gas meter
during each 10-minute interval, i, of the test run, dcm.
Vm(std) = Volume of gas sample measured by the dry gas
meter, corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
Vs = Average gas velocity in the dilution tunnel, calculated
by Method 2, Equation 2-7, m/sec (ft/sec). The dilution tunnel dry gas
molecular weight may be assumed to be 29 g/g mole (lb/lb mole).
Vsi = Average gas velocity in dilution tunnel during each
10-minute interval, i, of the test run, calculated by Method 2,
Equation 2-7, m/sec (ft/sec).
Y = Dry gas meter calibration factor.
H = Average pressure differential across the orifice meter, if
used (see Figure 5G-2), mm H\2\O (in. H\2\O).
U = Total sampling time, min.
10 = 10 minutes, length of first sampling period.
13.6 = Specific gravity of mercury.
100 = Conversion to percent.
12.2 Dry Gas Volume. Same as Method 5, Section 12.2, except that
component changes are not allowable.
12.3 Solvent Wash Blank.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.159
12.4 Total Particulate Weight. Determine the total particulate
catch, mn, from the sum of the weights obtained from Container Nos. 1,
1A, and 2, less the acetone blank (see Figure 5G-4).
12.5 Particulate Concentration.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.160
Where:
K2 = 0.001 g/mg for metric units.
= 0.0154 gr/mg for English units.
12.6 Particulate Emission Rate.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.161
Note: Particulate emission rate results produced using the
sampling train described in Section 6 and shown in Figure 5G-1 shall
be adjusted for reporting purposes by the following method
adjustment factor:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.162
Where:
K3 = constant, 1.82 for metric units.
= constant, 0.643 for English units.
12.7 Proportional Rate Variation. Calculate PR for each 10-minute
interval, i, of the test run.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17OC00.163
Alternate calculation procedures for proportional rate variation
may be used if other sample flow rate data (e.g., orifice flow meters
or rotameters) are monitored to maintain proportional sampling rates.
The proportional rate variations shall be calculated for each 10-minute
interval by comparing the stack to nozzle velocity ratio for each 10-
minute interval to the average stack to nozzle velocity ratio for the
test run. Proportional rate variation may be calculated for intervals
shorter than 10 minutes with appropriate revisions to Equation 5G-5. If
no more than 10 percent of the PR values for all the intervals exceed
90 percent PR 110 percent, and if no PR value
for any interval exceeds 80 percent